Home

Oki 2426 Printer User Manual

image

Contents

1. Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Getting Started 28 Setting Up Before connecting this printer to the computer and power supply the shipping packaging must be removed the toner cartridges must be installed and paper must be loaded Shipping Materials Removing 1 Remove any adhesive tape and packaging from the printer 2 Use the release handle to open the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 29 3 Remove the LED head restrainer from behind the LED heads in the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 30 4 Remove the black image drum and place it on a level surface Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide e 31 Setting Up CAUTION Never expose image drums to light for more than 5 minutes Always hold image drum by the ends Never expose image drums to direct sunlight Never touch the green surface of the drum 5 Remove the protective sheet Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 32 6 Put the black image drum back into the printer 1 Push the tab 2 inwards and remove the blanking plate from the drum 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each color drum Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 33 Toner Installation WARNING Take extreme care when handling toner Toner can b
2. Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 124 Additional Paper Trays Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 On the Device Option tab select the appropriate number of trays not including the Multi purpose tray 4 Click OK Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Device Option Available Options Available Tray Duplex Option Unit Printer Hard Disk Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 125 Duplex Unit Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 2 3 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options click Duplex and select Installed in the drop down list Click OK Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box
3. sess 347 IN Up Printing rtr ett ee 347 PostScript nube teh e ee everti 347 PCE innate n tee Ue ae e v a rH Rs 349 Custom Page Sizes 5 e d RR Re e pens eR eode vets 351 PostSctipt iie nde rib ete p 351 DOD p aes 355 Print Resolution sis i utet eeepc t renes 360 PCL or PostScript iei cse rd eR Enos 360 Duplex Printing 2 3 ederet ederent 362 Printing on Both Sides of the Paper esee 362 PostScript o PCI aout npe ers 362 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 9 Pimtng Booklets rrt tete t D e 365 PCL and Windows Me seeseeeeeeeeneeeeneee eene 365 Prm ng Watermarks eee rtr mcr ep er eri reti eden 367 PostScript HO ees eO e RET Sateen 367 PIS teeth ERE Ee ese Rm 369 Coll ting iic s ep eR ee eem eae M 371 PCL Or PostScripti erener tin pt ep ee 371 Font SubsttutiOn reet i e 372 PostScript Only sert e ette te te be e edes 372 Proof and Print eia P aedes 373 PCE Or POStScript iv si ep Re HO EP ERES 373 Secure Printing ue senio aee e ae 377 Printing Confidential Documents eene 377 PCL or PostScript 5 ag eee deter bees 377 Hard Disk Drive id ete ttt ims 381 PCL or PostScript idee datei 381 Ovetlays arte ettet e be ra e e DER 386 What are Overl ys 3 eee b b o eds 386 Example of Using Overlays esee 386 Creating Oyerlays eee d ees 387 Creating documents to use as
4. Setup Job Options ll Color m Media Size Legal 8 5 x 14in Source ll diat res s REC Weight Printer Setting l Paper Feed ptions m Finishing Mode Standard N up A Options r 2 Sided Printing None gt CIS m Driver Settings Untitled Add Remove Legal 8 5 x 14in Default Cancel Apply Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 134 NOTE If a paper tray is selected the Weight field becomes visible 5 Select the required paper type under Weight Setup Job Options Color Media 4 Size Legal 8 5 x 14in X Source Multi Purpose Tray v Weight CELES Paper Feed Options r Finishing Mode Options 2 Sided Printing None QA Driver Settings Untitled s Add Remove J Legal 8 5 x 14in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 135 NOTE If Printer Setting is selected make sure the printer has been set to the correct media type 6 Click the Paper Feed Options button and make any other selections Click OK Paper feed options m Fit to Page Resize document to fit printer page r Cover Printing T Paper feed options Use different source for first page IV Auto Tray Change v Media Check r Multi Purpose Tr
5. Depending on the application you may need to select your printer model Click the Properties dialog box This should open the printer driver settings 4 Important You must use the Oki PCL driver to do this Choose all of the printer driver settings with which you would like your overlay to print Try to keep the overlay to a single sheet Don t use N up duplex finisher options etc when creating an overlay These can be added when printing the document that includes the overlay Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Click Print Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give the file a meaningful name such as my template prn Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 298 Creating documents to use as overlays PostScript An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and can print to a file 1 2 Open in your application program Open the file to be stored as an overlay Choose File then Print Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your application s Print dialog box Depending on the application you may need to select your printer model Then click Properties This should open the printer driver settings Important You must use the Oki PostScript driver to do this NO o f Select the J
6. Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 220 Duplex Unit Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 2 3 Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options click Duplex In the drop down list select Installed Click OK Close the Printers dialog box General Sharing Ports Advanced l Color Management Security Device Settings EJ Device Settings Es Form To Tray Assignment m ie Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 4884 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s E E Installable Options Available Tray 1 Standard Duplex E Hard Disk Installed Memory Configuration 128 MB Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 221 Duplex Unit Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you m
7. 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 508 3 Remove the cradle complete with the four image drums and toner cartridges from the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 509 4 Press back the lock lever 1 5 Use the handles 2 and 3 to remove the old transfer belt from the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 510 6 Remove the new transfer belt unit from its packaging 7 Using the handles 2 and 3 align the pins 4 with the grooves 5 on the printer and insert the new transfer belt into the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 511 8 Move the lock lever 1 toward the front of the printer Make sure it locks the transfer belt into place 9 Reinstall the cradle complete with the four image drums and toner cartridges in the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 512 10 Close the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 513 Maintenance Changing the Fuser WARNING The fuser unit is very hot after printing Always use the handle when lifting it When the fuser unit reaches the end of its product life CHANGE FUSER UNIT is displayed in the control panel Fuser unit life is approximately 60 000 A4 sheets 1 Turn off the printer 2 Op
8. Printers 2 Right click the appropriate printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Color tab Setup Job Options Color Color Mode Auto Color C Manual Color C Monochrome Color Swatch Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 244 4 Under Color Mode click Manual Color 5 Under Color Setting click Natural Setup Job Options Color r Color Mode C Auto Color Manual Color C Monochrome r Color Setting C Auto Natural Monitort6500K Perceptual Black Finish C Unadjusted Auto C Gloss C Matte m Manual Adjustment Lightness p Q KI m pes Saturation p 9 mi o Color Swatch Default ten toy e Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 245 6 Select the method you wish to use Monitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics Monitor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For some photographs other settings may be better depending on the subj
9. This product complies with the requirements of the Council Directives 89 336 EEC EMC and 73 23 EEC LVD as amended where applicable on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility and low voltage Trademark Information Oki and Microline are registered trademarks of Oki Electric Industry Company Ltd ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Hewlett Packard HP and LaserJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company Microsoft MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Apple Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computers Inc Other product names and brand names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their proprietors Contents Notes Cautions etc ccsssecsssssneeesesssnseeecenensnsessnsneneeeeeenenseeensnenrerees 18 Introduction iuueni ped tta Rond Resa RO Rea anas dna E 19 Printer Models and Features eese 19 summary Table icc e tetto rae Oo e 19 Descriptions eee eed arte nep iens 20 How to use this manual norinni ironi ee sni Pt tern 21 ONNE e 21 Printing Pages Let tet ERA RERO UN ERR REPE 22 Getting Started aac codec ux iai pic ea 23 Unpacking 5e oet m eg e E eo e e tet 23 Printer Drivers Software Utilities and Documentation 24 Where to put the priDter 4 re
10. a The default setting b Touse this you must first set up the email and closing date information see page 663 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 684 Use Restrictions Use Restrictions Unregistered ID Local Print Disable Printing M E Disable Color Printing EI r You can set usage limits for unregistered clients data sent without ID and for local print print from operator panel such as menu map or file list When Disable Printing is set clients cannot change other settings e Disable Printing All printing is cancelled e Disable Color Printing Color data printing is cancelled Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 685 6 Click Finish The following window appears Job Account ID registration 20x List of registered IDs Add Name JobAcco Group Unregistere Delete Local Print 18790481 Change Other Printer 7 Use this window to add User Account IDs for the printer For more information see step 3 ff under Setting Up Account IDs on page 688 8 When done click End then OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 686 Changing Settings for a Registered Printer 1 From the main Print Job Accounting window highlight the printer you wish to change 2 Click Printer Properties The following window appears
11. eere 247 PostScript Driver sic s52ehe iere ker eere t eei Oe eR Re 248 OKI Color Matching eiiis oni nseni ieu 250 PostSeript dne rsi siasa ec ites fo 250 PostScript Color Matching eese 252 Using ICC Prohles e ett tete 254 PostScript Only 4n teet tese ageret ta e UE ve 254 Windows ICM Color Matching esee 257 PCL Of PostScript inet ei ee cates rer Rer 257 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet sess 258 IN Up Printing itd cedet d Ee dts 258 PostScripti eie eroe eren 258 POE He e E o p p RO MR vials 259 Custom Page 1768 Rep Re et e n e ene ieu 261 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 7 PCI o eecessaeeieendi ac melutem itae e 265 Print Resol ti ti uc reto eto re RERTEERES 270 PCL or Post eD une ERI ees EAR 270 Duplex Pintig ss uere Pe Om pe 271 Printing on Both Sides of the Paper esse 271 POStSCEDt eoe poe entire osi t Re 271 PGL eeu 273 P inting BOooklet ertet tet ed 275 PostSeript tes Ree ete tet t oe 275 PO oe n 278 Printing Watermarks nirani nennen eene 280 PCE ODY cs a5 sso atten tee pa eias e 280 Collatns E nwa tal eb ea 282 PCL or POStSCrIDU i here ou e p uh pacers ap ee 282 Proof and Print io Ed Ut etd RR 283 PCLE Ot POSISCHIDU i Lace tee Ge ce rea ton 283 SECure Printing 32 2 estes ie meo tam teens 287 Printing Confidential Doc
12. Click the Overlay button Ao NO Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 306 5 To define an overlay click the Define Overlays button Define Overlays x Defined Overlays Name Pages 1 Add Apply Remove Overlay Name Ipvau s Print on Pages aas ez Custom Pages Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Heb 6 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section The file is stored on the printers hard disk drive under this name The name is case sensitive 7 In ID Values enter the ID of the file Please refer to the instructions for the Storage Device Manager utility 8 To select the pages where the overlay prints use Print on Pages or Custom Pages to select specific page numbers in the document 9 Click Add 10 Click Close 11 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name Click the Add button to add the overlay to the list in Active Overlays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 307 12 Select Print Using Active Overlays First Page 13 Click OK 14 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 3
13. Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Specific Colors Example Company logo RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 155 and the sRGB setting PCL or PS driver PostScript Color Matching using the Absolute Colorimetric option see page 157 Use the Color Swatch Utility to print out a chart of RGB swatches and enter your desired RGB values in your application s color picker PS only see page 152 RGB or CMYK f you are printing from a graphics application such as Adobe Photoshop you may be able to use Soft Proofing to simulate the printed image on your monitor To do this you can use the ICC profiles provided see Windows ICM Color Matching on page 162 Print using the ICC profiles as the Print Space or Output space PS only Alternatively use PostScript Color Matching with the Absolute Colorimetric Setting see page 157 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 147 Color Matching Choosing a Method Printing Vivid Colors RGB only Use Oki Color Matching see page 155 with the Monitor 6500k Vivid sRGB or Digital Camera settings PCL or PS RGB or CMYK Use PostScript Color Matching see page 157 with the Saturation option Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 148 Color Matching Color Matching Options PCL Driver The Color Matching Options in the PCL driver can be used to help match your printed colors to t
14. Color Matching Color Matching Options PostScript Driver The PostScript driver offers several different methods of controlling the color output of the printer Setting Options Manually 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Document Defaults 3 Click the Color tab Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 434 4 Under Color Mode use the drop down list to select one of the following Color Control Methods a OKI Color Matching This is OKI s proprietary color matching system and affects RGB data only See OKI Color Matching on page 436 b PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer and affects both RGB and CMYK data See PostScript Color Matching on page 438 c No Color Matching Use this option to switch off all printer color matching No color correction occurs when selected This option is beneficial when other matching regimens are used specifically if you select a Color Simulation option d Print in Grayscale This option prints all documents as monochrome No color prints The printer interprets all colors as a variation of grays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 435 Color Matching Color Control Method OKI Color Matching PostScript This is OKI s proprietary color matching system It affects RGB data only Thi
15. If required select Request Job Name for each print job PostScript Driver PCL Driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 382 _ gt OO ON 0o Type a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK Select the number of copies Click Collate if applicable Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Click OK Click Print The document is stored on the hard disk It can then be printed on demand or deleted Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 383 Hard Disk Drive Printing a stored document 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU and press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you selected above Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 384 Hard Disk Drive Deleting a stored document 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU and press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to ent
16. Important To prevent jams Make sure there is no space between the paper and the paper guides and rear stopper Don t overfill the paper tray Capacity depends on the type of paper and the paper weight max 530 sheets of 80gm Don t load damaged paper Don t mix paper of different sizes paper quality or thickness Don t remove the paper tray during printing Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 496 6 If installed a lower paper tray cannot be used to print if there is no paper tray inserted above it Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 497 Maintenance Changing the Toner Cartridge NOTE After installing the new toner cartridge the message on the display TONER LOW or CHANGE TONER should disappear However this sometimes does not disappear until printing has been carried out If it still does not disappear reinstall the toner cartridge When the toner is running low TONER LOW is displayed in the control panel is the color name If printing continues without replacing the toner cartridge CHANGE TONER is displayed and printing is cancelled Depending on the operating environment print may become faint before this message is displayed At this stage remove the toner cartridge and check whether it is empty If so the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Cartridge life is approximately 10 000 letter size pages at 5 print density T
17. and enabled in the driver Standard paper sizes only Paper weight range 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper must be loaded print side up Only Tray 1 optional Trays 2 and 3 and the High Capacity Feeder trays can be used for duplex printing The Multi Purpose MP tray cannot be used for duplex printing Duplexing cannot be used if Paper Weight is set to Ultra Heavy See Paper Media Weight and Type on page 70 NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs Click Start gt Settings Printers and Faxes Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 175 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript Using 1 2 Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PS driver Click the Preferences button On the Layout tab under Print on Both Sides select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge Click OK Click Print x Printing Preferences EPER m Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Orientation Portrait O Landscape O Rotated Landscape Print on Both Sides O None Flip on Long Edge O Flip on Short Edge Page Order Front to Back Back
18. 12 Display Message DRUM NEAR LIFE EMPTY NEAR END TONER LOW TONER SENSOR ERROR BELT UNIT MISSING CANCELLING JOB CENTRO I F ERROR CHANGE IMAGE DRUM CHANGE BELT UNIT CHANGE FUSER UNIT CHANGE PAPER TO Meaning An image drum is nearing the end of its life indicates color Warning that Tray is empty MP Tray is Tray 0 The paper in the selected is nearly finished indicates paper tray Toner is low indicates color Error with the toner sensor indicates color Call for service Transfer belt unit is missing Cancelling the current job Centronics interface error parallel interface Change the image drum indicates color Change the transfer belt Change the fuser unit Paper must be changed to correct paper size and or media type indicates size or media type Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 522 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Display Message CHECK CHECK BELT UNIT CHECK DUPLEX CHECK FUSER UNIT CHECK IMAGE DRUM COLLATE FAIL COLOR ADJUSTING COLOR BALANCE ADJUST COMMUNICATION ERROR DATA ARRIVE DATA PRESENT DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED DISK FILESYSTEM IS FULL DISK FULL EEPROM INITIALIZE ERROR EMPTY ERROR POSTSCRIPT FATAL ERROR FUSER UNIT MISSING Meaning Chec
19. 598 4 The Start screen appears It allows you to change the settings of the following features Select Print Paper Source Copies 2 sided printing e Binding Collate Fitto page Print page range Restore Default e Save Settings Print Cancel Help About 5 If ERROR PDF to PS conversion failed displays the file contains an embedded font not installed on the system Using Acrobat delete the text that is embedded or unembed the embedded font In Acrobat select Tool Touchup Text attribute Remove the checkmark in the Embed box 6 For additional information see the PDF Print Direct Help file in the PDF Direct Print Utility Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide PDF Direct Print Utility 599 Storage Device Manager for Windows General Information This Utility lets you manage the printer s hard disk and flash memory and download fonts macros and firmware Storage Device Manager SDM provides a means of managing The printer s internal hard disk drive optional 20 GB partitioned as Common PCL and PostScript The printer s flash memory 2 MB Using the software improves the internal performance of the printer and provides a tool for downloading files from the computer to the printer s memory including Overlays such as logos addresses etc Graphic files Forms such as letterheads invoices etc Load this program from the
20. Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Settings tab 4 Under Installable Options make sure the Hard Disk is Installed 5 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box General Ports Scheduling Sharing Securty Device Settings xX Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray lt No gt XxX Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts lt No gt i Job Timeout lt 0 seconds gt Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap lt 600 pixel s B au Installable Options t5 Available Tray 1 Standard t5 Duplex Installed to EETEENEUSERES ip Memory Configuration lt 128 MB gt Change Hard Disk Setting i Not Installed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 404 Hard Disk Drive Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 On the Device Option tab click Printer H
21. CHECK message 523 CHECK BELT UNIT message 523 CHECK DUPLEX message 523 CHECK FUSER UNIT message 523 CHECK IMAGE DRUM message 523 Clasps envelopes 75 Cleaning Image drum 115 552 LED heads 517 Clearance space requirements for printer 25 Clients registering 651 CMY 100 Density 96 CMYK Color Space 96 CMYK or RGB Windows 2000 240 Windows Me 98 95 329 Windows NT 426 Windows XP 145 CMYK or RGB matching photographs Windows 2000 241 Windows Me 98 95 330 Windows XP 146 CMYK or RGB matching specific colors Windows 2000 242 Windows Me 98 95 331 Windows NT 428 Windows XP 147 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 741 CMYK or RGB matching vivid colors Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 CMYK vs RGB Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 324 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 CMYK Proofing images Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 COLLATE FAIL message 523 Collating Windows 2000 282 Windows Me 98 95 371 Windows NT 464 Windows XP 186 Color 100 CMY density 96 black printing 41 creating custom colors 593 594 596 Darkness adjustment 596 Hue adjustment for color 596 Lightness adjustment 596 Saturation adjustment 596 Vividness adjustment 596 Color adjusting Adjust density 93 Color swatches 593 594 596 Color Tuning 93 94 in software applications 596 message 523 of your monitor 596 Color adjustment Color Tuning
22. Click the New or Edit button Enter the text for the watermark Select the font size angle etc to be used New Watermark Click OK 5 Under Print watermark make your selections for how the watermark prints 6 Click OK twice 7T Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 368 Printing Watermarks PCL Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Click the Job Options tab Click Watermark The Watermark dialog box appears kh OD 5 Select a name from the Watermark list Watermark CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT New Remove Edit First Page only Cancel Help Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 369 NOTE To create a new watermark or edit an existing watermark Click the New or Edit button TEE T Di ea li mx m Eom Coo Enter the text for the watermark Select the attributes font size angle to be used Click OK The new watermark appears in the Watermark list 6 If you wish to print the watermark only on the first page of the document select First Page only 7 Click OK twice 8 Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 370 Collating PCL
23. Default LE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 705 4 Make your selections a Items to be included have a check mark in their box To delete or add an item click the box next to it to toggle the check mark on and off b To change the position of the item in the log click the name then click Up or Down 5 Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 706 Using the Reports Tool o The Job Accounting software can be used with Microsoft Excel to generate log reports using one of nine pre programmed macros Installing the Reports Tool Place the driver CD supplied with your printer in the CD ROM drive on the Server computer and wait for the Menu Installer to open If the CD does not AutoPlay click Start Run Browse Browse to your CD ROM drive Double click Install exe Click OK Click Next to accept the terms in the license agreement Select the language Click Network Software Administration Tools Job Accounting Reports Tool Follow the on screen instructions Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 707 Using the Reports Tool Generating a Log Report Using Excel 1 Make sure the Print Job Accounting server software is open and that a log has been acquired 2 From the Start menu click Okidata Print Control Open Print Control Reports
24. Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 116 Usage Menu Item Value Description TOTAL PAGE nnnnnn Shows total number of pages printed COUNT TRAY 1 PAGE nnnnnn Shows number of pages printed from COUNT Tray 1 TRAY 2 PAGE nnnnnn Shows number of pages printed from COUNT Tray 2 Displayed if optional Tray 2 is installed TRAY 3 PAGE nnnnnn Shows number of pages printed from COUNT Tray 3 Displayed if optional Tray 3 is installed MP TRAY PAGE nnnnnn Shows number of pages printed from COUNT Multi purpose Paper Tray COLOR PAGE nnnnnn Number of pages printed in color COUNT MONOCHROME nnnnnn Number of pages printed in monochrome PAGE COUNT Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 117 Item BLACK DRUM LIFE CYAN DRUM LIFE MAGENTA DRUM LIFE YELLOW DRUM LIFE BELT LIFE FUSER LIFE BLACK TONER CYAN TONER MAGENTA TONER YELLOW TONER Usage Menu Value Remaining nnn Remaining nnn Remaining nnn Remaining nnn Remaining nnn Remaining nnn 15K xxx 5K yyy 15K xxx 5K yyy 15K xxx 5K yyy 15K xxx 5K yyy Description Displays the remaining life of the black image drum as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the cyan image drum as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the magenta image drum as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the yellow image drum as a percentage
25. Making the interface connections Installing the printer drivers Installing network software You can also go to http my okidata com to see download a copy of the Software Installation Guide or for the latest information on your printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 62 Control Front Panel Lights and Display Diagram and Explanations 9 e o Attention This light is red 1 ON attention is required Printing continues FLASHING attention is required Printing stops Ready This light is green 2 ON ready to receive data OFF not ready to receive data FLASHING processing data or error Display Panel Displays 3 print status menu items in menu mode error messages Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 63 Control Front Panel Buttons Diagram and Explanations MENU ITEM VALUE SELECT 0 9 9 ON LINE CANCEL Online e Press to take the printer ONLINE or OFFLINE In Menu mode press to place the printer ONLINE When PAPER SIZE ERROR displays press to force the printer to print Cancel Press to cancel a print job Menu Press briefly to enter the MENU mode Press briefly again to select the next menu Press for more than 2 seconds to scroll through the different menus Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 64 Co
26. Properties of printer from which logs are acquired 2 x Printer user Option Printer Name Address ED Change Address Log Not acquired Printer Group Not in a group 3 Make any desired changes in settings on the various tabs Printer tab change printer name address group User tab add new User IDs or change information for existing User IDs Option tab modify log acquisition intervals times fees Operation at Log Full Inhibit initialization Auto Export Logs and Use Restrictions 4 Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 687 Setting Up Account IDs Adding Account IDs for a Registered Printer From the main Print Job Accounting window 1 Double click the printer for which you wish to set up Account IDs The following window appears Properties of printer from which logs are acquired DITE Not in a group Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 688 2 On the User tab click Register The following window appears Job Account ID registration Unregistere Local Print 18790481 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 689 3 Click Add The following window appears Job Account ID registration Not in a group moup ame Eel eaGress Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print
27. Setup The following window appears Setup 2 xl Mail setup Mail Address Log Storing Folder Change the closing date gt Mail server SMTP setup Mail server name Port number m Send mail Message to be sent with logs hs Title Send logs Default Header Footer Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 663 Set up the general information on the Mail Setup tab including the mail server when an email is to be sent and the header and footer text to be included with the email On the Mail Address tab enter a name and email address for the sender and the name and email address for the administrator to receive the emails On the Log Storing Folder tab enter the path where the automatically exported logs are to be stored Onthe Change the closing date tab enter the day of the month on which logs are to be closed Log reports will automatically be emailed to the administrator on the day after this Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 664 Defining Printer Groups If you wish to create groups of printers 1 From the main Job Accounting window click Printer Manages multiple printers as a group The following window appears Add a printer group Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 665 2 Enter the Group Name of y
28. Use true black when printing a combination of text and graphics Printer Menu Setting True Black True Black is turned on or off through the PCL Emulation Menu This setting only applies in PCL mode Turn the feature on or off Press ONLINE OFFLINE displays Press MENU repeatedly until PCL EMUL MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or repeatedly until TRUE BLACK displays Press VALUE either or until the desired status displays ON True Black is activated turned on OFF True Black is deactivated turned off 6 Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected status 7 When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays a RON Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 41 Loading Paper Tray 1 CAUTION To prevent paper jams Don t leave space between the paper and the paper guides and rear stopper Don t overfill the paper tray Capacity depends on the type of paper and the paper weight max 550 sheets of 20 Ib US Bond 75 g m paper Don t load damaged paper Don t load paper of different sizes paper quality or thickness at the same time Don t remove the paper tray during printing Close the paper tray gently Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 42 1 Pull out the paper tray Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 43 2 Load paper 3 Adjust the paper guides an
29. XP e 2000 e Me 98 95 NT4 0 Service Pack 6 or later Macintosh OS 8 1 8 5 x 8 6 x Adobe PS 8 6 or greater required OS 9 0 9 0 4 9 1 x 9 2 x LaserWriter 8 7 required Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 647 Installation O Installing the Print Job Accounting Server Software 1 o Place the driver CD supplied with your printer in the CD ROM drive on the Server computer and wait for the Menu Installer to open If the CD does not AutoPlay click Start Run Browse Browse to your CD ROM drive Double click Install exe Click OK Click Next to accept the terms in the license agreement Select the language Click Network Software Administration Tools Job Accounting Server Follow the on screen instructions If you want to create log reports using Excel install the report tools Click Report Tools Follow the on screen instructions Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 648 Installing the Print Job Accounting Client Software NOTE The printer driver s must also be installed on the Client computers Windows Client Computers 1 Place the driver CD supplied with your printer in the CD ROM drive and wait for the Menu Installer to open If the CD does not AutoPlay click Start Run Browse Browse to your CD ROM drive and double click Install exe then cli
30. eee 85 Windows Uim Y 119 Printer Drivers 3 n e t ette ee c ER e he eR RES 119 Which Printer Driver to Use sssesessseeeeeeeeeenenn 120 Memory Bnablig ete E EI e ERE snes 121 PostScript Only iiie aene eee dre rein 121 Hard Disk Drive Enabling eene 122 PostScript uendere eec meni 122 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 4 Paper Trays Enabling eene eneg diee 124 Post Septen eee eee de dep repere 124 POL csse nete t E RE Ee 125 Duplex Unt Enabling 4 5 e erm eS 126 PoStSeript 5 3 eo on eee ate ceti dedil cei ee M 126 PG ed stuns 127 Paper Feed Size and Media sse 128 Changing Defaults scsi aar e per EP ned 128 PostScript sca a RE e tiene 128 PG 133 Network Printer Status Utility eese 138 Operation eet tere e RU RU RE e erben 139 Factors that Affect Color Printing eese 140 Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors eee 141 Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can re produce s ee petet peer lesa tures NRA 141 Viewing Conditions tr ete tr dete 141 Printer Driver Color Settings eese 141 Monitor Settings sesiis nnar irre aariaa R ni 142 How your Software Application Displays Color 143 Paper Type cete e
31. the differences between the range of colors a monitor can reproduce versus the range of colors that a printer can reproduce viewing conditions printer driver color settings monitor settings how your software application displays color paper type Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 235 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can reproduce Neither a printer nor a monitor is capable of reproducing the full range of colors visible to the human eye Each device is restricted to a certain range of colors In addition to this a printer cannot reproduce all of the colors displayed on a monitor and vice versa Both devices use very different technologies to represent color A monitor uses Red Green and Blue RGB phosphors or LCDs a printer uses Cyan Yellow Magenta and Black CMYK toner or ink A monitor can display very vivid colors such as intense reds and blues These cannot be easily produced on any printer using toner or ink Similarly there are certain colors some yellows for example that can be printed but cannot be displayed accurately on a monitor This disparity between monitors and printers is often the main reason that printed colors do not match the colors displayed on screen Viewing Conditions A document can look very different under various lighting conditions
32. to improve print quality When using Ultra Heavy print speed slows the duplex option CANNOT be used Don t use very smooth shiny or glossy paper Don t use heavily embossed headed paper very rough paper or paper that has a large grain difference between the two sides Don t use paper with perforations cut outs or ragged edges Don t use carbon paper NCR paper photosensitive paper pressure sensitive paper or thermal transfer paper Avoid using recycled paper Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 74 Paper Media Recommendations Envelopes CAUTION Print media must be able to withstand 446 F 230 C for 0 2 second Use only recommended envelopes OKI 52206301 and 52206302 see page 578 Envelopes should be stored flat and away from moisture direct sunlight and heat sources Don t use envelopes with windows Don t use envelopes with metal clasps Don t use envelopes with self sealing flaps Don t use damp damaged or curled paper envelopes Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 75 Paper Media Recommendations Labels CAUTION Print media must be able to withstand 446 F 230 C for 0 2 second For recommended labels see the Handy Reference Guide or check http my okidata com Only use labels designed for color laser printers and photocopiers Labels must cover the entire carrier sheet Th
33. 240 min Auto emulation PCL IBM PPR III XL Epson FX AdobePostScrip ASCII RAW ASCII ON Job On Off 60 sec 30 sec Off Description Sets the time the printer waits before entering power save mode See page 57 Selects the printer emulation language The only printer languages that can be selected are those enabled through the Personality item of the service only Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is only accessed by Authorized Service Technicians Specifies PostScript PS communication protocol mode of data from USB In RAW mode Ctrl T is invalid Specifies PostScript PS communication protocol mode of data from the network print server In RAW mode Ctrl T is invalid PCL Controls how error messages are displayed On press SELECT to display the error Job the error remains displayed until the next print job is received PostScript PS Error messages are only shown during the print job regardless of setting ON printer recovers automatically after a memory overflow or print overrun This is the time the printer waits to cancel a print job when paper is not inserted after a request for paper is issued PostScript PS only Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 97 Item WAIT TIMEOUT LOW TONER JAM RECOVERY ERROR REPORT LANGUAGE System Configuration Menu The default settings are bold Value Off 5 sec to 300 sec default
34. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box General I Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Device Settings gt K Form To Tray Assignment E3 D Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 4884 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray No Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts No Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixels Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s c i Installable Options Available Tray 1 Standard Duplex Installed Hard Disk v Memory Configuration 128 MB al Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 122 Hard Disk Drive Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 On the Device Option tab click Printer Hard Disk 4 Click OK Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Device Option Available Options Available Tray 1 ES Duplex Opt
35. Color Control OKI Color Matching z Color Simulation None z Color Setting _ p Black Finish Auto Monitor 6500K Auto Glossy Malte J User Setting Advanced Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 339 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Driver OKI Color Matching Color Settings Monitor 6500k Auto Optimized for printing general documents when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Monitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K This is best for printing photographic images Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics and text Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce brightest colors Monitor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For some photographs other settings may be better depending on the subjects and the conditions under which they were taken Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce brightest colors sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color This option attempts to simulate
36. Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 155 Color Matching Color Control Method OKI Color Matching PostScript Color Settings Monitor 6500k Auto Optimized for printing general documents when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Monitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K This is best for printing photographic images Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics and text Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce brightest colors Monitor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For some photographs other settings may be better depending on the subjects and the conditions under which they were taken Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce brightest colors sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color This option attempts to simulate RGB color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printable colors are modified Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Op
37. Density adjustment is automatically run under specified conditions and reflected in the TRC compensation Manual Density adjustment is done manually see Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning on page 77 If EXECUTE is selected the printer immediately adjusts density and reflects it in the Toner Reproduction Curve TRC compensation Perform when the printer is idle May not work if the printer is not idle Ordinarily you do not use Color Tuning because TRC is automatically adjusted If you want to manually adjust the Toner Reproduction Curve TRC use Color Tuning to print the test pattern Change the settings for the HIGHLIGHT MID TONE and DARK for each color CMYK Keep changing the settings until you obtain your desired print quality See Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning on page 77 Adjusts HIGHLIGHT light area of Cyan Magenta Yellow or Black Toner Reproduction Curve TRC Plus darker Minus lighter See Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning on page 77 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 93 Item CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW OR BLACK MID TONE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW OR BLACK DARK CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW OR BLACK DARKNESS ADJUST REGISTRATION Color Menu The default settings are bold Value 0 14 24 3 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 Execute Description Adjusts MID TONE of Cyan Magenta Yellow or Black Toner Rep
38. Finishing Mode Standard N up v 2 Sided Printing TE Driver Settings posed Untitled v Add Rem Letter 8 5 x 11in E B Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 178 Printing Booklets PostScript NOTES You must have the duplex unit installed and enabled in order to print booklets Not available on some network connections See the Help file Some software applications may not support booklet printing The right to left setting allows a booklet to be printed for right to left reading which is used in some languages Important Booklet printing with the PostScript driver is restricted to two 2 pages per sheet Examples print a 572 x 8 inch booklet on 8 x 11 inch paper print an 8 x 11 inch booklet on 11 x 17 inch paper Open the file in your application Select File gt Print In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PS driver Click the Preferences button N Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 179 3 On the Layout tab under Pages Per Sheet select Booklet in the drop down list Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 180 4 Click OK Click Print L3 Printing Preferences Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Orientation Portrait O Landscape O Rotated Landscape Print on Both
39. Ib Index 64 to 203 g m Duplex unit 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper tray 530 sheets approx Manual feed 100 sheets approx Face up 100 sheets approx Face down 500 sheets approx 4 inch 6 4 mm minimum Start 2 mm Paper skew 1 mm per 100 mm Image expansion compression 1 mm per 100 mm Less than 3 min from powering up 25 C Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Specifications 573 Power supply Power consumption Operating environment Product life Dimensions Weight 120 115 127 volts AC 60 Hz 2 Hz OR 230 198 264 volts AC 50 Hz x 2 Hz Operating 1350 max 500 W average 25 C Standby 1200 max 150 W average 25 C Power saving 45 W max Operating 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C 20 to 80 RH maximum wet bulb temperature 77 F 25 C For maximum print quality 62 6 to 80 6 F 17 to 27 C 50 to 70 RH Off e 32 to 110 F 0 to 43 C 10 to 90 RH Storage 14 to 110 F 10 to 43 C 10 to 9096 RH 5 years or 600 000 sheets Width 16 9 inches 430 mm Depth 24 4 inches 620 mm Height 16 9 inches 430 mm 106 Ibs 48 kg not including optional accessories and paper Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Specifications 574 Consumables Toner Description Order No Black Toner anon eit D deta 52114901 Cyan Toner oit ite dd en dp dte 52114902 Magenta Tomei ssid eie ete reete n S d ru Gees
40. It is only available with the PCL printer driver 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver 3 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 4 Click the Setup tab Under Finishing Mode select Poster Print Setup Job Options Color r Media Size Letter 85x11in Source Automatically Select z Paper Feed Options r Einishing Mode r Driver Settings Untitled Add Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 399 5 Click Options and enter the configuration details PosterPrint 6 Click OK twice 7 Click OK Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 400 Windows NT Printer Drivers See your printed Software Installation Guide for information on installing printer drivers You can also go to http my okidata com to view and or download a copy of the Software Installation Guide or for the latest information on drivers for your printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 401 Which Printer Driver to Use Your printer comes with Windows drivers for PCL and Adobe PostScript PS You can install either of these or both if you wish Which driver you choose depends on your appli
41. Job Options Cor Device Options PosScip Job Options Color Device Option General Deis Color Management Fonts Setup General Detsis Color Management Setup Ve Media 3 gt cee EEE c eA Source Automatically Select p Source Automatically Select FE 1 Lec Paper Feed Options Einishing Mode Papet Feed Options Standard N up z r Nup Options lup T p 2 Sided Printing AE None p an 2Sided Printings T fas Off BIBLE faul E nanc Ad Hemove Letter 85 Tin Default cat am he Unprintable Aves Defaut Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 317 4 Select the required paper size under Size 5 Select the required paper feed under Source NOTE When a paper tray is selected the Type or Weight field becomes visible 6 PostScript Select the required paper type under Type PCL Select the required paper type under Weight PCL NOTE If Printer Setting is selected make sure the printer has been set to the correct media type Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 318 7 Click Paper Feed Options Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear
42. Range 0 25 TO 2 0 MM and 2 0 TO 0 25 MM in 0 25 mm increments 0 00 MM Range 0 25 TO 2 0 MM and 2 0 TO 0 25 MM in 0 25 mm increments 0 00 MM Range 0 25 TO 42 0 MM and 2 0 TO 0 25 MM in 0 25 mm increments 0 00 MM Range 0 25 TO 42 0 MM and 2 0 TO 0 25 MM in 0 25 mm increments Legal 14 Legal 13 5 Legal 14 Legal 13 5 Legal 14 Legal 13 5 Description Horizontal adjustment of the overall print position in 0 25 mm increments Vertical adjustment of the overall print position in 0 25 mm increments Horizontal adjustment of the overall print position of the back verso second page in 0 25 mm increments Vertical adjustment of the overall print position of the back verso second page in 0 25 mm increments Sets Tray 1 legal paper size Sets Tray 2 legal paper size Sets Tray 3 legal paper size Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 114 Item PCL TRAY 2 ID PCL TRAY 3 ID PCL MP TRAY ID DRUM CLEANING HEX DUMP System Adjust Menu The default settings are bold Value 1 to 59 default 5 1 59 default 20 1 59 default 4 OFF ON Execute Description Sets Tray 2 number for PCL emulation Sets Tray 3 number for PCL emulation Sets MP Tray number for PCL emulation ON The printer cleans the drum before printing Drum cleaning can help prevent unwanted horizontal white lines Drum cleaning shortens im
43. Remove OvelayName oS 1D valeti OOOO Print on Pages aipages Custom Pages Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 oe 6 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the name under which the file is stored on the printer s hard disk drive It is case sensitive 7 In ID Values enter the ID of the file Please refer to the instructions for the Storage Device Manager utility 8 Select which pages the overlay is to be printed on from Print on Pages or use Custom Pages to select specific page numbers in the document Click Add 9 Click Close 10 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name Click the Add button to add the overlay to the list in Active Overlays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 397 11 Select Print Using Active Overlays First Page First Page First Page First Page 12 Click OK 13 Click OK to Close the Properties dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 398 Printing Posters PCL Only This option allows you to configure and print posters by breaking up the document page into multiple pieces Each piece prints enlarged on a separate sheet Then the separate sheets are combined to produce a poster
44. Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent On the Job Options tab enter the number of copies If required check the Collate box kh OD 5 Under Job Type select Secure Print NOTE If you ve already used Secure Print to place a document on the hard disk drive but have not yet printed it out click the PIN button and enter a new job name Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 377 6 Under Job Name enter a job name of up to 16 characters If required select Request Job Name for each print job PostScript Driver PCL Driver Job Name Setting Job Name Job Name Settings Job Name T Request Job Name for each print job rest M Request Job Name for each print job Setting of PIN Bun Personal ID Number PIN Enter 4 digits Use numbers 0 9 Te tees OK Cancel Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK Enter the number of copies If required select Collate ep ips PostScript Driver PCL Driver Setup Job Options Color PostScript Setup ob Options Color dob Type C Normal C Proof and Print Secure Print igs nt C StoetoHDD PIN CStoetoHDD PN Copies 10 M Collate pisse 11 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box 12 Print the document Th
45. Some graphics applications such as CorelDRAW or Adobe Photoshop may display color differently from office applications such as Microsoft Word Please see your application s online help or user manual for more information Paper Type The type of paper used can also significantly affect the printed color For example a printout on recycled paper can look duller than one on specially formulated glossy paper Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 238 Color Matching Choosing a Method NOTE These suggestions are for guidance only Your results may vary depending on the application from which you are printing Some applications override without warning any color matching settings in the printer driver There is no one way to achieve a good match between the document displayed on your monitor and its printed equivalent There are many factors involved in achieving accurate and reproducible color However the following guidelines may help in achieving good color output from your printer There are several suggested methods depending on the type of document you are printing most common RGB see page 240 professional desktop publishing and graphics CMYK see page 240 photographic images see page 241 specific colors i e a company logo see page 242 printing vivid colors see page 243 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Op
46. Specifies the number of characters per line Specifies the paper length The print start position is where printing begins on the page It is also called Top of Form TOF TOF Position the distance between the first line of print and the top edge of the paper Left Margin the distance between where printing begins and the left hand edge of the paper Enable Print data is reduced to fit the LETTER size 11 inches 66 lines print area Sets the height of a character SAME Height constant regardless of cpi DIFF Height varies depending on cpi Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 105 Item CHARACTER PITCH CHARACTER SET SYMBOL SET FX Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value Description 10 CPI 12 CPI 17 CPI 20 Specifies character pitch CPI PROPORTIONAL Set 1 Set 2 Specifies which Epson character set is used PC 8 PC 8 Dan Nor Specifies a symbol set PC 8 TK PC 775 PC 850 PC 852 PC 855 PC 857 TK PC 858 PC 866 PC 869 PC 1004 Pi Font Plska Mazvia PS Math PS Text Roman 8 Roman 9 Roman Ext Serbo Croat1 Serbo Croat2 Spanish Ukrainian VN Int l VN Math VN US Win 3 0 Win 3 1 Bit Win 3 1 Cyr Win 3 1 Grk Win 3 1 Heb Win 3 1 L1 Win 3 1 L2 Win 3 1 L5 ISO Swedish1 ISO Swedish2 ISO Swedish3 ISO 2 IRV ISO 4 UK ISO 6 ASC ISO 10 S F ISO 11 Swe ISO 14 JASC ISO 15 Ita ISO 16 Por ISO 17 Spa ISO 21 Ger ISO 25 Fre
47. Step 3 Convert the Files to Binary bin Format 5 Under Look in go to the folder where the files are saved and double click the file name The file is saved as a bin file Filter File Created appears 6 Click OK 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 until you have converted all the files you wish to add to the project Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 618 Forms PCL Step 4a Add Files to the Project 1 Click Projects Add File to Project The Open dialog box appears 2 Highlight the bin file you wish to add Click Open The file name appears in the Project dialog box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the files you wish to include in the project appear in the Project dialog box NOTE An alternate way to add files to the project is 1 Open either My Computer or Microsoft Explorer 2 Browse to the directory where the prn files are stored 3 Select the files and drag them into the Project box Step 4b Delete Files from the Project To delete a file from the project 1 Click the file name 2 Click Projects Remove File from Project Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 619 Forms PCL Step 5 Check File Settings and Save the Project 1 To check the settings for the bin files double click the file name The Edit Component Name and ID dialog box appears Here you can edit the file name D number the
48. Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Color matching Solid colors Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Color matching Specific colors CMYK or RGB Windows 2000 242 Windows Me 98 95 331 Windows NT 428 Windows XP 147 RGB only Windows 2000 242 Windows Me 98 95 331 Windows NT 428 Windows XP 147 RGB or CMYK Windows 2000 242 Windows Me 98 95 331 Windows NT 428 Windows XP 147 Windows 2000 242 251 Windows Me 98 95 331 340 Windows NT 428 437 Windows XP 147 156 Color matching Vivid colors CMYK or RGB Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide e 743 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 RGB only Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 RGB or CMYK Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 Color matching Warm or cool colors Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 Color Menu 93 default settings 581 Color printing black 41 restrict for clients 651 Color Profiles ICC Profiles Windows 2000 PS or PCL 257 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 346 Windows XP PS or PCL 162 Color Rendering Dictionary CRD Using ICC Profiles Windows 2000 254 Windows Me 98 95 344 Windows XP 159 Windows 2000 252 Windows Me 98 95 341 Windows NT 438 Windows XP 157 Color samples swatches 593 Color Set
49. Windows NT 448 Windows XP 169 Paper Feed Manual paper feed 55 97 Paper Feed MP Tray 55 Paper Sizes 69 Paper Types 72 73 Paper Weights 72 73 Paper Feed Opening and closing the rear paper exit 53 54 55 Paper Feed Paper Size effect of 69 Paper Feed Paper Type effect of 69 Paper Feed Paper Weight effect of 69 Paper Feed Selecting 52 Paper Feed Settings 52 67 70 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 763 Paper Feed Short Edge first Windows 2000 264 Windows NT 448 Windows XP 169 Paper Feed Source through Print Menu 89 Paper Feed Straight through path 53 54 Paper Feed Switching between paper trays 49 Paper Feed Tray 1 Paper Sizes 69 Paper Types 72 73 Paper Weights 72 73 Paper Feed Tray 2 Paper Sizes 69 Paper Types 72 73 Paper Weights 72 73 Paper Feed Tray 3 Paper Sizes 69 Paper Types 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 Paper gauge 30 pages left 495 Paper guides 44 adjusting 496 PAPER JAM message 524 Paper jams clearing 527 528 529 530 531 532 534 535 537 print job cancelled 98 print job continues 98 printer does not print after jam is cleared 539 Duplex Unit 535 frequent 538 Front cover 529 Fuser unit 532 jam recovery menu setting 98 Opening and closing the rear paper exit 53 54 55 Paper loading precautions 42 Paper separator 534 Paper tray 528 Paper trays additional 537 preventing 496 use oldest paper first 495 Rear cover 531 Straight th
50. Windows XP 199 P Packaging for shipment LED head restraint 30 materials for shipping the printer 29 Packing materials shipping the printer 521 Page counts by Tray Number 117 Color vs Mono 651 Color pages printed with 117 Monochrome pages printed with 117 Multi purpose MP tray 117 restricting printing 651 Total 117 Page Size See Paper Size Paper adding paper 495 order of use oldest paper first 495 tear proof 577 waterproof 577 Paper Media part numbers 577 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 762 Paper Media Size by paper tray 573 Paper curl reducing 95 when fed 538 Paper Exit and Paper Size 69 Capacity Face Up Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 capacity 573 effect of Paper Type 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 Paper Exit Rear Paper Sizes 69 Paper type 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 Paper Exit Top Paper Sizes 69 Paper Type 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 Paper Feed effect of Paper Type 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 Problems 538 too many sheets are fed 538 Paper Feed and Paper Size 69 Paper Feed Auto Tray Switch set to ON 49 Paper Feed Automatic ejection 98 switching between trays 50 sequence of use 51 Paper Feed Defaults Windows 2000 PCL 228 PS 223 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 317 Windows NT PCL 414 PS 410 Windows XP PCL 133 PS 128 Paper Feed Long Edge first Windows 2000 264
51. Windows XP Operation 210 11 Select Print Using Active Overlays IV Print Using Active Overlays Active Overlays First Page Add Defined Overlays First Page Define Overlays Test Print OK Cancel Help Default 12 Click OK 13 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 211 Printing Posters PCL Only This option allows you to configure and print posters by breaking up the document page into multiple pieces Each piece prints enlarged on a separate sheet Then the separate sheets are combined to produce a poster It is only available with the PCL printer driver 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Preferences button 3 On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode select Poster Print Setup Job ptions Color Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in i Source Automatically Select xi Paper Feed ptions Finishing Made a Options Driver Settings Untitled X Adi el Letter 8 5 x 11in Default OK Cancel Apply Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 212 4 Click Options and enter the configuration details PosterPrint Options Enlarge BENI Setting Add Regstration Marks Add
52. about 0 5 MB each for PCL Macros and PostScript Forms Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 631 Overlays Windows 2000 and XP PCL Defining In Windows 2000 overlays can only be printed using the PCL driver 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the Oki PCL printer icon then click Printing Preferences The OkiPrinting Preferences dialog box appears Click the Overlay tab Click Define Overlays Under Overlay Name enter a name for the overlay Under D Value enter the ID number for the file saved using the Storage Device Manager software see the File List printout 7 In the Print on Pages drop down list select on which pages the overlay is to be printed or select Custom and enter specific page numbers under Custom pages 8 Click Add then click Close The overlay you defined appears in the Defined overlays list 9 Click OK and close the Printers dialog box o0 Ww Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 632 Overlays Windows 2000 PCL Printing 1 2 Open the document in the software application Click File Print The Print dialog box appears Click the Overlay tab Under Defined Overlays click any overlays you wish to use To select more than one press the Ctrl key while selecting the names Click Add Each name appears in the Active overlays box To prin
53. make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 262 3 Under Tray Selection in the Paper Source drop down list select Multi Purpose MP Tray 4 Click the Advanced button Under Paper Output in the Paper Size drop down list select Postscript Custom Page Size Shot Edge Ft m 9 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 263 5 Enter the Width and Height for the custom paper Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm 6 Select the Paper Feed Direction Click OK NOTE Long Edge First media feeds in long edge first Short Edge First media feeds in short edge first Long Edge First flipped Reserved for future use Short Edge First flipped Reserved for future use 7 Click OK 8 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 264 Custom Page Sizes PCL NOTE Up to 32 custom page sizes can be defined in the PCL driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the driver to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Wid
54. the User is informed by email that they have exceeded their limits for that 24 hour period g Click Finish 6 Repeat the previous step for each Account ID to be added 7 Click End Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 696 Importing Account IDs from a Registered Printer Once you create an account ID for a registered printer you can import it into records for other registered printers groups in the System The Account ID will bring with it the same settings such as usage limits but you can change the settings for the account on the newly assigned printer see below once the record is imported From the main Print Job Accounting window 1 Double click the printer or group for which you wish to import Account IDs 2 On the User tab click Register The following window appears Job Account ID registration 2l xi List of registered IDs Add Name JobAcco Gru Fred G 122 Delete Local Print 18790481 Writers 1000 henge Shange Group Other Printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 697 3 Click Other Printer The following window appears Import User Group xxx3 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 698 4 From the Import Source list select a printer or group from which you want to import Account ID s a
55. 107 PPR emulation 105 Paper Size Letter 69 Paper Size Manual Feed 67 Paper Size MP Tray 67 69 Paper Size MP tray 92 Paper Size Printer driver 68 Paper Size Rear exit 69 Paper Size Selecting 67 68 Paper Size Settings 52 67 70 Paper Size Standard 89 Paper Size Top exit 69 Paper Size Tray 1 69 Paper Size Tray 2 69 Paper Size Tray 3 69 Paper Size Tray number 114 Paper Size Wrong paper size 64 Paper skew 573 Paper source See Paper Feed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 765 Paper trays capacity 573 Custom page size See Paper Size Identifying with labels media size 570 numbers 570 Multi purpose MP tray See Multi purpose MP tray See Paper Size order of use 497 oldest paper first 495 Page counts See Page counts Rear Cover 531 Selecting 52 Straight through exit 531 Tray 0 is the MP Tray 522 Paper trays Auto Tray Switch set to ON 49 Paper trays Automatic switching 50 89 sequence of use 51 89 Paper trays Enabling Windows 2000 PCL 220 PS 219 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 315 Windows NT PCL 407 PS 406 Windows XP PCL 125 PS 124 Paper trays Matching print job paper size to tray 89 Paper trays optional 567 Paper trays Paper size automatic recognition 67 Paper trays PCL emulation number 115 multipurpose tray 115 Paper trays Sequence of use automatic tray switching 89 Paper trays Source through Print Menu 89 Paper trays Switching between trays 49 Paper t
56. 138 Soft reset USB 110 Software applications how color is displayed Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Media Type 52 67 70 Paper Feed 52 67 70 Paper Size 52 67 70 Paper Type 52 67 70 Software Utilities 600 733 Spanish display language 98 Specifications for printer 572 Speed print Monochrome 90 Spots on output 113 mm intervals 540 44 94 mm intervals 540 evenly spaced 540 See Print Quality Problems sRGB Color matching Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 sRGB Color Matching Method Windows 2000 246 Windows Me 98 95 335 Windows NT 432 Windows XP 151 Stacker Output capacity Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 STACKER FULL message 525 Stains toner 498 Status messages 522 See Messages Status Utility Windows 2000 233 Windows Me 98 95 321 Windows NT 419 Windows XP 138 Storage of paper 74 Storage device manager 600 Straight through paper feed path 53 54 Paper type 72 73 Paper weight 72 73 Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 778 Stripes on output See Print Quality Problems Subnet mask 111 Sunlight monitor settings Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 Support website
57. 17 Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help amp 9 a3 2 38 Links Best of the Web Back ar Search A a Address nttp 2 192 168 0 1 ese Network Summary General 3 Serial Number 9043589 Printer Status Ethernet Address 00401789FE8s Cable Type 108 Netw ummary Speed 100Mbps Link Status Goot Login as Admin F W Version 6 51 A232B Polarity Norr Network Connection Rx Packets 852710 Tx Packets 856 Rx Packets Unavailable 0 Tx Packet Errors 0 Job Log Rx Packet Errors o Tx Packet Retries 0 Checksum Errors o Print Jobs Printer Menu Error TCP IP EtherTalk NetWare DISABLED Mode PSERVER Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 721 Login as Admin This brings up the Enter Network Password window You must log in before accessing the Printer Menu Enter Network Password Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 722 Job Log This displays the Print Job Log for the selected printer Z http 77192 168 0 17 Microsoft Internet Explorer DcETEUUETUUECNS es gt Oo A449 d uis Erbe eves Back Forward Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Address hitp 7192 168 0 1 x Go A Print Job Log System Up Time 06 days 03 hours 40 mins 40 secs Total Jobs Printed 315 Job Information TCP IP IP Address 192 168 0 1 TCP P
58. 19 Printer Models and Features Descriptions Single pass digital technology for high quality speed and reliability Versatile paper handling Standard 530 sheet paper tray Standard 100 sheet multi purpose tray for card stock envelopes labels etc Optional 530 sheet paper trays providing up to a maximum of 1690 sheet capacity High capacity 20Gb hard disk drive optional Flexible interfaces with automatic switching USB High speed bi directional parallel IEEE 1284 Industry standard network connectivity via internal network interface card Environmentally friendly the advanced power save mode minimizes power consumption and the separate toner and drum design cuts down on waste Automatic color balance adjustment To ensure consistent output at all times the printer automatically performs a color check when the machine is switched on or when the top cover is opened and closed After the check the printer automatically adjusts the color balance It can even be set to adjust the color balance during long print runs Auto media detect detects the weight of the media being fed through the printer then automatically adjusts the fusing temperature speed if necessary and transfer voltage to ensure correct fusing and print quality Duplex printing for fast two sided output standard on dn and e models optional on n models Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Introducti
59. 2 Right click the printer name Click Document Defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 410 Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 411 3 On the Advanced tab under Document Options Paper Output click Paper Source 4 Select the paper feed in the Change Paper Source Setting list Document Settings Document Options 5 Click Paper Size 6 Select the size in the Change Paper Size Setting list 3 2 Sided Printing None PostScript Options Legart3 B Legal13 5 a Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 412 7 Click Media Type 8 Select the media from the Change Media Type Setting list 9 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box Document Settings Document Options t5 Paper Output Paper Size lt Letter gt a Paper Source Multi Purpose Tray RB Input Slot Option N UP lt 1 UP gt 2 Sided Printing None PostScript Options Heavy 28 32lb Ultra Heavy 33 54lb a
60. 3 Click Enable Macros Excel opens The following window appears over it Look in amp Logs et Ed ca XXX1 csv History amp Desktop My Documents ii 2 aa File name perm Open Files of type osv Cancel My Network ls Open as read only Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 708 4 Browse to the log file you wish to open Click Open The file opens in Raw Data mode 5 Select the worksheet you wish to view from the Change worksheet drop down list e g Printer Usage The window changes to display the selected worksheet El Job Accounting Reports Tool C Program Files Okidata Print Job Accounting Logs XXXx1 cs jareprexis Change worksheet Printer Usage Toggle worksheet visibility Printer Detail Refresh Open new file 75 Select date range R Printer usage by printer Ae Belem m Colour Pages O Mono Pages O Total Jobs XXX1 Printer Hame I4 4 bii Printer Usage Printer Detail Account Summary F Account Usage Jg Account Detail x User Summary User Usage User De Ready Calculate f e E E Z 6 To print the data press Ctrl P 7 When done click X to close Excel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 709 Available Excel Macros Macro What is Included Acco
61. 40 sec Continue Stop ON OFF ON Off English German French Italian Spanish Swedish Norwegian Danish Dutch Turkish Portuguese Polish Description PCL Wait Timeout is the length of time the printer waits before automatically printing and ejecting received data when no end page code or data end code is received PostScript The job is cancelled regardless of the setting When LOW TONER displays CONTINUE printing continues STOP printing stops The printer goes offline Determines whether or not printing continues after a paper jam has been cleared OFF Cancels after the paper jam is cleared the print job being printed when the paper jam occurred ON Continues after the paper jam is cleared the print job being printed when the paper jam occurred ON Error Report prints when internal error occurs PostScript only Selects the language of the printer display Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 98 Item FONT SOURCE FONT NO FONT PITCH FONT HEIGHT PCL Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value Resident DIMMO Downloaded 1000 C001 S001 0 44 cpi to 99 99 cpi in 0 01 cpi increments Default 10 00 cpi 4 00 to 999 75 point in 0 25 point increments Default 12 00 point Description Selects the location of the PCL fonts DIMMO Only displays if the font DIMM ROM is installed Downloaded displays only if fonts have
62. 482 PostScript Oder RES RON 483 Downloading the print file to use as an overlay 484 PCE ofPOSUSCHDtU 5g ette e pite ee 484 Defining Overlays a co dee ree tr eet eb ee Oa 486 PostScript ote eU e Hos or TRU PRSE 486 PCIe ignes ess REDDAM din E t 490 Printing Posters n teme ee e Een 493 POE Only d Steht ete e tei pete 493 Maintenance xs adeo pA te RR BREUI REB REO UE 495 Adding P pet uoce e teh ertet tt 495 Changing the Toner Cartridge sese 498 Changing the Image Drum eene 505 Changing the Transfer Belteino henii iiair 508 Changing the Fu ser iter treten ES ate Se Re eei ats 514 Cleaning the LED he ds 2 eee eene 517 Moving Shipping the Printer ee 520 TroublesbooU gods etc dces cad dilodnS hudtdiia Mode cip MEE 522 Messages on Control Front Panel Display esses 522 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 12 Lastof MeSSages eee rte OE en 522 Repeating Asterisk Symbol eee 526 Paper J ms uui ee ee oae ee teme 527 Cle ting x us gt Me eee Re Ee RUPEE 527 Check the paper tray sis teases eed e 528 Check behind the front cover esee 529 Checkethe transtetbelt uh er rette 530 Check behind the rear cover sese 531 Check th fuser Unites eoe riter e Ps 532 Check the paper separator
63. 52114903 Yellow Toner isses eene e raees 52114904 Drums Description Order No Black Image Drum ssseeme 56117901 Cyan Image Drum ssesssseeeeeen 56117902 Magenta Image Drum sse 56117903 Yellow Image Drum eee 56117904 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Consumables 575 Fuser Units Description Order No Fuser Unit 120V 0 cccccccccccssssecceceeeeeeececeeeesessestsaeeaeeees 41945601 Fuser Unit 230V ccccccecccssscsccceceeeeeeececeeeesesssstaeeaeeees 41945607 Transfer Belt Description Order No Tfranster DE etd cect eet ee tea 41945501 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Consumables 576 OKI Print Media OKI SynFlex Waterproof and Tear proof Wess be Sigzooo Order No White 875 x 11 100 sheets eeeeneee 52205901 OKI Bright White Proofing Paper Order No 32 Ib US Bond 875 x 11 500 sheets 52206101 OKI Premium Card Stock Order No White 60 Ib Cover 8 x 11 250 sheets 52205601 White 90 Ib Index 8 x 11 250 sheets 52205602 White 110 Ib Index 875 x 11 250 sheets 52205603 OKI Premium Color Transparencies m OKr Order No BAX 113 50 sheets unes eee etes 52205701 Executive Series 2426 Printer F
64. 718 Checking the Status of Printers on the Network 1 Open Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Type in the IP address for the printer e g http 192 168 0 1 NOTE To find the IP address for the printer do any of the following Open the Print Job Accounting software and select the printer in the Printer Tree then click Printer gt Properties Use the printer s front panel display to navigate to the network menu see your printer s User s Guide for details Printa list of menu settings see your printer s User s Guide for details Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 719 3 Press Enter The following Printer Status window appears Wj http 192 168 0 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer E http 192 168 0 1 Printer Status Network Summary T E Job Log Network Summary Gener ral REN Printer Port NetWare TCP IP EtherTalk Email Alerts SNMP Traps Admin Web Copyright 2002 OKIDATA Div of Oki Data Americas Inc Printer Status The default opening screen To see real time printer status click the Update Status button Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 720 Network Summary Clicking this will bring up a window with detailed information about the network including General Settings NetWare TCP IP JetAdmin LAN Server DLC EtherTalk Port Configuration E http 77192 168 0
65. 74 76 Swedish display language 98 SWOP 95 Symbol sets FX emulation 106 PCL emulation 100 PPR emulation 104 Synflex print media 577 System Adjust Menu 114 115 System Administrator installing a network connection 62 System Configuration Menu 97 default settings 582 System Menu default settings 591 T TCP IP Protocol 111 Tear proof paper 577 Television default Color Temperature setting Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 Temperature operating specifications 574 Printing specifications 74 75 76 Requirements for printing for envelopes 75 for labels 76 for paper 74 storage specifications 574 Test Registration Adjust 525 Test Print Menu 87 ID Check Pattern 87 Tests Network self diagnosis 111 Text Height FX emulation 108 PPR emulation 105 reducing to fit on letter size paper 107 Thermal Transfer Paper 74 Thickness Paper Labels 73 Time start up time 573 to first print color 572 mono 572 TOF See Top of Form Toner 498 Black 41 disposal 500 Handling precautions 34 Installation 34 498 Messages don t clear 39 Life Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 779 by color 118 life expectancy 498 by color 118 of first toner cartridge in a new image drum 498 LOW TONER menu setting 98 messages do not clear 498 packing for shipment 521 part numbers 575 replacing 505 rubs off output 543 safety precautions 498 sealing for shiipping 521 stains 498 ton
66. 98 95 326 335 Windows NT 423 432 Windows XP 142 151 default Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 Monitor display doesn t match output Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 324 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 Monitor matching color swatches Windows 2000 247 Windows Me 98 95 336 Windows NT 433 Windows XP 152 Monochrome printing 154 249 338 435 Moving the printer 29 520 LED head restraint 30 packing materials 521 sealing the toner 521 Multi purpose MP tray 117 Manual paper feed 55 Page count 117 Paper Sizes 67 69 92 Paper Type 72 73 92 Paper Weight 72 73 92 PCL Emulation Tray number 115 Print Menu setting 89 Specifying use 89 Tray 0 522 Multiple pages Printed on one sheet Windows 2000 PCL 259 PS 258 Windows Me 98 95 PCL 349 PS 347 Windows NT PCL 441 PS 440 Windows XP PCL 164 PS 163 N NCR Paper 74 Netware Protocol 111 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 759 Network communication protocol 97 DHCP BOOTP 111 Ethernet frame type 111 EtherTalk protocol 111 Gateway address 111 graphic intensive applications 555 Initialization 111 installation and Administrator s authority 62 Interfaces 61 62 IP address 111 Menu Map 111 NETBEUI protocol 111 Netware protocol 111 RARP 111 Self diagnosis tests 111 Subnet mask 111 TCP IP protocol 111 tracking printer usage 646 NETWORK ERROR message 524 Network interface 573 Network M
67. Click OK and wait for the File List to print From the Control Front Panel NOTE To print the File List from the control front panel Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears Press ITEM either or until PRINT FILE LIST appears Press SELECT Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 623 Internal Hard Disk Drive Maintenance Flash Memory Maintenance View and Delete Files HDD Print Jobs Feature The HDD Print Jobs feature allows you to view and delete the Proof amp Print and Secure Print files stored on the printer s internal hard drive 1 Open Storage Device Manager Click the icon for the printer whose contents you wish to view 2 Click Printers HDD Print Jobs The HDD Print Jobs dialog box appears HDD Print Jobs x Access Job Types C View User Jobs C View AllJobs Enter PIN Enter Admin Password 0000 7777 aaa IV Proof and Print Jobs Passw swen mtem ID Type Copies Stored 3 Under Job Types select Secure Jobs to view Secure Print jobs and or Proof and Print Jobs to view Proof amp Print jobs Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 624 4 To view the jobs stored for a particular client a Select View User Jobs under Access b Type in the client s 4 digit User PIN c Press Enter all stored jobs a Select View All Jobs b
68. DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy is printed If the software application being used has a collate print option it must be turned OFF for proof and print to operate correctly Proof and print may not be available in some software applications 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Preferences button 3 Enter the number of copies If required select Collate PostScript Driver PCL Driver Printing Preferences Setup Job Options Color amp Printing Preferences Job Type O Normal Proof and Print Secure Print O Store to HDD PIN Job Type O Normal Proof and Print O Secure Print O Store to HDD Copes 1d Copies 15 4 Collate Scale Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 187 a Under Job Type select Proof and Print b Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name Setting If required select Request Job Name for each print job Job Name Setting Job Name Setting Job Name Job Name C Request Job Name for each print jot C Request Job Name for each print job 8 Personal ID Number Setting of PIN Enter 4 digits Enter 4 digits Use number 0 9 c Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK 4 Click OK Click Print The document
69. Device Font ie Document Options Advanced Printing Features Enabled E SB PostScript Options f Printer Features Media Type PAE Multipurpose tray is handled as manual feed No Tray Switch On Media Check On Page Rotate Normal Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 132 Paper Feed Size and Media Changing Defaults PCL The normal default for these items is automatic detection NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer driver instructions are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the software under Page Setup 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 On the Setup tab under Media select the required paper size in the Size drop down list Setup Job Options Color Media Size Legal 8 5 x 14in Source Automatically Select X Paper Feed Options Finishing Mode Standard N up x Options Driver Settings Untied z Add Legal 8 5 x 14in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 133 4 Select the required paper feed under Source
70. Displays the remaining life of the belt as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the fuser roller as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the black toner as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the cyan toner as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the magenta toner as a percentage Displays the remaining life of the yellow toner as a percentage Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 118 Windows XP Printer Drivers See your printed Software Installation Guide for information on installing printer drivers You can also go to http my okidata com to view and or download a copy of the Software Installation Guide or for the latest information on drivers for your printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 119 Which Printer Driver to Use Your printer comes with Windows drivers for PCL and Adobe PostScript PS You can install either of these or both if you wish Which driver you choose depends on your application f you use TrueType fonts and you do not print PostScript including eps files graphics choose the PCL driver This is more efficient and gives good results f you use PostScript fonts or print PostScript graphics choose the PostScript driver In this situation performance is faster and graphics are printed at their best quality NOTE The line art graphics in this manual are P
71. Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 127 Paper Feed Size and Media Changing Defaults PostScript The normal default for these items is automatic detection NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer driver instructions are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the software under Page Setup 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Orientation Portrait O Landscape O Rotated Landscape Print on Both Sides None O Flip on Long Edge O Flip on Short Edge Page Order Front to Back Back to Front Pages Per Sheet 1 M Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 128 Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide
72. General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Device Settings gt m 3 Form To Tray Assignment ces n Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 4884 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray No Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts No Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s c Si Installable Options Available Tray 1 Standard Duplex vi Hard Disk Installed Memory Configuration 128 MB Ki Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 126 Duplex Unit Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 2 3 4 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties Click the Device Option tab click Duplex Option Unit Click OK Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box General Sharing Ports Advanced E 7 775577 Available Options Available Tray 1 ES V Duplex Option Unit Printer Hard Disk About
73. Guide Windows 2000 Operation 267 4 Select the unit Enter the width and length measurements Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Width 215 9 762 3280 Length 273 4 19720 12000 L i Default inch Cancel 5 Click OK 6 Make sure that User Defined now appears in the Size list on the Setup tab Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 268 NOTE To save the setting for future use Click Paper Feed Options Click Custom Size Select the unit Enter the relevant information for Width and Height Give your custom size a name under Name Click Add I x Ex Lumen Name Postcard wes Width po i 20 85 Delete Length p 50 4724 Unit C mm G inch e Click OK The Custom Page Size is added to the bottom of the Paper Size list 7 Click OK 8 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 269 Print Resolution PCL or PostScript Changing for a Print Job NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs default settings Click Start gt Settings Printers Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog b
74. Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 406 Paper Trays Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Onthe Device Option tab select the appropriate number of trays not including the Multi purpose tray 4 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 407 Duplex Unit Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options make sure the Duplex is Installed Click OK Close the Printers dialog box PONS General Ports Scheduling Sharing Security Device Settings X Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray lt No gt x Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts No ur Job Timeout lt 0 seconds g Wait Timeout lt 300 seconds gt 3 Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 p
75. ISO 57 Chi ISO 60 Nor ISO 61 Nor ISO 69 Fre ISO 84 Por ISO 85 Spa Kamenicky Legal Math 8 MC Text MS Publish PC Ext D N PC Ext US PC Set1 PC Set2 D N PC Set2 US Bulgarian CWI Hung DeskTop German Greek 437 Greek 437 Cy Greek 928 Hebrew NC Hebrew OC IBM 437 IBM 850 IBM 860 IBM 863 IBM 865 ISO Dutch ISO L1 ISO L2 ISO L5 ISO L6 ISO L9 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 106 Item LETTER 0 STYLE ZERO CHARACTER LINE PITCH WHITE PAGE SKIP CR FUNCTION LF FUNCTION LINE LENGTH FORM LENGTH TOF POSITION LEFT MARGIN FIT TO LETTER FX Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value Disable Enable Normal Slashed 6 LPI 8 LPI OFF ON CR CR LF LF LF CR 80 COLUMN 136 COLUMN 11 inch 11 7 inch 12 inch 0 0 to 1 0 inch in 0 01 inch increments 0 0 to 1 0 inch in 0 01 inch increments Disable Enable Setting Up 107 Description Enable 9BH Hex letter o 9DH Hex zero number Normal zero unslashed Slashed zero slashed Specifies the line spacing in lines per inch Ipi ON blank pages do not print Does not apply when duplexing FX only When the printer receives a CR code CR carriage return performed CR LF carriage return with line feed performed FX only When the printer receives a LF code LF line feed performed LF CR line feed with carriage return performed Specifies
76. Install a new image drum Color is indicated See Changing the Image Drum on page 505 Install a new toner cartridge Color is indicated Install the paper cassette Paper tray is indicated See Loading Paper on page 42 Data is incorrect Load correct paper size type Size type is indicated See Loading Paper on page 42 Paper type set via menu does not match that sent via driver Network error Shows offline status Shows online status Open the upper cover A paper jam has occurred Indicates wrong paper size Printer must be turned off after disk flash initialization The printer is in power save mode Data is being printed Data is being processed RAM is checked after printer is turned on Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 524 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Display Message REGISTRATION ADJUST TEST REGISTRATION ERROR REMOVE THE PAPER SERVICE CALL SHUTDOWN SIZE MISMATCH STACKER FULL UNSUITABLE SIZE USB I F ERROR WARMING UP Meaning Registration adjustment being tested An error has occurred setting up the registration Indicates wrong paper being used A serious error has occurred Call for service Starts the shutdown procedure to protect the file system on hard disk Change paper to correct size type Press On line to continue Stacker is full Remove the paper Indicates wrong paper size USB interface
77. Job Name for each print job PostScript Driver PCL Driver JOB PIN 2 x Job PIN x Job Name Setting Job Name Settings Job Name Job Name fo ies Request Job Name for each print job IV Request Job Name for each print job rsonal ID Number Personal ID Number PIN 5 dii Enter 4 digits eae Use numbers 0 3 een Cancel b Type a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK 6 Select the number of copies Click Collate if applicable 7 Click OK Print the document The document is stored on the hard disk It can then be printed on demand or deleted Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 475 Hard Disk Drive Printing a stored document 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU and press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you selected above Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 476 Hard Disk Drive Deleting a stored document 1 Press the MENU button to access t
78. Margins Left FX emulation 107 PCL emulation 101 PPR emulation 105 minimum 573 Measurements of printer 574 Media See Paper 70 See Paper Media Check Print Menu setting 89 Media Menu 91 92 default settings 580 MEDIA MISMATCH message 524 Media Type Settings 52 67 70 Medium paper weight 72 73 Medium Heavy Paper Weight 72 73 91 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 756 Medium Light Paper Weight 91 paper weight 72 73 Memory 555 available sizes 555 Enabling Windows 2000 PS only 216 Windows Me 98 95 PS only 312 Windows NT PS only 403 Windows XP PS only 121 Flash change size 112 initialization 112 Font cache size 112 list of files in printers memory 623 Memory overflow automatic recovery 97 optional 572 Receive buffer size 112 specifications 572 standard 572 Memory Menu 112 default settings 589 Menu Restore menu 116 Menu Printer Settings 82 Changing 83 Current 82 Lists of available settings 85 Menu Map 86 Network 111 Menu Map 111 Printing 82 Printing a list 82 reset to factory defaults 84 revert to stored settings 116 Menu button 64 Menu items LCD panel 63 Menu Map Network 111 Printing 111 Printing 86 Menu Mode Entering 64 Exiting 64 Moving backward 65 Moving through 64 65 ONLINE button 64 Selecting settings 65 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 757 Menus Color 93 Disk Maintenance 113 FX Emulation 106 Information 86 Lis
79. N Up Printing PCL kh OD Setup Job Options Color r Media Size Letter 85 x 11in x Source Automatically Select z Paper Feed Options r Finishing Mode Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode select the required number of pages per sheet z Options P2siged Printing r Driver Settings Untitled pee Add J Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Cancel Apply Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 349 Click the Options button Select the Page Borders Page Layout and Bind Margin Click OK Click OK Print the document Standard N up Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 350 Custom Page Sizes PostScript NOTE Three custom paper sizes can be defined in the PostScript driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the driver to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 351 1 Ope
80. Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 228 4 Select the required paper feed under Source Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 229 NOTE If a paper tray is selected the Weight field becomes visible 5 Select the required paper type under Weight Setup Job Options Color Source Automatically Select z Paper Feed Options r Finishing Mode Standard N up x Options r 2 Sided Printing 34 iNene s m Driver Settings united 7 Add Remove Legal 8 5 x 14in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 230 NOTE If Printer Setting is selected make sure the printer has been set to the correct media type 6 Click the Paper Feed Options button Make any other selections Click OK Paper feed options m Fit to Page Resize document to fit printer page r Cover Printing T Paper feed options Use different source for first page IV Auto Tray Change v Media Check r Multi Purpose Tray Settings MPT is Manual feed Custom Size Default Cancel Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 231 7 Click OK twice Close the Printing Preferences dialog box Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use t
81. See Image drum DRUM NEAR LIFE message 522 Duplex double sided printing 69 72 73 Binding 89 Heavy weight paper 74 Laid paper 74 Memory 555 Paper Size effect of 69 Paper Type effect of 72 73 Paper Type effect of 69 Paper Weight effect of 72 73 Paper Weight effect of 69 Print Menu setting 89 Textured paper 74 Windows 2000 PCL 273 PS 271 Windows Me 98 95 PCL or PS 364 PS or PCL 362 Windows NT PCL 458 PS 456 Windows XP PCL 177 PS 175 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide e 747 Duplex unit Enabling Windows 2000 PCL 222 PS 221 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 316 Windows NT PCL 409 PS 408 Windows XP PCL 127 PS 126 Installation 566 Dutch display language 98 E Economy Toner Save mode 40 90 ECP and parallel transmission mode 544 Edit Size 90 EEPROM INITIALIZE ERROR message 523 EEPROM Reset Reset user menu settings to factory defaults 116 EEPROM initialize 523 Ejection of paper 98 Electrical power consumption 574 Embossed paper 74 EMPTY message 523 Emulations domestic model 101 FX 106 HIPER W 101 Maintenance Menu Personality 97 PCL 99 101 Symbol Set 100 Tray number by tray 115 Tray number multi purpose tray 115 PPR 103 printer emulation language 97 Enabling options See option name Energy power consumption 574 English display language 98 Envelopes 578 Clasps 75 Damaged 75 Duplexing 69 Exit path Stacker Face up Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows M
82. Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 693 d Make your selections then click Next The following window appears Job Account ID registration 27 x Set Use Restrictions for the Job Account ID Disable Color Printing lt Back Cancel Disable Printing All printing is cancelled When this is selected other settings cannot be changed Disable Color Printing This Account ID cannot print color data If they submit a color print job it is automatically cancelled Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 694 e Select any print restrictions for the Account ID Click Next The following window appears Job Account ID registration Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 695 f Set limits per 24 hour period for the Account ID by any or all of the following Total pages Total dollars Total minutes Total staples used These limits will be checked at the selected interval or at the time setting for the log NOTE Whether the upper limits for a particular user have been exceeded is checked only at the set interval time If the upper limits are exceeded between checks printing continues even though the limit has been exceeded At the next interval check the User will be blocked from any further printing until the next 24 hour period starts If you have so designated see above
83. Sides O None Flip on Long Edge O Flip on Short Edge Page Order Front to Back Back to Front Pages Per Sheet v Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 181 Printing Booklets PCL NOTES You must have the duplex unit installed and enabled in order to print booklets Not available on some network connections see the Help file Some software applications may not support booklet printing The right to left setting allows a booklet to be printed for right to left reading which is used in some languages 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Preferences button 3 On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode in the drop down list select Booklet Setup Job Options Color Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in v Source Automatically Select m Paper Feed ptions Finishing Mode si Driver Settings Untitled v Add Remove Letter 8 5 x 11in OK Cancel Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 182 4 Click the Options button Set the Signature 2pages Right to Left and Bind Margin as required See the online Help for information Click OK 5 Click OK Click Print Options Signature No Limit v C 2pages C Right
84. User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 427 Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Specific Colors Example Company logo RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 436 and the sRGB setting PCL or PS driver PostScript Color Matching using the Absolute Colorimetric option see page 438 Use the Color Swatch Utility to print out a chart of RGB swatches and enter your desired RGB values in your application s color picker PS only see page 433 RGB or CMYK f you are printing from a graphics application such as Adobe Photoshop use PostScript Color Matching with the Absolute Colorimetric Setting see page 438 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 428 Color Matching Choosing a Method Printing Vivid Colors RGB only Use Oki Color Matching see page 436 with the Monitor 6500k Vivid SRGB or Digital Camera settings PCL or PS RGB or CMYK Use PostScript Color Matching see page 438 with the Saturation option Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 429 Color Matching Color Matching Options PCL Driver The Color Matching Options in the PCL driver can be used to help match your printed colors to the ones displayed on your monitor NOTE The PCL driver s color options are only designed to work with RGB data If you are printing CMYK data we recommend you use the PostScript driver Manually set the option
85. actual paper in paper tray is A4 Invalid in PostScript emulation Page size the size of the paper the document is formatted to use Paper size the size of the paper the document is printed on Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 90 TRAY 1 MEDIATYPE TRAY 1 MEDIAWEIGHT TRAY 2 MEDIATYPE TRAY 2 MEDIAWEIGHT TRAY 3 MEDIATYPE TRAY 3 MEDIAWEIGHT Media Menu The default settings are bold Plain Letterhead Transparency Bond Recycled Card stock Rough Auto Light Medium Light Medium Medium Heavy Heavy Ultra Heavy Plain Letterhead Bond Recycled Card stock Rough Auto Light Medium Light Medium Medium Heavy Heavy Ultra Heavy Plain Letterhead Bond Recycled Card stock Rough Auto Light Medium Light Medium Medium Heavy Heavy Ultra Heavy Description Selects the paper media type for Tray 1 Sets the paper media weight for Tray 1 Sets the paper media type for optional Tray 2 Only displays if installed Selects the paper media weight for optional Tray2 Only displays if installed Sets the paper media type for optional Tray 3 Only displays if installed Selects the paper media weight for optional Tray 3 Only displays if installed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 91 MP TRAY PAPER SIZE MP TRAY MEDIA TYPE MP TRAY MEDIAWEIGHT UNIT OF MEASURE X DIMENSION INCH Y DI
86. and affects RGB data only See OKI Color Matching on page 155 b PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer and affects both RGB and CMYK data See PostScript Color Matching on page 157 c Using ICC Profiles This option provides a method of matching RGB colors similar to Windows ICM matching See Using ICC Profiles on page 159 d No Color Matching Use this option to switch off all printer color matching No color correction occurs when selected This option is beneficial when other matching regimens are used specifically if you select a Color Simulation option e Print in Grayscale This option prints all documents as monochrome No color prints The printer interprets all colors as a variation of grays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 154 Color Matching Color Control Method OKI Color Matching PostScript This is OKI s proprietary color matching system It affects RGB data only This is the default setting It provides the fastest best color matching for your printer Under Color Setting use the drop down list to select the type to be used Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Color mode Color Control Method Color Matching x Color Simulation None X Color Setting Black Finish Monitor 6500K Perceptual JAg Auto 7 C Glossy C Matte Advanced
87. ante ata teak eats fae 62 ris cc H 62 Control Front Panel eee enu 63 Iaghts and Displays iere erem eet 63 Diagram and Explanations eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenen e 63 BUNS os sie rrr ee ep T sth ed NEENA S 64 Diagram and Explanations eseeeeeeeeeeeeneene 64 Language of Display Changing eee 66 Paper Media dette n Rer iei e D REPE n 67 orc 67 Selectng s eet ee ome tete 67 Paper Feed Exit Path and Duplex Options 69 Weight and Types eene pn e ee ee ees 70 Selecting erem dte pr erts 70 Paper Feed Exit Path and Duplex Options 72 Paper US Bond Me triC e erre tert en 72 Transparencies and Labels eee 73 Recommendations inie e ertet etie ete 74 Adjusting the Color 4n PER 77 Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning tree ei died E tete Redes TT Print the Color Tuning Pattern eee 78 Sample Color Tuning Pattern sese 79 Example Adjust the Magenta sese 80 Printer Settings Menu Settings sse 82 Printing a list of the Current Settings sese 82 MenuMap 3 2 antt ate teet E REA tae 82 Changing the Printer Settings sese 83 Reset to Factory Defaults sese 84 Lists of Available Settings by Menu
88. be found If the search is unsuccessful check that the printers are turned on online and properly connected To have the software search out local and or network printers select Search printers and select Local Port and or TCP IP Network To specify the printer address local or network manually select Specify the printer by address and fill in the appropriate information Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 668 3 Click Next and wait while the software searches for printers A window appears showing a listing of all the printers found For example Add a printer for which logs will be acquired 192 168 0 1 Acquired by other se 192 168 0 2 Page count only LPT1 Not acquired 192 168 0 3 Page count only Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 669 4 Select the printer you want to register from the list of printers searched and click Next The following window appears Add a printer for which logs will be acquired 2l x Set Other Items Printer Name x1 Printer Group Not in a group Y Acquire Logs Interval fi Hour o Minutes C Time Fees Define fees Operation at Log Full Delete old logs X Iv Inhibit the initialization of Hard Disk and Flash Memory Auto Export Logs Do not automatically export r Use Restrictions Unregistered ID Local Print Disable Printing E Di
89. binding or Short Edge binding Advanced Job Options Color Document Settings ie Document Options z t Paper Output El Paper Size Letter Sy Paper Source Multi Purpose Tray ip Input Slot Option ip Media Type lt Printer Setting gt z t Layout lj N UP lt 1 UP gt FR 2 Sided Printing Long Edge binding g PostScript Options Change 2 Sided Printing Setting CN aja L C Short Edge binding T Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 457 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PCL Usage Restrictions NOTE The optional duplex unit must be installed in the printer and enabled before duplex printing can be carried out Standard paper sizes only Paper weight range 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper must be loaded print side up Only Tray 1 optional Trays 2 and 3 and the High Capacity Feeder trays can be used for duplex printing The Multi Purpose MP tray cannot be used for duplex printing NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs Click Start gt Settings Printers Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 458 Duplex Pr
90. box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 372 Proof and Print PCL or PostScript Using Proof and print allows printing of a single copy of a document for checking before printing multiple copies of the same document NOTES The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy is printed If the software application being used has a collate print option it must be turned OFF for proof and print to operate correctly Proof and print may not be available in some software applications Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Click the Job Options tab Enter the number of copies If required select Collate Oc o0 Nx PostScript Driver PCL Driver Setup Job Options Color PostScrit Setup Job Options Color ff Store to HDD ue Copies 10 Collate Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 373 a Under Job Type select Proof and Print b Under Job Name Setting enter a job name of up to 16 characters If required select Request Job Name for each print job PostScri
91. cancelling 64 Printing double sided 69 72 73 Printing duplex double sided 69 72 73 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 773 Printing Face Up 53 Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Printing Force the printer to print 64 Printing Problems Slow printing Windows 2000 233 Printing reducing text to fit 107 Printing simplex single sided 69 72 73 Printing single sided 69 72 73 PrintSuperVision 730 PRN files Storage Device Manager 611 PRNUSBX WRITE ERROR message 548 Problem Solving Error Log Report 86 PROCESSING message 524 Profiles Input Windows 2000 PS 254 Windows Me 98 95 PS 344 Windows XP PS 159 Output Windows 2000 PS 254 Windows Me 98 95 PS 344 Windows XP PS 159 Projects Storage Device Manager 610 Proof and print Deleting Copies Windows 2000 286 Windows Me 98 95 376 Windows NT 468 Windows XP 190 install the optional hard disk drive 562 Printing Copies Windows 2000 285 Windows Me 98 95 375 Windows NT 467 Windows XP 189 Using Windows 2000 283 Windows Me 98 95 373 Windows NT 465 Windows XP 187 Proofing CMYK color images Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 paper part numbers 577 Protocol EtherTalk 111 NETBEUI 111 Netware 111 TCP IP 111 Pure black 41 R RAM CHECK message 524 RARP 111 RAW mode Network 97 USB 97 Executive Ser
92. drive Installation is highly recom mended Required Actions Before overlays can be printed they must be created in a software application saved as a print file downloaded to storage Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 480 Overlays Requirements for Using Storage Requirements Locations Use Storage Device Manager to store the overlays to the printer s hard disk drive or flash memory Maximum Available Space Hard Disk Drive 2 MB each for PCL Macros and PostScript Forms Flash Memory about 0 5 MB each for PCL Macros and PostScript Forms Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 481 Overlays Creating documents to use as overlays PCL An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and print to a file To create a print PRN file 1 Open your application program 2 Open the file to be stored as an overlay 3 4 Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your Choose File then Print application s Print dialog box Depending on the application you may need to select your printer model Click Properties This should open the printer driver settings Important You must use the Oki PCL driver to do this Choose all of the printer driver settings with which you would like your overlay to print Try to keep the ov
93. error has occurred The printer is warming up Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 525 Repeating Asterisk Symbol An asterisk symbol appears on the display repeatedly moving across the first line then the second Possible cause Remedy The main board is not Turn the printer off then reseat the main board and turn properly seated in the the printer back on again printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 526 Paper Jams Clearing NOTE Do not close the top cover completely until it latches during this process If the top cover is closed too soon the paper jam error does not clear To minimize possible damage to the drums due to exposure to light lower the top cover when appropriate but do not press down to latch it Paper jams are indicated by an error message on the display Paper jams are cleared as follows 1 Open the top cover of the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 527 Paper Jams Clearing Check the paper tray 2 Pull out the paper tray a Remove any jammed paper from the printer b Gently push the paper tray back in Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 528 Paper Jams Clearing Check behind the front cover 3 Open the front cover a Remove any jammed paper b Close the front cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Fami
94. essere 534 Check the duplex Unit sos eerte 535 Check additional paper trays eee 537 Examples of Paper Jams eese 538 Paper jams are frequent sse 538 More than one sheet feeds at a time sessssees 538 Paper curs e tete ttt et 538 Paper feeds at an angle iceberg 538 Printer does not print after jam is cleared usse 539 Print Quality Pr blenis eh eth et eee iter rit n 540 Stripes White ood PE PRO REESE 540 Stripes Blackstone esd nies eee E eed 540 Bluried letter edges ace entn emn ent 541 Faded Outp t 2 ui aeter br ttu eben si 542 Shading on unprinted sections seen 543 Toner rubs off the output 543 Output is garbled or incorrect sese 543 Parallel Interface Problems esee 544 Parallel Transmisssion Mode eee 544 Cannot configure for parallel connection esses 545 Output is garbled or incorrect essere 546 USB Probl nis ette e ett et ete 547 Cannot configure for USB connection sese 547 Cannot PriNt uec t rere rir tie oe edes 548 Application Error eee e E eite ete dt 549 General Protection Fault sese 549 Paper Size Change request 00 0 eee eeeecceseeeeceseeeeeeseeseeesecseeeaeeseeeaeeaes 550 Printer does not go online 551 Printer makes a strange
95. from the printer 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the remaining copies of the document 5 When the deletion confirmation message appears confirm by pressing the SELECT button NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 376 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents PCL or PostScript Using Secure Printing Secure printing printing with passwords allows you to print confidential documents on printers that are shared with other users in a network environment NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for secure printing to operate correctly Secure printing may not be available in some software applications Open the file in your application
96. gamut while maintaining the overall appearance of an image This option attempts to simulate RGB color Saturation Best choice for printing bright and saturated colors if you don t necessarily care how accurate the colors are This makes it the recommended choice for graphs charts diagrams etc Maps fully saturated colors in the source gamut to fully saturated colors in the printer s gamut Relative Colorimetric Good for proofing CMYK color images on a desktop printer Much like Absolute Colorimetric except that it scales the source white to the usually paper white Unlike Absolute Colorimetric Relative Colorimetric attempts to take the paper white into account Absolute Colorimetric Best for printing solid colors and tints such as company logos Matches colors common to both devices exactly Clips the out of gamut colors to their nearest printed equivalent Tries to print white as it appears on screen The white of a monitor is often very different from paper white Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 342 so this may result in color casts especially in the lighter areas of an image Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 343 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Driver Using ICC Profiles Affects RGB data only This provides a method of matching RGB colors similar to Windows ICM matching The main advantage
97. incorrect the remaining copies of the document Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 466 Proof and Print Printing Copies 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the remaining copies of the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 467 Proof and Print Deleting Copies If the proof is not ready for printing the job must be deleted from the printer 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the CANCEL button to delete the remaining copies of the document When the deletion confirmation message appears confirm by pressing the SELECT button NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use
98. interface cable Replace the printer interface cable is faulty The time out setting is too Reset time out to a higher value short See Manual Timeout and Wait Timeout items of the System Configuration Menu on page 97 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 553 Accessories Depending on the configuration of your printer you may wish to add one or more of the following options as your needs evolve Memory see page 555 Hard Disk Drive see page 562 Duplex Unit see page 566 Paper Trays see page 567 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 554 Memory Additional When to Install Adding memory increases the printer s capacity to process complex data You should add memory if you use duplex printing error messages appear when printing complex data you run graphic intensive applications on Networks Available Amounts Additional Memory is available in modules of 64Mb 128Mb 256Mb Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 555 Memory How to Install 1 Turn off the printer 2 Disconnect the power cable and printer interface cable 3 Loosen the two screws 1 and remove the main board Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 556 To insert the memory modules into the slots CAUTION If you are installing three 256 MB modules the maximum amount of memory the memory
99. interface cable and power cable 9 Turn on the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 563 10 Print a MenuMap To print the MenuMap a Press MENU twice INFORMATION MENU displays b Press SELECT PRINT MENU MAP displays c Press SELECT The Menu Map prints 11 Check that the HDD appears at the top of the MenuMap If it doesn t a Turn the printer off b Remove the main board c Reseat the hard disk drive d Turn on the printer e Print the MenuMap 12 After installing the hard disk drive the printer automatically initializes to include the option NOTE When initializing the hard disk any fonts overlays or print jobs that have been acknowledged are erased The Storage Device Manager can also be used to initialize the hard disk after installation Please refer to the User Guide for the Storage Device Manager For Windows only 13 In the printer driver s change the installed memory to match the new value For Windows XP see page 122 For Windows 2000 see page 217 For Windows Me 98 95 PostScript driver only see page 314 For Windows NT 4 0 see page 404 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 564 Hard Disk Drive Initialize Automatically After the hard disk drive is installed the printer automatically initializes configures to include this option You can also manually initialize the HDD Initialize Manually
100. is stored on the hard disk drive One copy is printed for checking 5 After checking the proof print or delete if incorrect the remaining copies of the document Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 188 Proof and Print Printing Copies 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the remaining copies of the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 189 Proof and Print Deleting Copies If the proof is not ready for printing the job must be deleted from the printer 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the remaining copies of the document 5 When the deletion confirmation message appears confirm by pressing the SELECT button NOT
101. model Click Properties This should open the printer driver settings Important You must use the Oki PCL driver to do this Choose all of the printer driver settings with which you would like your overlay to print Try to keep the overlay to a single sheet Don t use N up duplex finisher options etc when creating an overlay These can be added when printing the document that includes the overlay Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Click Print Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give the file a meaningful name such as my template prn Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 388 Creating documents to use as overlays PostScript An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and can print to a file 1 2 NO oo Open your application program Open the file to be stored as an overlay Choose File then Print Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your application s Print dialog box Depending on the application you may need to select your printer model Then click Properties This should open the printer driver settings Select the Job Options tab Click the Overlays button Choose Create Form from the menu Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Click OK to print t
102. modules that were originally installed must be removed The printer may not operate correctly if the modules are not firmly seated 4 Push out the white tabs at either end of the socket 5 Lift out the board Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 557 6 Align the module with the narrow strip 1 on its metallic contact edge to the right toward the slot identifier numbers of the control board Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 558 7 Carefully insert the module in the socket placing the ends into the slot in the lock tabs Press down firmly until you feel the board engage the connector then make sure the white tabs come up to lock the module in place Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 559 8 Replace the main board and secure it with the two screws 9 Connect the printer interface cable and power cable 10 Turn on the printer NOTE SERVICE CALL 034 may appear on the printer s display If it does Turn off the printer Remove the main board Make sure the memory modules are correctly installed Replace the main board Turn on the printer If SERVICE CALL 034 appears repeat the above steps o0 whnd Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 560 7 Print a MenuMap To print the MenuMap a Press MENU twice INFORMATION MENU displays b Press SELECT PRINT MENU M
103. name under which the file is stored on the printers hard disk drive It is case sensitive Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 206 7 Under Form setting in the drop down list enter or select a form name Click Add Define Overlays Overlay Name Print on Pages Fist Pae o l Custom Pages Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3512 r Form setting Form Name Stationery X NOTE The Form Name is a random name of your selection 8 Click OK 9 To continue to add files to the overlay if required repeat steps 5 through 8 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 207 10 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name s Click Add to add the overlay s to the list under Active Overlay To select more than one overlay hold the CTRL key while clicking on each name Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Disable Overlay x Active Overlay MAX 4 Overlay Page Logo First Page Address All Pages Defined Overlay MAX 32 Overlay Page Logo First Page Address All Pages e e ea OK Cancel Apply 11 At the top of the dialog box use the drop down list to select Use Overlay Click OK 12 Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 208 Defining Overlays PCL C
104. not Use USB cable to specification Ver 1 1 meet specifications Interface is disabled Check that USB interface is set to Enable Configuration Configure again from the beginning procedure was not correctly followed or cancelled USB cable is Reconnect or try another cable disconnected or faulty A USB hub is being The printer cannot be used with a USB hub Connect the used printer and computer directly Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 547 USB Problems Cannot print LPT WRITE ERROR is displayed Windows only PRNUSBX WRITE ERROR is displayed Possible cause Interface is disabled Windows only Printer is switched OFF Printer interface cable is disconnected A converter buffer extension cable or USB hub is being used Printer driver output port is incorrect Printer is not selected in the printer driver Incorrect printer driver is being used Remedy In the printer menu settings enable Parallel or USB interface See Parallel Menu on page 109 or Parallel Menu on page 109 Windows only Switch ON Reconnect the printer interface cable Test by connecting the printer and computer directly Set correct output port to which the printer interface cable is connected Select the printer or set to default printer Delete this printer driver and install correct printer driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troub
105. not work for all application programs However many professional graphics applications offer a similar feature in their print settings with the ability to choose a source input color space and a print output color space Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 254 Color Matching Color Control Method Using ICC Profiles PostScript Only Setting Up 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Color tab 4 Under Color mode in the Color Control Method drop down list select Using ICC Profile Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay m Color mode Color Control Method Using ICC Profile Color Simulation None zi m ICC Profile Setting Setting Name El Bow en Edit Delete Advanced Default Cancel Apply Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 255 5 Click the New button ax r Select ICC profile Input profile sRGB IEC61966 2 1 Browse Dutput profile z Browse m Rendering Intent Comment Perceptual C Saturation C Relative Colorimetric C Absolute Colorimetric Setting Name este datal Cance 6 Under Select ICC profile use the drop down lists to select the Input profile and Output profile 7 Select the desired Rendering Intent see Rendering Intents
106. number you need to enter in the printer driver when printing overlays volume 0 7 printer s disk drive PCL partition 1 printer s disk drive Common partition diskO printer s disk drive PostScript partition 2 Flash memory PCL FlashO Flash memory PostScript path 2 Click OK 3 When you re through reviewing the settings click Projects Save Project Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 620 Forms PCL Step 6 Download the Project 1 Click Projects Send Project Files to Printer Command Issued appears 2 Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 621 Forms PCL Step 7 Test Print the Form 1 With Storage Device Manager open and the appropriate printer icon highlighted click Printers Test Macro The Test Macro dialog box appears Enter the ID number for the macro file you wish to print You can get this from the File List printout Look under Volume 0 Example for 2 OKI BIN enter 2 Click OK Command Issued appears Click OK and wait for the macro to print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 622 Printing the File List Using Storage Device Manager To print a list of files in the printer s memory 1 Open Storage Device Manager 2 Click Printers Print File Listing Command Issued appears 3
107. or PostScript Collating can be carried out with or without a hard disk drive installed A printer with a hard disk drive performs better Important If your software application has a collate option use it instead of the collate option in the printer driver To use the printer driver to select collating 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver 3 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 4 Click the Job Options tab Under Job Type enter the number of copies required Only if the application has no collate option select Collate PostScript Driver PCL Driver Setup Job Options Color PostScript Setup Job Options Color m dob Type Normal C Proof and Print C Se C fffore to HDD f Copies p10 r Collate r Quality Job Type I Normal Proof and Print 5 Click OK 6 Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 371 Font Substitution PostScript Only Click Start Settings Printer Right click the appropriate PS driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Click the Fonts tab Select the type of font substitution from the various options given Use the on line Help screen for information cO o0 Nvo2 6 Click OK to engage the new settings and close the Properties dialog
108. pages through print logs even when a client has cancelled his her print jobs or paper jams have occurred Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 652 User Name Versus Account ID User Name The User Name is displayed whenever print logs are displayed and its sole purpose is to make it easy to see who has been printing The User Name is assigned when creating an Account ID see page 688 It may be set up to represent an individual client or a group of clients and is associated with the Account ID number The User Name does not necessarily need to be the same as the Windows Login User Name Account ID The Account ID is the number Print Job Accounting actually uses to identify clients Account ID values of 1 through 1879048191 can be assigned Clients who do not have their own Account ID will be recognized as Unregistered ID 0 Normally an Account ID is assigned to each individual client If the same Account ID is assigned to different clients all the print jobs they have made will be added up as the same client when the System totals up Account IDs must be set for each individual registered printer connected to the Server The same Account ID can be set up for more than one printer with different limits set for each printer Therefore you can set particular clients to have access only to certain printers Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utili
109. print a 5 x 8 inch booklet on 872 x 11 inch paper print an 872 x 11 inch booklet on 11 x 17 inch paper Open the file in your application Select File gt Print In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PS driver Click the Layout tab N Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 275 3 Under Pages Per Sheet in the drop down list select Booklet EM Ex E Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 276 4 Under Print on Both Sides Duplex select Flip on Short edge 5 Click Print f Print 9 C e 2 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 277 Printing Booklets PCL NOTES You must have the duplex unit installed and enabled in order to print booklets Not available on some network connections see the Help file Some software applications may not support booklet printing The right to left setting allows a booklet to be printed for right to left reading which is used in some languages 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Setup tab 3 Under Finishing Mode in the drop down list select Booklet aixi General Setup Job Options Color Media Size LeeB5stm zl Source automaticaly Select x Paper Feed Optio
110. print or color print Set upper limits for items such as printed pages Log selected items including Date User Name Printer Name Document Name NOTE The information on document names cannot be acquired while printing from some Windows applications or from a Macintosh Number of Printed Pages broken down by color versus monochrome Paper Size Simplex or Duplex Printing etc Set up an account allowing printing only within the limits set Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 651 For Each Printer You Can Set fees by sheets paper sizes and so forth Set all print enabled disabled or color print enabled disabled Set upper limits for items such as printed pages e Set up an account allowing printing only within the limits set e Set up Group s in which to include the printer For Print Logs You Can Export print logs as comma separated value csv files which can be imported into many commercially available spreadsheet programs Automatically email print logs to the Administrator monthly on a selected day Customize items to be included in the log setting them either manually see page 703 or using one of the multiple Microsoft Excel spread sheet macros provided see page 707 Acquire a print log for print jobs sent from a client directly to a printer bypassing the print server Accurately record printed
111. printer Windows ICM uses the information in these profiles to convert colors in your documents to colors that the printer can reproduce The way in which this conversion is performed can be controlled via the ICM Intent control in the printer driver NOTE The Color Match Using ICC Profiles feature provides an alternative to Windows ICM It is similar to Windows ICM but offers several additional features Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 346 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet N Up Printing PostScript Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PS driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent On the Setup tab under N up select the required number of pages per sheet 5 Click OK Click Print kh OD Setup Job Options Color PostScript pr Media Size Letter z Gaston Size Source Automatically Select Paper Feed Options r Nup z 2 Sided Printings Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 347 Click the Unprintable Area button Set the margin parameters Click OK Unprintable Area Click OK Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 348 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
112. required job name is displayed 4 Press the SELECT button The document prints and is deleted from the hard disk drive NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 193 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Deleting the confidential document before printing it 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the job from the printer NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 194 Hard Disk Drive PCL or PostScript Storing a Document Store to hard disk job spooling allows print jobs to be prepared and stored on the hard disk for printing on demand This is good for forms generic memos letterhead stationery etc NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled If th
113. setting defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 363 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript or PCL Using 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PS driver 3 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 4 On the Setup tab under 2 Sided printing select Long Edge Binding or Short Edge Binding 5 Click OK Print the document PostScript Driver PCL Driver Setup Jab Options Color PostScript Setup Job Options Color p Media Meda Size Letter 2 Size fleter85xttin zf ed Source Automatically Select X 4r d Source Paper Feed Options Paper Feed Options r Einishing Mode LL Standard N up x Na Options Doe 7 m l 2 Sided Printing 2Sided Printings N r Driver Boni Ag Untitled Add HETIBVE Letter 8 5 x Tin Unprintable Area Default Default Cancel Apply Heb Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 364 Printing Booklets PCL and Windows Me NOTES Available only in the Windows Me Operating System not available for Windows 98 or 95 Available in the PCL printer driver only You must have the duplex unit installed and enabled in order to pri
114. sheets printed in 1200 dpi 1200x600dpi Number of sheets printed in 1200 x 600 dpi 600dpi Number of sides printed in 600 dpi Account ID User Account ID Color Number of sides printed in color Document Name Document Name Duplex Print Simplex or Duplex Envelope Feeder Number of sheets fed from Envelope Feeder Log No The ID of the job Media Paper type used Transparency etc Mono Number of sides printed in Monochrome Multi Purpose Tray Number of sheets fed from Multi Purpose Tray Off line time during printing Offline time during printing if any Off line time during processing Offline time during processing if any Pages Number of printed sides Paper Size Paper size used Paper Type Paper type used Light Medium etc Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 714 Log Entries in alphabetical order continued Column Description Sheets Number of sheets of paper Staple Number of staples used Status Result Printed Rejected etc Time printing began Time the printing process started Time printing ended Time the log acquisition started Time the printing process ended Time the log was acquired from the printer started Time the log was acquired Time the log was acquired from the printer completed Time the process began Time the job processing started Tim
115. the Menu Map see Printer Settings Menu Settings on page 82 Click OK Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box General Sharing l Ports Advanced Color Management Device Settings Form To Tray Assignment E jag Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 16772 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray No Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts No Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s an Installable Options Available Tray 1 Standard Duplex Installed Hard Disk Installed Memory Configuration Come v P i Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 121 Hard Disk Drive Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Settings tab 4 Under Installable Options make sure the setting in the Hard Disk drop down list is Installed 5 Click OK
116. the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 468 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents PCL or PostScript Using Secure Printing Secure printing printing with passwords allows you to print confidential documents on printers that are shared with other users in a network environment NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing Ifthe hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed Ifthe software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for secure printing to operate correctly Secure printing may not be available in some software applications 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 Select Print to file 4 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 5 On the Job Options tab under Job Type select Secure Print NOTE If you ve already used Secure Print to place a document on the hard disk drive but have not yet printed it out click the PIN button and enter a new job name Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows
117. the Storage Device Manager utility to convert this PRN file print file to a storable file format 4 Download the storable file to the printer Once someone has set up all the necessary overlay files on the printer other users only have to switch on the required settings in the printer driver to use the overlays NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for overlay to operate correctly An overlay may consist of more than one component file Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 200 Creating documents to use as overlays PCL An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and can print to a file To create a print PRN file 1 2 Open your application program Open the file to be stored as an overlay Choose File then Print Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your application s Print dialog box Depending on the application you may need to select your printer model Click the Preferences button This should open the printer driver settings Important You must use the Oki PCL driver to do this Choos
118. the file a meaningful name such as my template prn Important You must use the Oki PostScript driver to do this Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 202 Downloading the print file to use as an overlay In the previous topic you created a print PRN file on your PC s hard disk This topic explains how to use the Storage Device Manager to download this file to the printer The Storage Device Manager software is included with the original software CDs that were supplied with your printer 1 Launch Storage Device Manager Allow the program to discover locate the printer 2 Click Project then New Project 3 From the Project menu select Add File to Project 4 Select the PRN file s that you created earlier PCL This automatically generates a BIN file PostScript This automatically generates a PostScript hst file Important The BIN file is automatically assigned an ID number To change the ID number double click the number enter a new one in the ID field 5 Note the name that the file is assigned in the Storage Device Manager Names are case sensitive NOTE The assigned file name is very important You mustuse this ID number or name when creating overlays in the printer driver You should change the ID number or name from the default value Note the new name for later use 6 Make sure the printer being used is highlighted in the lower window of the Storage Dev
119. the number of characters per line Specifies the paper length The print start position is where printing begins on the page It is also called Top of Form TOF TOF Position the distance between the first line of print and the top edge of the paper Left Margin 7 the distance between where printing begins and the left hand edge of the paper Enable Print data is reduced to fit the LETTER size 11 inches 66 lines print area Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Item TEXT HEIGHT FX Emulation Menu The default settings are bold VET Same Diff Description Sets the height of a character SAME Height constant regardless of cpi DIFF Height varies depending on cpi Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 108 Item PARALLEL BI DIRECTION ECP ACK WIDTH ACK BUSY TIMING I PRIME OFFLINE RECEIVE Parallel Menu The defaults are bold Value Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Narrow MEDIUM WIDE ACK in Busy ACK while Busy 3 micro sec 50 micro sec Disable Enable Disable Description Enable Activates the parallel Centronics interface Enable Activates bi directional communication Enable Activates ECP mode Sets the ACK width for compatible reception Narrow 0 5 uS Medium 1 0 uS Wide 3 0 uS Sets the output order for ACK and BUSY during reception ACK IN BUSY BUSY LOW to the end of th
120. the size of media used Click Change to set fees for individual media sizes Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 677 Fees Define Fees window Tray Tab Tray Select to set a fee per sheet printed which varies depending on the tray used Click Change to set fees for individual trays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 678 Fees Define Fees window Media Type Tab Media Select to set a fee per sheet printed which varies depending on the media used Click Change to set fees for the different media including transparencies labels letterhead card stock etc Pages Toner use amount Drum use amount Belt fuser use amount Finisher Printer Use Time Size Tray Media Type v Media Fees dollar s she Change Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 679 Fees Define Fees window Belt fuser use amount Tab Belt fuser use amount Select to set a fee per page for belt and or fuser usage Automatic calculation Use this to set up automatic calculation of fees for belt and fuser use and save it under the name you enter Once the settings are saved they can be used for other printers as well by selecting the saved settings name in the Fees drop down box in either the Add a printer for which logs will be acquired window Printer Add a Printer cl
121. to Front Pages Per Sheet 1 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 176 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PCL Usage Restrictions NOTE The optional duplex unit must be installed in the printer and enabled before duplex printing can be carried out Standard paper sizes only Paper weight range 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper must be loaded print side up Only Tray 1 optional Trays 2 and 3 and the High Capacity Feeder trays can be used for duplex printing The Multi Purpose MP tray cannot be used for duplex printing NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs Click Start gt Settings Printers and Faxes Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 177 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PCL Using 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Preferences button 3 On the Setup tab under 2 Sided Printing select Long Edge or Short Edge 4 Click OK Click Print Setup Job Options Color Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in v Source Automatically Select vi Paper Feed Options
122. to Left C Bind Margin a 00 inch Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 183 Printing Watermarks PCL Only 1 2 Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Preferences button On the Job Options tab click Watermark Select a name from the Watermark list Watermark Watermark None COPY DRAFT New Remove Edit C First Page only OK Cancel Help JI Defaut Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 184 NOTE To create a new watermark or edit an existing watermark Click the New or Edit button Watermark Text OK Size 198 T P Angle 45 R T gt 180 0 180 Trim O None T Ene Frane Watermark Adjustment Double Frame x Y Position Center Enter the text for the watermark Select the attributes font size angle to be used Click OK The new watermark appears in the Watermark list 5 If you wish to print the watermark only on the first page of the document select First Page only 6 Click OK twice 7 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 185 Collating PCL or PostScript Collating can be carried out with or without a hard d
123. to add to the Project Step 3b Delete Files from the Project NOTE To delete a file from the project click the file name then click Projects Remove File from Project Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 611 Forms PostScript Step 4 Store the Files Hard Disk Drive If your printer is equipped with an internal hard disk drive the Storage Device Manager automatically saves the forms to the PostScript partition on the hard drive Flash Memory If your printer does not have an internal hard disk drive the Storage Device Manager automatically stores the forms in the PostScript section of the Flash memory To store the forms in the Flash memory instead of on the hard disk drive 1 Double click the file name in the Project window The Edit Component Name and ID dialog box appears 2 Under Volume type in Flash0 then click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 612 Forms PostScript Step 5 Save the Project and Download it to the Printer 1 Click Projects Save Project 2 Click Projects Send Project Files to Printer Command Issued appears 3 Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 613 Forms PostScript Step 6 Test Print the Form 1 With Storage Device Manager open and the appropriate printer icon highlighted click Printers Test F
124. to place these files into your document You can use the files in many different combinations according to your changing requirements Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 478 Overlays Creating Files for Overlays The files to be used as overlays must be created generated and stored Then other users can use settings in the printer drivers to use the files as overlays in documents 1 Create the document that you wish to use for Overlay printing e g a letterhead 2 Use the printer driver to generate a PRN file print file 3 Use the Storage Device Manager utility to convert this PRN file print file to a storable file format 4 Download the storable file to the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 479 Overlays Requirements for Using Read This First Important 1 An overlay may consist of more than one component file 2 When the hard disk drive is installed you must use the Shutdown Menu before turning OFF the printer 3 If your software application has a collate print option you must turn it OFF before you print overlays 4 You cannot use overlays with the Windows 2000 PostScript driver Macintosh driver 5 The message DISK FULL appears if there isn t enough memory for the data Hardware Software Requirements e the Storage Device Manager software must be installed printer internal hard disk
125. to select the Input profile and Output profile 7 Select the desired Rendering Intent see Rendering Intents on page 158 Type in a name for the profile Click OK The new name appears in the Setting Name drop down list under ICC Profile Setting 8 Repeat steps 5 7 for each ICC profile you wish to define 9 Click OK Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 161 Color Matching Color Control Method Windows ICM Color Matching PCL or PostScript ICM is the color management system built into Windows Affects RGB data only Can be associated with either the PCL or PS driver Windows ICM uses ICC profiles for your monitor and printer These profiles describe the colors that your device is capable of reproducing ICC profiles can be associated with your printer via the Color Management tab of the printer driver Depending on how you have installed the printer driver the color profiles may already be associated with the driver To associate ICC Color Profiles with the printer driver 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Color Management tab 4 Under Color Profiles currently associated with this printer you should see the names of profiles that match your printer model If you do not see any profiles associated with the driver click Add and lo
126. you are printing The Using ICC Profiles feature uses both the input and output profiles to generate a CRD Color Rendering Dictionary which is used to match the colors as closely as possible NOTE This feature may not work for all application programs However many professional graphics applications offer a similar feature in their print settings with the ability to choose a source input color space and a print output color space Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 159 Color Matching Color Control Method Using ICC Profiles PostScript Only Setting Up 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Color tab 4 Under Color mode in the Color Control Method drop down list select Using ICC Profile Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Color mode Color Control Method Using ICC Profile ICC Profile Setting Advanced Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 160 5 Click the New button ICC profile setting Select ICC profile Input profile sRGB IEC61966 2 1 Browse Output profile Browse Rendering Intent Comment Perceptual Saturation Relative Colorimetric Absolute Colorimetric Setting Name Color datal Cancel 6 Under Select ICC profile use the drop down lists
127. 0 id 1n Belo 108 1 50 R233 2 25 3 5 2 204 ENTE 3102 cus ciini cin cin Dn cin 2 220 1 202 1 168 15 Em 1 62 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Color Swatch Utility 594 5 Use the color blocks to pick the specific colors that you want to appear in your printed document Each color block or sample is identified with information your software package needs to reproduce that color accurately The numbers under each block specify the amounts of the primary colors red R green G and blue B that mix to form each particular shade The amounts are given as a numerical value between 0 and 255 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Color Swatch Utility 595 Color Swatch Utility Creating Custom Swatch Colors NOTE The Swatch Utility does not guarantee that the printer prints the same color as displayed on your monitor Consider the displayed color as a reference The printer may not be able to print the exact color that you desire If you don t find your desired color you can create or customize colors 1 Select Custom Swatch from the File menu 2 On the pop up window there are 3 slide bars that allow you to customize swatches Hue bar changes the hue of the swatches for example red to green or blue to yellow Saturation bar changes vividness Lightness bar changes darkness 3 Adjust the bars until you see the desired color Color variations are cre
128. 00 PCL only 280 Windows Me 98 95 367 PCL only 369 Windows NT PCL only 462 Windows XP PCL only 184 Waterproof paper 577 Wattage power consumption 574 Website for Oki Data 74 76 Weight of printer 574 White color casts Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 White lines on output Image drum cleaning 115 White page skip FX emulation 107 PCL emulation 101 PPR emulation 105 White print matches paper white Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 White monitor white vs paper white Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Width Font 99 Window envelopes 75 Windows ICM Color Matching Windows 2000 257 Windows Me 98 95 346 Windows XP 162 Wrong paper size messages 64 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 782 X x adjust horizontal position 114 for duplex 114 Y y adjust vertical position 114 for duplex 114 Z Zero character FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 104 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 783
129. 08 Printing Posters PCL Only This option allows you to configure and print posters by breaking up the document page into multiple pieces Each piece prints enlarged on a separate sheet Then the separate sheets are combined to produce a poster It is only available with the PCL printer driver 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Setup tab 3 Under Finishing Mode select Poster Print CT rx General Setup Job Options Color r Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in Source Automatically Select z Paper Feed Options r Finishing Mode Options r Driver Settings Untitled bad Add jemoye Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 309 Click Options Enter the configuration details Click OK Click Print PosterPrint Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 310 Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers See your printed Software Installation Guide for information on installing printer drivers You can also go to http my okidata com to view and or download a copy of the Software Installation Guide or for the latest information on drivers for your printer Which Printer Driver to Use Your printer comes with Windows drivers for PCL and
130. 2 Windows XP 141 Default driver in Windows Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide e 772 Windows XP 120 Paper size 68 Paper type 71 Paper weight 71 Printer Settings Changing 83 Current 82 Network 111 Printing 82 Printing a list 82 Reset to Factory Defaults 84 Printer settings vs Computer Settings 67 70 128 133 223 228 317 410 414 Printer settings vs Computer settings 52 Printer Status Utility Windows 2000 233 Windows Me 98 95 321 Windows NT 419 Windows XP 138 Printing Problems See Print Quality Problems colors 572 Confidential printing See Secure Printing creating custom colors 593 594 596 delay before printing starts 552 does not start for a long time 552 method 572 noises 551 PDF files 597 printer does not print 539 553 problems complex data won t print 555 Secure printing See Secure Printing single sheets and effect on transfer belt 508 skew 538 slow printing 553 due to high Print Resolution 553 stops unexpectedly 553 Printing black 41 Printing combination of text and graphics 41 PRINTING message 524 Printing multiple pages on one sheet n up Windows 2000 PCL 259 PS 258 Windows Me 98 95 PCL 349 PS 347 Windows NT PCL 441 PS 440 Windows XP PCL 164 PS 163 Printing photographs 41 Printing problems Slow printing Windows Me 98 95 321 Windows NT 419 Windows XP 138 Printing temperatures 74 75 76 Printing
131. 2 Paper Exit 72 Paper Feed 72 Paper Weight 72 Usage Fuser life 118 Image drum life by drum color 118 effect of cleaning 115 Page counts by Tray Number 117 Color 117 Monochrome 117 Multi purpose MP tray 117 Total 117 reports 651 Toner life by color 118 Transfer belt life 118 Usage Menu 117 118 USB 572 cable specifications 572 cannot configure 547 communication protocol 97 Interface 61 62 110 Menu 110 Menu default settings 587 Offline Receive 110 precautions when using 547 Soft reset 110 transmission mode 572 USB I F ERROR message 525 USB interface connection 572 User menu settings reset to factory defaults 116 Using ICC Profiles Windows 2000 249 PS 254 Windows Me 98 95 338 PS 344 Windows XP 154 PS 159 Utilities Color 24 Color Swatch 593 594 596 Network 24 network printer status 733 OKI LPR 737 PDF Direct Print 597 PrintSuperVision 730 storage device manager 600 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 781 V VALUE button 65 Verso duplex printing 114 Vertical print position adjustment 114 for duplex 114 Viewing conditions fluorescent lighting vs sunlight Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 325 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 Vivid colors Color matching Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 Vividness adjustment for color 596 Volume number forms 620 Ww WAIT TIMEOUT 98 Warm up sequence 56 WARMING UP message 525 Watermarks Windows 20
132. 2000 PCL or PS 295 Windows Me 98 95 PCL or PS 385 Windows NT PCL or PS 477 Windows XP PCL or PS 198 deleting files 624 626 Show Resources vs Ad ministrator Functions 605 Disk Maintenance Menu 113 Enabling Windows 2000 PCL 218 PS 217 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 314 Windows NT PCL 405 PS 404 Windows XP PCL 123 PS 122 fonts downloaded 99 formatting Storage Device Manager 604 formatting partitions 605 Initialize automatically 565 Cautions before doing 565 manually 565 through Storage Device Manager 565 Maintenance 113 maintenance Storage Device Manager 600 needed for Password print jobs 562 needed for Proof and Print 562 needed for Secure Print jobs 562 Partitions 113 Formatting 113 Size 113 Print Jobs Menu 85 printing a document Windows 2000 PCL or PS 294 Windows Me 98 95 PCL or PS 384 Windows NT PCL or PS 476 Windows XP Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide e 752 PCL or PS 197 PS partition 620 Shutdown sequence 88 storing a document Windows 2000 292 Windows Me 98 95 381 Windows NT 473 Windows XP 195 storing forms 612 viewing files 624 Heat Printing specifications 74 75 76 Heavy Paper Weight 72 73 91 Height font 99 Hexadecimal dump 115 Horizontal print position adjustment 114 for duplex 114 HST files 611 Hue adjustment for color 596 Humidity operating specifications 574 storage specifications 574 IBM PPR Fonts 86 ID Check Pattern 87 ID number Overlays 620 IE
133. 219 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 6 POStSCEIpt eet e qe t e EE PRESS 219 PCE endete aententia tee 220 Duplex Unit Enabhng 4 ea rte etre 221 PostScript te er e e RUE GRECE 221 PCI toe e etr SE e e ee E 222 Paper Feed Size and Media eere 223 Changing Defaults sineren rr trt etl er i 223 PostScript 5 esse as RS eR datas 223 jug 228 Network Printer Status Utility eese 233 ICM EE 234 Factors that Affect Color Printing eese 235 Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors eee 236 Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can re produce eae ae re apes ee aie e I eios 236 Viewing Conditions isinsin etre ee tede 236 Printer Driver Color Settings eee 236 Monitor Settings eet tee P e rie eerie 237 How your Software Application Displays Color 238 Paper Type siesicvssstesas segs eui rr rettet ds 238 Color Matching 2 2 nio cubes eee ret eee EHE R p oia eHd 239 Choosing Method nee et eo ete ce 239 RGB or CMYK eiae acide edad a eed 240 Matching Photographs eese nennen 241 Matching Specific Colors eseeseseeeeeenenen 242 Example Company logo eere 242 Printing Vivid Colors sessies ineei 243 PEL Driver ren eB ere 244 Print Color Swatch Utility
134. 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 MP Tray On Off Down Up Paper feed tray Normal tray High priority tray Feed when mismatching Do not use Enable Disable Description Sets the number of copies Specifies double sided duplex printing if the optional duplex unit is installed Sets binding for duplex printing Only displays if the optional duplex unit is installed Selects source of paper feed Trays 2 to 5 only display if installed ON When a paper tray empties the printer automatically switches to the next available paper tray See page 49 If Auto Tray Select Auto Tray Switch is enabled ON see above Tray Sequence specifies the order of use for the paper trays See page 49 Specifies MP tray usage Normal tray Tray select switch Use as a normal tray High priority tray Valid with Tray select only If there is paper in the MP tray and Duplex is not specified the printer uses the MP tray Feed when mismatching When a paper mismatch occurs i e the tray s paper size media type does not match the print data a paper request is issued to the MP Tray If the data is for Duplex print a specified tray is used instead of the MP tray Do not use Even if auto switching MP Tray is not used If MP Tray is designated in Paper Feed printer behaves as though Normal Tray is selected ENABLE the printer checks if the paper size specified in the print job matches the actual paper size in the tray Only sta
135. 4 5 e npe er met rere rS 317 Network Printer Status Utility seen 321 Cu M D deed 322 Factors that Affect Color Printing eene 323 Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors eee 324 Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can re produce uer Rege dh IRURE 324 Viewing Conditions tat t tt tete 325 Printer Driver Color Settings eese 325 Monitor Settings eene tede tbe ER HERR eere 326 How your Software Application Displays Color 327 Paper Type cte ce aei tici tp ne 327 Color Matching ui e Rete erede 328 Choosing Method teer etre 328 General Information eese nennen 328 RGBOorCMYRK 5 iihauteioesan eec e Een 329 Matching Photographs sess 330 Matching Specific Colors eee eecceseeeesseceeeeseeseeeaeeeeeeaeesseeaeeaes 331 Example Company logo eee 331 Printing Vivid Colots cet debebit 332 PCL Dryer a eee dee RR dete dente 333 Print Color Swatch Utility eese 336 PostScript Driver nbn Fee E Here ted 337 PostScript Driver ai En de tet E i ere ns 339 OKI Color Matching essere 339 PostScript Color Matching eee 341 Using ICC Profiles iiie eere bti 344 Windows ICM Color Matching eee 346 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
136. 46 tracking usage and costs 644 Print jobs Cancel 64 complex 555 lots of graphics 555 Print Jobs Menu 85 Print logs 651 Print margin menu setting PCL 101 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 770 Print Menu 89 Copies number of 89 default settings 579 Duplex 89 PRINT MENU MAP message 82 Print processing does not start 553 slow 553 stops 553 takes a long time to start 552 Print quality 100 CMY density 96 accuracy 573 Adjust density 93 adjusting color 93 94 596 adjusting your monitor s colors 596 and Fuser Roller 70 and Paper type 70 and Paper weight 70 black printing 41 blurred text 517 colors don t align 95 environmental specifications 574 faint print 498 Heavy weight paper 74 humidity specifications 574 Laid paper 74 lines 102 not clear 517 Print Resolution 90 Registration 94 resolution 572 temperature specifications 574 Textured paper 74 white lines on output 517 Print quality problems 540 aded print 542 black stripes 540 blurred print 541 color adjusting 523 color balance adjust 523 colors don t align 95 Demonstration Page 86 evenly spaced lines or spots on output 540 Lines on output 44 94 mm intervals 540 lines on output 113 mm intervals 540 black 540 evenly spaced 540 white 540 output doesn t match monitor 141 236 324 422 output is garbled or incorrect 543 546 shading 543 spots on output 113 mm intervals 540 44 94 mm intervals 540 evenly spaced 540
137. 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm 5 Click OK 6 Check that User Defined now appears in the Size list on the Setup tab NOTE To save the setting for future use Click Paper Feed Options Click Custom Size Select the unit Enter the relevant information for Width and Height Give your custom size a name under Name Click Add Click OK The Custom Page Size is added to the bottom of the Paper Size list Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 452 7 Click OK 8 Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 453 Print Resolution PCL or PostScript Changing for a Print Job NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs default settings e Click Start 5 Settings Printers Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 Click the Job Options tab Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 454 4 Select the required printing resolution under Quality 5 Select Toner Saving if appropriate 6 Click OK Print the document PostScript Driver PCL Driver Executive S
138. 8 nnde eeE 739 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 17 Notes Cautions etc NOTE A note appears like this A note provides additional information to supplement the main text which helps you to use and understand the product CAUTION A caution appears like this A caution provides additional information which if ignored may result in equipment malfunction or damage WARNING A warning appears like this A warning provides additional information which if ignored may result in a risk of personal injury Important An important message appears like this An important message provides supplemental information which can prevent potential problems Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Notes Cautions etc 18 Introduction Congratulations on purchasing this color printer This chapter summarizes the main features of your printer It also explains how to use this User s Guide to get the most from your printer Printer Models and Features Summary Table Model Resolution Print Network Duplex Memory speed card unit ES2426n 600x1200 24ppm Standard Option 128 MB Optional dpi color 20 GB HDD ES2426dn 600 x 1200 24ppm Standard Standard 128 MB Optional dpi color 20 GB HDD ES2426e 1200 x 24ppm Standard Standard 256 MB Optional 1200 dpi color 20 GB HDD a 26 ppm monochrome Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Introduction
139. 93 94 COLOR BALANCE ADJUST message 523 Color casts monitor white vs paper white Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 trying to print white Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Color density 100 CMY density 96 Color intensity Adjusting 78 79 80 Decreasing 77 Increasing 77 Color matching Bright colors Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Color matching Choosing a method Windows 2000 239 Windows Me 98 95 328 Windows NT 425 Windows XP 144 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide e 742 Color matching Factors that affect how software displays color Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Monitor settings Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 Paper types Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Printer driver color settings Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 325 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 RGB vs CMYK Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 324 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 Viewing conditions Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 325 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 Color matching No Color Matching Windows 2000 249 Windows Me 98 95 338 Windows NT 435 Windows XP 154 Color matching Print in Grayscale Windows 2000 249 Windows Me 98 95 338 Windows NT 435 Windows XP 154 Color matching Saturated colors Windows 2000 253
140. 9300k Cool the default setting for many monitors and television sets k degrees Kelvin a measurement of temperature Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 142 Factors that Affect Color Printing How your Software Application Displays Color Some graphics applications such as CorelDRAW or Adobe Photoshop may display color differently from office applications such as Microsoft Word Please see your application s online help or user manual for more information Paper Type The type of paper used can also significantly affect the printed color For example a printout on recycled paper can look duller than one on specially formulated glossy paper Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 143 Color Matching Choosing a Method NOTE These suggestions are for guidance only Your results may vary depending on the application from which you are printing Some applications override without warning any color matching settings in the printer driver There is no one way to achieve a good match between the document displayed on your monitor and its printed equivalent There are many factors involved in achieving accurate and reproducible color However the following guidelines may help in achieving good color output from your printer There are several suggested methods depending on the type of document you are printing most common RGB s
141. AP displays c Press SELECT The Menu Map prints 8 Check the Total Memory Size shown at the top of the MenuMap It should match the memory now installed in the printer If it doesn t a Turn the printer off b Remove the main board c Make sure that all of the modules are firmly seated in their connectors For Windows only 9 In the printer driver s change the installed memory to match the new value For Windows XP see page 121 For Windows 2000 see page 216 For Windows Me 98 95 see page 312 For Windows NT 4 0 see page 403 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 561 Hard Disk Drive The optional internal hard disk drive is used to store documents for proof and print password or secure printing Installation 1 Turn off the printer 2 Disconnect the power cable and printer interface cable 3 Loosen the two screws 1 and remove the main board Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 562 4 Hold the hard disk drive by the locking handle 1 5 Insert the handle locating lugs 2 and four locating feet 3 into the holes in the main board making sure the hard disk connector 4 starts to engage with the socket on the control board 6 Gently push down on the locking handle 1 making sure the hard disk moves forward and fully engages with the socket 7 Replace the main board and secure it with the two screws 8 Connect the printer
142. Adobe PostScript PS You can install either of these or both if you wish Which driver you choose depends on your application f you use TrueType fonts and you do not print PostScript including eps files graphics choose the PCL driver This is more efficient and give good results f you use PostScript fonts or print PostScript graphics choose the PostScript driver In this situation performance is faster and graphics are printed at their best quality NOTE The line art graphics in this manual are PostScript If you plan to print parts of this manual choose the PostScript driver Otherwise the line art graphics print at low resolution The print quality may not be satisfactory If neither driver seems to cover all your needs you should install both drivers Select the same printer port LPT1 or Network Port for both drivers during the installation Set the driver you plan to use most of the time to be your Windows default driver Most applications allow you to choose a different printer from within the print dialog so you can use the alternative driver for printing whenever you need to Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 311 Memory Enabling PostScript Only Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the opt
143. DISK FULL is displayed Only one copy is printed If the software application being used has a collate print option it must be turned OFF for proof and print to operate correctly Proof and print may not be available in some software applications 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Job Options tab 3 Enter the number of copies If required select Collate PostScript Driver PCL Driver HIN x IEEE aixi General Layout Paner Quaiiy Job Options Color Overlay General Setup Job Options Color Job Type r Qualiy Job Type C Normal z C Normal Proof and Print Proof and Print Secure Print s Secure Print Em Store to HDD R C Store to HDD PIN Copes fo Copies 10 I Collate L es G Quality o zi C Nomal C Fast Toner saving flrientalinn Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 283 a Under Job Type select Proof and Print b Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name Setting If required select Request Job Name for each print job c Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK PostScript Driver PCL Driver ax x Job Name Setting Job Name Setting Job Name Job Name I I Request Job Name for each print jot Request Job Name for each print job
144. E An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 190 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents PCL or PostScript Using Secure Printing Secure printing printing with passwords allows you to print confidential documents on printers that are shared with other users in a network environment NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for secure printing to operate correctly Secure printing may not be available in some software applications 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Preferences button 3 Under Job Type select Secure Print NOTE If you ve already used Secure Print to place a document on the hard disk drive but have not yet printed it out click the PIN button and enter a new job name Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 191 a Enter a jo
145. E Executive Sertes wi 2426 Printer Family Aw User s Guide Windows For the latest info goto http my okidata com 59366901 OKI Copyright Information Document Name Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide for Windows P N 59366901 Disclaimer Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete accurate and up to date The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for the results of errors beyond its control The manufacturer also cannot guarantee that changes in software and equipment made by other manufacturers and referred to in this document will not affect the applicability of the information in it Mention of software products manufactured by other companies does not necessarily constitute endorsement by the manufacturer While all reasonable efforts have been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible we make no warranty of any kind expressed or implied as to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained herein The most up to date drivers and manuals are available from the website http my okidata com Copyright Information Copyright 2004 All rights reserved First Edition September 2004 Revision 1 00 Written and produced by the Oki Data Training and Publications Department As an ENERGY STAR Program Participant the manufacturer has p determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency
146. E TO e us 646 Sample Network Diagram eene 646 Requirements oet reip er erred 646 Operating System Requirements esee 647 Server Windows Only etie etae rr Ren 647 Client Computers Windows or Macintosh esses 647 Installation etie de rere ete m He 648 Installing the Print Job Accounting Server Software 648 Installing the Print Job Accounting Client Software 649 Server Software Capabilities sese 651 User Name Versus Account ID eese 653 User Names uendere 653 Account D 5 nein Gp pt He iR de 653 Server Softwate gesta ide ai b e dort 655 Starting the Server Software ssssssssssseeeeenree 655 Server Software Pull Down Menus eee 657 Setting Up Automatic Email eee 663 Defining Printer Groups eseseseeseeeeeeee rennen 665 Registering Printers eee erede eun 667 Changing Settings for a Registered Printer esse 687 Setting Up Account IDs eire rerit 688 Prnt LOog 8 5 eut trit reete ei e dea aive RARI end 703 Client SoftWare i e igi esee ie pietre dete dna 716 Starting the Client Software sse 716 Setting the User Name and Account ID sese 716 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 16 Checking the Status of Printers on the Netw
147. EE 1284 and parallel transmission mode 544 Image compression 573 Image drum 505 Blanking plate 33 cautions for handling 505 changing 522 cleaning 115 552 Exposure to light 32 exposure to light 32 505 green surface 505 handling precautions 32 530 Heavy weight paper 74 if exposed to light 530 Laid paper 74 Life by color 118 life expectancy 505 by color 118 effects of cleaning 115 with heavy weight paper 74 with laid paper 74 with textured paper 74 life of a new toner 498 part numbers 575 Protective sheet 32 replacing 505 Test pattern only used Authorized Service 87 Image expansion 573 Information Menu 86 Initialization sequence 56 Initialize EEPROM 523 FLASH 112 Hard disk drive 113 Network 111 Input devices digital cameras Windows 2000 254 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 753 Windows Me 98 95 344 Windows XP 159 Profiles Windows 2000 PS 254 Windows Me 98 95 PS 344 Windows XP PS 159 INSTALL ADDITIONAL MEMORY message 524 INSTALL NEW IMAGE DRUM message 524 INSTALL NEW TONER message 524 INSTALL PAPER CASSETTE message 524 Interface Network 61 62 Parallel 61 62 109 USB 61 62 110 INVALID DATA message 524 IP address 111 I Prime 109 Italian display language 98 ITEM button 65 J Job file list 86 L Labels Carrier sheet 76 Color laser printers 76 Duplexing 73 Exit path Face up Stacker Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windo
148. Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name Setting If required select Request Job Name for each print job b Type a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Then click OK PostScript Driver PCL Driver 2x x Job Name Setting Job Name Setting Job Name Job Name Jl Request Job Name for each print jot Request Job Name for each print job Personal ID Number Setting of PIN Enter 4 digits Enter 4 digits ENEDA Cone OK Cancel 5 Click Print The document is stored on the hard disk It can then be printed on demand or deleted Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 293 Hard Disk Drive Printing a stored document 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU and press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you selected above Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 294 Hard Disk Drive Deleting a stored document 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU and p
149. Factory Defaults Menu _ Item Value _ Select Ready O Q O O Attention Ex Cancel JAJ CAUTION When you reset the printer menu settings to the factory defaults all user defined customized menu settings are lost For lists of the default settings refer to Factory Default Settings on page 579 1 Press MENU until MAINTENANCE MENU displays 2 Press SELECT 3 4 Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until the EEPROM RESET displays The EEPROM initializes This resets a of the user menu settings to factory defaults When you reset the printer menu settings to the factory defaults all user defined customized menu settings are lost When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 84 Menu Printer Settings Lists of Available Settings by Menu The following tables list the available choices for the printer Menu settings Each table is a separate menu The default settings for the printer are in bold text Print Jobs Menu This menu only appears if the hard disk drive is installed The default settings are bold Item ELITS Description ENTER ee Enter a password PASSWORD Use a four digit number 0 9 SELECT JOB No jobs All jobs File Selects the print job when using name 1 to nn Secure Print or Proof and Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 85 Item PRINT MENU MAP PR
150. For example the colors may look different when viewed standing next to a sunlit window compared to how they look under standard office fluorescent lighting Printer Driver Color Settings The driver settings for Manual color can change the appearance of a document There are several options available to help match the printed colors with those displayed on screen These options are explained in subsequent sections of this User Manual Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 236 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Settings The brightness and contrast controls on your monitor can change how your document looks on screen Additionally your monitor color temperature influences how warm or cool the colors look NOTE Several of the Color Matching options make reference to your monitor s Color Temperature Many monitors allow the color temperature to be adjusted through the monitor s control panel There are several settings found on a typical monitor 5000k Warmest yellowish lighting typically used in graphics arts environments 6500k Cooler approximates daylight conditions 9300k Cool the default setting for many monitors and television sets k degrees Kelvin a measurement of temperature Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 237 Factors that Affect Color Printing How your Software Application Displays Color
151. ICM Intent Pictures TrueType Font Substitute with Device Font ie Document Options Advanced Printing Features Enabled E SB PostScript Options f Printer Features Media Type PAE Multipurpose tray is handled as manual feed No Tray Switch On Media Check On Page Rotate Normal Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 227 Paper Feed Size and Media Changing Defaults PCL The normal default for these items is automatic detection NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer driver instructions are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the software under Page Setup 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 On the Setup tab under Media in the Size drop down list select the required paper size Setup Job Options Color m Media Size E BA Source Automatically Select z mall E Paper Feed Options r Finishing Mode Standard N up Options 2Sided Printing INone z L8 r Driver Settings untitea z Add Remove Legal 8 5 x 14in Default Cancel Appl Help Executive Series 2426
152. INE displays 2 Press MENU until MEDIA MENU displays 3 Press SELECT 4 Press ITEM either or until MEDIA TYPE or MEDIA WEIGHT for the required tray displays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 70 Press VALUE either or until the required paper type or weight displays Press the SELECT button An asterisk appears next to the selected paper type or weight When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays Before printing the file select the correct paper settings in the printer driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 71 Paper Media Weight and Type Paper Feed Exit Path and Duplex Options Paper US Bond Metric The size weight and type of the paper print media determine which paper feed tray can be used which paper exit path can be used whether you can use double sided duplex printing Single sided printing is also known as simplex printing Exit Tray MP Tray Rear Top 2 3 Manual Face up Face down Straight Through Paper US Bond Metric 17 Ib 64 g m Light Gp amp g gp S GP 18 to 19 Ib Medium sa sa sa Sa S8 68to 71 g m light 20 to 24 Ib Medium S D S D S SDA S IDE 75 to 90 g m 25 to 27 Ib Medium S D S D S S D S D 91 to 104 g m heavy 28 to 32 Ib Heavy b b Se S2 S2 105 to122 g m 33 to 54 Ib Ultra b b sa sa b 123 to 203 g m heavy a S Simplex printing
153. INT FILE LIST PRINT PCL FONT PRINT PS FONT PRINT IBM PPR FONT PRINT EPSON FX FONT PRINT DEMO1 PRINT ERROR LOG Information Menu The default settings are bold Value Execute Execute Execute Execute Execute Execute Execute Execute Description Prints list of current menu printer settings Prints the job file list Prints the PCL font list Prints the PostScript font list Prints an IBM PPR font list Prints an Epson FX font list Prints the demonstration page Prints the error log Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 86 Test Print Menu The default settings are bold Item Value Description PRINT ID CHECK Execute Ordinarily you should not use this PATTERN Only used by or under the direction of Authorized Service Technicians Prints a test pattern used to check for problems with the image drum Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 87 Shutdown Menu The default settings are bold Item Value Description SHUTDOWN Execute Shut down sequence for the printer START When the hard disk is installed use this sequence to prevent data loss Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 88 Item COPIES DUPLEX BINDING PAPER FEED AUTO TRAY SWITCH TRAY SEQUENCE MP TRAY USAGE MEDIA CHECK Print Menu The default settings are bold Value 1 to 999 On Off Long edge Short edge Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray
154. ION CR LF FUNCTION LR LINE LENGTH 80 column FORM LENGTH 11 inches TOF POSITION 0 0 inch LEFT MARGIN 0 0 inch FIT TO LETTER ENABLE TEXT HEIGHT SAME Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 584 FX Emulation Menu Item Factory default setting CHARACTER PITCH 10 cpi CHARACTER SET SET 2 SYMBOL SET IBM 437 LETTER 0 STYLE DISABLE ZERO CHARACTER NORMAL LINE PITCH 6 Ipi WHITE PAGE SKIP OFF CR FUNCTUION CR LINE LENGTH 80 column FORM LENGTH 11 inch TOF POSITION 0 0 inch LEFT MARGIN 0 0 inch FIT TO LETTER ENABLE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 585 Parallel Menu Item Factory default setting PARALLEL ENABLE BI DIRECTION ENABLE ECP ENABLE ACK WIDTH NARROW ACK BUSY TIMING ACK IN BUSY I PRIME DISABLE OFFLINE RECEIVE DISABLE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 586 USB Menu Item Factory default setting USB ENABLE SOFT RESET DISABLE OFFLINE RECEIVE DISABLE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 587 Network Menu Item Factory default setting TCP IP ENABLE NETWARE ENABLE ETHERTALK ENABLE NETBEUI ENABLE FRAME TYPE AUTO DHCP BOOTP ENABLE RARP DISABLE IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 GATEWAY ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 PRINT SETTINGS OFF INITIALIZE OFF Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 588 Memory Menu
155. Item Factory default setting RECEIVE BUFF SIZE AUTO RESOURCE SAVE OFF FLASH INITIALIZE EXECUTE PS FLASH RESIZE 0 5MB Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 589 Disk Maintenance Menu Item Factory default setting PARTITION 1 PCL PARTITION 2 COMMON PARTITION 3 PS Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 590 System Adjust Menu Item Factory default setting X ADJUST 0 0 mm Y ADJUST 0 0 mm DUPLEX X ADJUST 0 0 mm DUPLEX Y ADJUST 0 0 mm TRAY1 LEGAL14 PAPER LEGAL 14 TRAY2 LEGAL14 PAPER LEGAL 14 TRAY3 LEGAL14 PAPER LEGAL 14 PCL TRAY2 ID 5 PCL TRAY3 ID 20 PCL MP TRAY ID 4 HEX DUMP EXECUTE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 591 Maintenance Menu Item Factory default setting EEPROM RESET EXECUTE POWER SAVE ENABLE PAPER BLACK SETTING 0 PAPER COLOR SETTING 0 TRANSPR BLACK 0 SETTING TRANSPR COLOR 0 SETTING Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 592 Color Swatch Utility General Information The Color Swatch Utility allows you to print color samples swatches on your color printer create custom color swatches The swatches are used with your software program to select and reproduce color accurately The swatches represent selected samples of the printer s color palette Use the swatches to find the desired colors for your printed document
156. Job Accounting Utility 690 4 Enter the appropriate selections then click Next The following window appears Job Account ID registration Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 691 5 Establish the new Account ID a Enter the following information for the new Account ID Account ID number Name Email address if the user will have limits set on their printing enter their email address so that they can be informed when their limit is exceeded and again when printing is once more available to them b Click Add The new Name ID appears in the box c Click Next The following window appears Job Account ID registration 27 x Set functions corresponding to Job Account ID Notifies by e mail when Limit Value was exceeded Do not process Limit Value as a group lt Back Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 692 Notifies total result by e mail Select to send this User an email summarizing their monthly usage of the printer Notifies by e mail when Limit Value is exceeded Select to alert this User by email when their set Limit Values have been exceeded as well as when the limits have been reset and printing can be resumed Do not process Limit Value as a group Restricts the set Limit Values to the particular user Applies only when the printer user belongs to a group Executive
157. LOW HIGH LIGHT YELLOW MID TONE YELLOW DARK BLACK HIGH LIGHT BLACK MID TONE BLACK DARK CYAN DARKNESS MAGENTA DARKNESS YELLOW DARKNESS BLACK DARKNESS ADJUST REGISTRATION EXECUTE CYAN REG FINE ADJUST 0 MAGENTA REG FINE 0 ADJUST YELLOW REG FINE 0 ADJUST INK SIMULATION OFF INK LIMIT DARK CMY100 density DISABLE ooo 000000000000 0o Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 581 System Configuration Menu Item Factory default setting POWER SAVE DELAY 60 mins TIME USB PS PROTOCOL RAW NETWORK RAW PS PROTOCOL PERSONALITY AUTO EMULATION CLEARABLE WARNING ON AUTO CONTINUE OFF MANUAL TIMEOUT 60 sec WAIT TIMEOUT 40 sec LOW TONER CONTINUE JAM RECOVERY ON ERROR REPORT OFF LANGUAGE ENGLISH Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 582 PCL Emulation Menu Item Factory default setting FONT SOURCE RESIDENT FONT No 1000 FONT PITCH 10 00 cpi FONT HEIGHT 12 00 point SYMBOL SET PC 8 A4 PRINT WIDTH 78 column WHITE PAGE SKIP OFF CR FUNCTUION CR LF FUNCTION LF PRINT MARGIN NORMAL TRUE BLACK OFF PEN WIDTH ADJUST ON Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 583 PPR Emulation Menu Item Factory default setting CHARACTER PITCH 10 cpi FONT CONDENSE 10 cpi to 12 cpi CHARACTER SET SET 2 SYMBOL SET IBM 437 LETTER 0 STYLE DISABLE ZERO CHARACTER NORMAL LINE PITCH 6 Ipi WHITE PAGE SKIP OFF CR FUNCTU
158. MENSION INCH Media Menu The default settings are bold A4 A5 A6 B5 Legal 14 Legal 13 5 Legal 13 Letter Executive Custom Com 9 envelope Com 10 envelope Monarch envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope Plain Letterhead Transparency Labels Bond Recycled Card stock Rough Auto Light Medium Light Medium Medium Heavy Heavy Ultra Heavy inches Millimeter 3 inches to 8 5 inches 127 mm to 1200 mm Default 8 5 inches 279 4 mm 5 inches to 35 5 inches Default 11 inches Description Sets the paper media size for the multi purpose paper tray LEF Long Edge Feed Selects the paper media type for multi purpose paper tray Sets the paper media weight for the multi purpose MP paper tray Sets the units of measurement for custom paper media size Sets the width of custom paper media To use this setting the MP Tray Paper Size setting must be set to Custom Sets the length of custom paper media To use this setting the MP Tray Paper Size setting must be set to Custom Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 92 Item AUTO DENSITY MODE ADJUST DENSITY COLOR TUNING CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW OR BLACK HIGHLIGHT Color Menu The default settings are bold ELITS Auto Manual Execute Print pattern 0 1 2 3 3 2 1 Description Select whether density adjustment and Toner Reproduction Curve TRC compensation is automatic Auto
159. Menu Installer located on CD1 NOTE Storage Device Manager requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher to run The printer s internal hard drive does not communicate directly back to the Storage Device Manager software Any error messages appear on the printer display If things seems to be stuck go to the printer and check the display Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 600 Summary of Functions Create or modify a project Download files to a printer Add or remove printers being administered Reboot the printer Manage the Proof amp Print and Secure Print spooler queues on the internal hard drive Delete files from the internal hard disk or from the flash memory View the status configuration and variables for a printer Print the demo page PCL fonts list or PostScript font list from a printer Print one or more PCL format macros or PostScript forms Overlays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 601 Installation Install Storage Device Manager from CD1 Using the Oki Menu Installer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 602 Getting Help NOTE The printer s internal hard drive does not communicate directly back to the Storage Device Manager software Any error messages appear on the printer display If things seems t
160. NT 4 0 Operation 469 a Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name If required select Request Job Name for each print job PostScript Driver JOB PIN i x Job Name Setting Job Name T Request Job Name for each print job Personal ID Number PCL Driver Job PIN x Job Name Settings Job Name fest IV Request Job Name for each print job Personal ID Number PIN Enter 4 digits Use numbers 0 9 Enter 4 digits Cancel Cancel b Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK 6 Enter the number of copies If required select Collate C73_NT_PS_SecureK tif and C73_NT_PCL_SecureK tif PostScript Driver Advanced Job Options Color Store to HDD PIN Copies 15 ziv Collie PCL Driver Setup Job Options Color 31 rob Type C Normal C Normal Proof and print C Proof and Print C Secure print Secure Print C Store to HDD PIN Scale Scale C Fine 100 Quality roo C Normal c C Normal C Fast Toner Saving C Fast Toner saving Orjentation p Otientation c g Portrait r 180 C Pous T 180 A C Landscape Landscape M 180 L Overlay Font Advanced Watermark Overlay Font J Advanced Default Default EN 7T Click OK Print the document The document is stored on the printer s hard disk 8 Go to the printer Use the fr
161. O 16 Por ISO 17 Spa ISO 21 Ger ISO 25 Fre ISO 57 Chi ISO 60 Nor ISO 61 Nor ISO 69 Fre ISO 84 Por ISO 85 Spa Kamenicky Legal Math 8 MC Text MS Publish PC Ext D N PC Ext US PC Set1 PC Set2 D N PC Set2 US Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 100 PCL Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Item Value Description A4 PRINT 78 column 80 column If you are printing a letter size WIDTH document on an A4 size sheet select 80 column This condenses the print to fit on the slightly narrower A4 sheet without changing the line breaks White page skip OFF ON PCL only ON blank pages do not print CR function CR CR LF PCL only When the printer receives a CR code CR carriage return performed CR FL carriage return with line feed performed LF function LF LF CR PCL only When the printer receives a LF code LF line feed performed LF CR line feed with carriage return performed Print margin Normal 1 5 inch 1 6 inch Sets unprintable paper area margin Normal PCL emulation compatible 1 5 inch domestic model emulation 1 6 inch HIPER W emulation True Black OFF ON PCL only Determines whether to use Composite Black CMYK mixed or True Black K only for the black 100 in image data OFF Composite CMYK Black Provides best results when printing photographs ON Pure Black black toner only Provides best results when printing a combination of text and gr
162. O 16 Por ISO 17 Spa ISO 21 Ger ISO 25 Fre ISO 57 Chi ISO 60 Nor ISO 61 Nor ISO 69 Fre ISO 84 Por ISO 85 Spa Kamenicky Legal Math 8 MC Text MS Publish PC Ext D N PC Ext US PC Set1 PC Set2 D N PC Set2 US Bulgarian CWI Hung DeskTop German Greek 437 Greek 437 Cy Greek 928 Hebrew NC Hebrew OC IBM 437 IBM 850 IBM 860 IBM 863 IBM 865 ISO Dutch ISO L1 ISO L2 ISO L5 ISO L6 ISO L9 Disable Enable Enable 9BH Hex letter o 9DH Hex 7 zero number Normal Slashed Normal zero unslashed Slashed zero slashed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 104 Item LINE PITCH WHITE PAGE SKIP CR FUNCTION LF FUNCTION LINE LENGTH FORM LENGTH TOF POSITION LEFT MARGIN FIT TO LETTER TEXT HEIGHT PPR Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value 6 LPI 8 LPI OFF ON CR CR LF LF LF CR 80 COLUMN 136 COLUMN 11 INCH 11 7 INCH 12 INCH 0 0 to 1 0 INCH in 0 1 inch increments 0 0 to 1 0 INCH in 0 1 inch increments Disable Enable Same Diff Description Specifies the line spacing in lines per inch Ipi ON blank pages do not print Does not apply when duplexing PPR only When the printer receives a CR code CR carriage return performed CR LF carriage return with line feed performed PPR only When the printer receives a LF code LF line feed performed LF CR line feed with carriage return performed
163. OK to confirm the deletion Using Administrator Functions to delete a file requires that you print out a File List then use the information in the File List to type in the exact path case sensitive to the file The file is deleted without confirmation Format the Hard Drive You can also use Storage Device Manager to format the partitions on the printer s hard drive Remember this erases the contents of the partition and can cause serious problems Use Show Resources and HDD Print Jobs to maintain the disk Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 605 Using Opening the Program 1 Click Start Programs Oki Oki Storage Device Manager Oki Storage Device Manager The SDM Printer Discovery dialog box opens SDM Printer Discovery Filters Iv Show Parallel I Show USB T Show IP Scope 255 255 255 255 Default Renove dd ta Scope List 3 E Ca ws _ 2 Select the appropriate computer connection s then click Start The printer searches for connected printers and places icons in the window at the bottom of the dialog box 3 Click Exit The Storage Device Manager dialog box opens Storage Device Manager File Printers View Window Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 606 Setting Up an Administrative Password 1 With the Storage Device Manager progr
164. On the Job Options tab click the Overlay button Click the New button In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay Select the pages where you want the overlay to print ah ON NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the name under which the file is stored on the printers hard disk drive It is case sensitive 6 Under Form setting in the drop down list enter or select a form name Click Add NOTE The Form Name is a random name of your selection 7 Click OK 8 To continue to add files to the overlay if required repeat steps 5 through 8 9 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name s Click Add to add the overlay s to the list under Active Overlay To select more than one overlay hold the CTRL key while clicking on each name 10 At the top of the dialog box use the drop down list to select Use Overlay Click OK 11 Click OK to close the Default dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 641 Overlays Windows NT PCL Defining aoah whnd Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click Document Defaults Click the Job Options tab Click the Overlay button To define an overlay click the Define Overlays button In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay NOTE The Overlay N
165. Overlap 033 Eich 5 Click OK twice 6 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 213 Windows 2000 Printer Drivers See your printed Software Installation Guide for information on installing printer drivers You can also go to http my okidata com to view and or download a copy of the Software Installation Guide or for the latest information on drivers for your printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 214 Which Printer Driver to Use Your printer comes with Windows drivers for PCL and Adobe PostScript PS You can install either of these or both if you wish Which driver you choose depends on your application f you use TrueType fonts and you do not print PostScript including eps files graphics choose the PCL driver This is more efficient and gives good results f you use PostScript fonts or print PostScript graphics choose the PostScript driver In this situation performance is faster and graphics print at their best quality NOTE The line art graphics in this manual are PostScript If you plan to print parts of this manual choose the PostScript driver Otherwise the line art graphics print at low resolution The print quality may not be satisfactory If neither driver seems to cover all your needs you should install both drivers Select the same printer port LPT1 or Network Port
166. PCL Hard disk drive 620 1 partition Common Hard disk drive 620 2 Flash Memory PCL 620 5000k monitor setting Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 6500k monitor setting Windows 2000 237 246 Windows Me 98 95 326 335 Windows NT 423 432 Windows XP 142 151 9300k monitor setting Windows 2000 237 246 Windows Me 98 95 326 335 Windows NT 423 432 Windows XP 142 151 A A4 paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 printing a different size on 90 printing Letter size on A4 101 A5 paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 A6 paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Access user access to printer 644 Accounting client information 652 printer usage 644 Activate options See option name Adjusting color Color swatch samples 593 594 596 Color tuning 93 creating custom colors 593 594 596 Dark 94 Darkness 94 596 Density 93 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 739 100 density adjustment 96 Highlight 93 Hue 596 in software applications 596 Lightness 596 mid tones 94 of your monitor 596 Registration automatic adjustment 94 manual adjustment 95 RGB numbers for applications 595 Saturation 596 Test Pattern 93 Vividness 596 Administrative password 607 Alignment colors don t align 95 Applications graphic intensive 555 Attention light Flashing 63 ON 63 Auto Adjust Registration 94 fine adjustment by color 95 Aut
167. Personal ID Number Setting of PIN Enter 4 digits Enter 4 digits Dante Cancel OK Cancel 4 Click Print The document is stored on the hard disk drive One copy is printed for checking 5 After checking the proof print or delete if incorrect the remaining copies of the document Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 284 Proof and Print Printing Copies 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the remaining copies of the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 285 Proof and Print Deleting Copies If the proof is not ready for printing the job must be deleted from the printer 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to d
168. Print to file Engage the Encapsulated PostScript EPS output option Windows Me 98 95 Click Properties or your application s equivalent Click the PostScript tab If it is not already selected click Encapsulated PostScript EPS Windows NT 4 0 Click Properties or your application s equivalent Scroll down to PostScript Options and click it Click PostScript Output Option Select Encapsulated PostScript EPS Click OK Print the document to a file using the extension PRN Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 609 Forms PostScript Step 2 Create a New Project 1 Open Storage Device Manager 2 Click Projects New Project The Project dialog box opens 3 Click Projects Save Project enter the path name for storing the project on your hard drive or your network then click Save Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 610 Forms PostScript Step 3a Add Files to the Project 1 Click Projects Add File to Project The Open dialog box appears 2 Make sure PRN files prn is selected in the Files of type drop down list 3 Browse to the folder where the files are saved Select the files you wish to add to the project Click Open The Information dialog box appears 4 Click OK The files are saved as HST 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 until you have added all the files you wish
169. Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 627 Overlays What are Overlays An overlay is a combination of graphics fonts or text that is stored and printed whenever required An overlay is stored in the printer s flash memory or on the hard disk optional An overlay is similar to a watermark However an overlay can be much more elaborate than a watermark Overlays can replace as pre printed stationery add your logo or company address to a document create forms When to Use Overlays Use overlays to print letterheads forms or invoices Using overlays can reduce the need for pre printed stationery Example of Using Overlays Use the Storage Device Manager to create and store three files in the printer e the company logo the company address the company mission statement Use the Overlay feature to place these files into your document You can use the files in many different combinations according to your changing requirements Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 628 Overlays Creating Files for Overlays The files to be used as overlays must be created generated and stored Then other users can use settings in the printer drivers to use the files as overlays in documents 1 2 3 Create the document that you wish to use for Overlay printing e g a letterhead Use the printer driver to generate a PRN file print fil
170. Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 271 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript Using 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PS driver Click the Layout tab 3 Under Print on Both Sides select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge 4 Click Print 21x General Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay r Orientation Portrait C Landscape C Rotated Landscape Side 1 Side 2 m Print on Both Sides Duplex C None Flip on Long Edge Flip on Short Edge r Page Order Front to Back AW C Back to Front Pages Per Sheet 1 x Advanced a em om Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 272 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PCL Usage Restrictions NOTE The optional duplex unit must be installed in the printer and enabled before duplex printing can be carried out Standard paper sizes only Paper weight range 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper must be loaded print side up Only Tray 1 optional Trays 2 and 3 and the High Capacity Feeder trays can be used for duplex printing The Multi Purpose MP tray cannot be used for duplex printing NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs Click Start gt Settings Prin
171. RGB color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printable colors are modified Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 340 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Driver PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer It affects both RGB and CMYK data From the Rendering Intent drop down list select the rendering type General Details Color Management Fonts Setup Job Options Color Device Options PostScript Color Mode Color Control PostScript Color Matchii Color Simulation None gt Rendering Intent 34j Saturation Advanced Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 341 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Driver PostScript Color Matching Rendering Intents When a document is printed a conversion takes place from the document s color space to the printer color space The rendering intents are essentially a set of rules that determine how this color conversion takes place The printer driver provides the rendering intents listed below Auto Best choice for printing general documents Perceptual Best choice for printing photographs Compresses the source gamut into the printer s
172. RGB data only See OKI Color Matching on page 339 PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer and affects both RGB and CMYK data See PostScript Color Matching on page 341 Using ICC Profiles This option provides a method of matching RGB colors similar to Windows ICM matching See Using ICC Profiles on page 344 Windows ICM This is the color management system built into Windows See Windows ICM Color Matching on page 346 No Color Matching Use this option to switch off all printer color matching No color correction occurs when selected This option is beneficial when other matching regimens are used specifically if you select a Color Simulation option Print in Grayscale This option prints all documents as monochrome No color prints The printer interprets all colors as a variation of grays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 338 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Driver OKI Color Matching This is OKI s proprietary color matching system It affects RGB data only This is the default setting It provides the fastest best color matching for your printer Under Color Setting use the drop down list to select the type to be used General Details Color Management Fonts Setup Job Options Color Device Options PostScript m Color Mode 3
173. Relative Colorimetric attempts to take the paper white into account Absolute Colorimetric Best for printing solid colors and tints such as Company logos Matches colors common to both devices exactly Clips the out of gamut colors to their nearest printed equivalent Tries to print white as it appears on screen The white of a monitor is often very different from paper white so this may result in color casts especially in the lighter areas of an image Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 253 Color Matching Color Control Method Using ICC Profiles PostScript Only Affects RGB data only This provides a method of matching RGB colors similar to Windows ICM matching The main advantage it has over Windows ICM color matching is that it provides a method of printing using both input and output profiles Windows ICM matching only allows output profiles to be chosen Input Profiles e g a digital camera provide information about the color in the original device that was used to capture or display the image data For example an input device could be a scanner digital camera or monitor Output Profiles e g the printer provide information about the device to which you are printing The Using ICC Profiles feature uses both the input and output profiles to generate a CRD Color Rendering Dictionary which is used to match the colors as closely as possible NOTE This feature may
174. Setting Up 78 Adjusting the Color Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning Sample Color Tuning Pattern Color Tuning Pattern Cyan Magenta Yellow Black CMY Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 79 Adjusting the Color Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning Example Adjust the Magenta To adjust the intensity of the magenta portion 1 2 Print the Color Tuning Pattern See Print the Color Tuning Pattern on page 78 Adjust the Magenta highlight color a Press ITEM either or until MAGENTA HIGHLIGHT nn displays b Press VALUE either or until the new value you wish to use displays e g 3 c Press SELECT An asterisk appears at the right of the number Adjust the Magenta mid tone color a Press ITEM either or until MAGENTA MID TONE nn appears b Press VALUE either or until the new value you wish to use displays e g nn 3 c Press the SELECT button An asterisk appears at the right of the number Adjust the Magenta dark color a Press ITEM either or until MAGENTA DARK nn displays b Press VALUE either or until the new value you wish to use displays e g nn 3 c Press SELECT An asterisk appears at the right of the number Press the online button to save the new setting and return the printer to online sta
175. Step 5 Check File Settings and Save the Project 620 Step 6 Download the Project seee 621 Step 7 Test Print the Formis 4 uiis d een 622 Prinung the File last enm t at 623 Using Storage Device Manager esee 623 From the Control Front Panel c cccsscccesscesseeeesneeesseeeesseeeees 623 Internal Hard Disk Drive Maintenance eene 624 Flash Memory Maintenance eese 624 View and Delete Files inve e RE as 624 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 15 HDD Print Jobs Feature eeeeeeeeeeeeeee nnne 624 Delete Files nare itae nee ies 626 Show Resources Feature essere 626 Overlays is tei UE RR eee ee ERE eS 628 What are Overlays ite tet tp dee ede 628 When to Use Ovetlays n dte eere Peut 628 Example of Using Overlays eese 628 Creating Files for Overlays sese 629 Requirements for USE riere n e een 630 Windows 2000 and XP PCL eee 632 Windows 20002 PGE rire rit tee rere 633 Windows Me 98 95 PCL essere 636 Windows Me 98 95 PostScript 640 Windows NT PostScript esee 641 Windows NT PCL 14 ente rte ite ee etr eet 642 Print Job Accounting Utility erre 644 Introduction 45e teer deed RH et UE Re 644 OVerVIeWz ian EO HR RR E GR
176. TE Several of the Color Matching options make reference to your monitor s Color Temperature Many monitors allow you to adjust the color temperature through their control panels There are several settings found on a typical monitor 5000k Warmest yellowish lighting typically used in graphics arts environments 6500k Cooler approximates daylight conditions 9300k Cool the default setting for many monitors and television sets k degrees Kelvin a measurement of temperature Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 423 Factors that Affect Color Printing How your Software Application Displays Color Some graphics applications such as CorelDRAW or Adobe Photoshop may display color differently from office applications such as Microsoft Word Please see your application s online help or user manual for more information Paper Type The type of paper used can also significantly affect the printed color For example a printout on recycled paper can look duller than one on specially formulated glossy paper Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 424 Color Matching Choosing a Method NOTE These suggestions are for guidance only Your results may vary depending on the application from which you are printing Some applications override without warning any color matching settings in the printer driver There is no o
177. The PCL and PostScript printer drivers supplied with your printer provide several controls for changing the color output For general use the default driver settings produce good results for most documents Many applications have their own color settings and these may override the settings in the printer driver Please refer to the documentation for your software application for details on how that particular program s color management functions If you wish to manually adjust the color settings in your printer driver please be aware that color reproduction is a complex topic and there are many factors to take into consideration Some of the most important factors are the differences between the range of colors a monitor can reproduce versus the range of colors that a printer can reproduce viewing conditions printer driver color settings monitor settings how your software application displays color paper type Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 421 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can reproduce Neither a printer nor a monitor is capable of reproducing the full range of colors visible to the human eye Each device is restricted to a certain range of colors In addition to this a printer cannot reproduce all of the colors displayed on a monitor and vice versa Both de
178. Tray 1 Standard Duplex Installed Hard Disk Memory Configuration 128 MB Cancel Apply Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 217 Hard Disk Drive Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 On the Device Option tab click Printer Hard Disk 4 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box General Sharing Ports Advanced l Color Management Security Device Option r Available Options Available Tray 1 E Duplex Option Unit IV Printer Hard Disk About Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 218 Paper Trays Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 2 3 Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options click Available Trays then select the appropriate number of trays not includ
179. Tray 272 73 Tray 372 73 Ultra Heavy 72 73 91 Paper Carbon paper 74 Paper Card stock 53 54 Paper Cut outs 74 Paper Embossed 74 Paper Finishes 74 Paper glossy paper 74 Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Paper Grain differences 74 Paper Handling precautions 42 Paper Headed 74 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 767 Paper Label Duplexing 73 Paper Exit 73 Paper Feed 73 Paper Weight 73 Paper Laid paper 74 Paper Menu settings 91 92 Paper NCR paper 74 Paper Perforations 74 Paper Photosensitive 74 Paper Pressure sensitive 74 Paper Ragged edges 74 Paper Recommendations website 74 Paper Recycled 74 Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Paper Rough 74 Paper Shiny 74 Paper Smooth 74 Paper Specifications 74 Paper Storage 74 Paper Temperature requirements for printing 74 Paper Textured paper 74 Paper Thermal transfer 74 Paper Thick paper 53 54 Paper Transparencies Duplexing 73 Paper Exit 73 Paper Feed 73 Paper Weight 73 Paper US Bond Metric Duplexing 72 Paper Exit 72 Paper Feed 72 Paper Weight 72 Parallel ACK 109 ACK Width 109 bi directional 109 BUSY 109 ECP 109 Interface 61 62 109 cannot configure 545 output garbled 546 Parallel Transmission Mode 544 problems 544 545 546 Prime 109 Menu 109 Offline Receive 109 Parallel Emulation Menu default settings 586 Parallel interface 572 c
180. Type in your Administrator s Password c Press Enter 5 Delete the files Important You are not prompted to confirm the deletion Click Cancel Job s to delete the files without printing them Click Print Job s to print the files out before they are auto matically deleted Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 625 Internal Hard Disk Drive Maintenance Flash Memory Maintenance Delete Files Show Resources Feature Use the Show Resources feature to delete files from the internal hard drive and flash memory 1 Open Storage Device Manager Click the icon for the printer whose contents you wish to view 2 Click Printers Show Resources Show_clr_C53_oem bmp Storage Device Manager c Projects Printers View Window Help el x S a DISK T Volume 0 QuputHST Oupu2HST Output HST Ef pd 3 Click the file s to be deleted Press Shift to select a span of files Press Ctrl to select additional files PCL Macro files are under Volume 0 internal hard drive or Volume 2 flash memory PostScript Forms are under Volume amp disk096 internal hard drive or flashO flash memory 4 Click Printers Delete File s 5 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 626 6 Close the dialog box Executive Series 2426
181. User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 296 Creating Overlays 1 Create the document that you wish to use for Overlay printing e g a letterhead 2 Use the printer driver to generate a PRN file print file 3 Use the Storage Device Manager utility to convert this PRN file print file to a storable file format 4 Download the storable file to the printer Once someone has set up all the necessary overlay files on the printer other users only have to switch on the required settings in the printer driver to use the overlays NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for overlay to operate correctly An overlay may consist of more than one component file Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 297 Creating documents to use as overlays PCL An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and can print to a file To create a print PRN file 1 2 Open in your application program Open the file to be stored as an overlay Choose File then Print Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your application s Print dialog box
182. Windows NT 4 0 Operation 442 Custom Page Sizes PostScript NOTE One custom paper size can be defined in the PostScript driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the driver to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 443 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PS driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paperis stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 444 3 On the Advanced tab under Document Options Paper Output a Click Paper Source In the Change Paper Source Setting list select Multi Purpose Tray P5 Document Settings Efe Document Options ip Paper Output E Paper Size lt Letter gt RB Input Slot Option ify Media Type Print
183. Windows XP Printer Drivers 129 3 Click the Paper Quality tab Under Tray Selection in the Paper Source drop down list select the paper feed Layout Paper Qualty Job Options Color Overlay Tray Selection r Paper Source sf Multi Purpose Tray Color O Black amp White Color Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 130 4 Click the Advanced button 5 Under Paper Output in the Paper Size drop down list select the media size EJ Advanced Document Settings S IK Paper Output Paper Size fa v B lu Graphic E Q Image Color Management ICM Method ICM Disabled ICM Intent Pictures TrueType Font Substitute with Device Font a ie Document Options Advanced Printing Features Enabled E PostScript Options BS d Printer Features Media Type Printer Setting Multipurpose tray is handled as manual feed No Tray Switch On Media Check On Page Rotate Normal Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 131 6 Under Document Options Printer Features click Media Type and select the media from the drop down list 7 Click OK twice Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box Advanced Document Settings B 25 Paper Output Paper Size Letter Bg lu Graphic B Q Image Color Management ICM Method ICM Disabled ICM Intent Pictures TrueType Font Substitute with
184. XXX1 192 168 0 1 4 10002 User02 Untitled Notepad 2003 10 5 Administrator users3 csv 2003 11 6 axo Administrator Microsoft Word Document h 1 User No page to display B T 8 10003 Use Document 3 3 10004 User04 ReadMe pdf 2003 11 10 10004 User04 Acrobat pdf Printer 11 0 Administrator OK Print Job Accounting amp 2003 10 12 0 Administrator OK Print Job Accounting XXX1 192 168 0 1 13 10005 User05 Microsoft Word MyDoc doc XXX2 192 168 0 2 14 10005 User05 MySheet xls c 2003 11 15 10005 User05 Print Bubbles bmp 1 page 16 10005 User05 Untitled Notepad XXX1 192 168 0 1 XXX2 192 168 0 2 NOTE The screen shots in this User s Guide are generic When you see XXX1 XXX2 etc in a screen they represent a specific model number which will vary depending on which models are being used in your system Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 644 With Print Job Accounting you can Control costs by limiting access to color printing for specific clients Plan equipment allocation by monitoring exactly how much each client prints Set up billing for individual clients based on their recorded usage NOTE This software saves acquired log data on the printer s Hard Disk Drive optional If the printer does not have the Hard Disk Drive the acquired logs are saved to the Flash memory The Flash memory is relatively limited as to how much informati
185. able specifications 572 connection 572 interface levels 572 transmission mode 572 Parallel Transmisssion Mode 544 reception 109 Partitions of Hard disk drive 113 Password print jobs install the optional hard disk drive 562 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 768 Passwords Administrative 607 Windows 2000 287 Windows Me 98 95 377 Windows NT 469 Windows XP 191 PCL Composite Black printing 41 printing black 41 True black printing 41 PCL Emulation Menu 99 default settings 583 PCL Macros forms 615 PCL5c internal font 572 print language 572 PDF embedded fonts 599 printing files 597 PDF Direct Print Utility 597 Pen width 102 Perforations in Paper 74 Photographs and monitor settings Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 Photographs Color matching RGB only Windows 2000 241 Windows Me 98 95 330 Windows NT 427 Windows XP 146 RGB or CMYK Windows 2000 241 Windows Me 98 95 330 Windows XP 146 Soft Proofing Windows 2000 241 Windows Me 98 95 330 Windows XP 146 Windows 2000 241 246 251 PS 253 Windows Me 98 95 330 335 340 342 Windows NT 427 432 437 PS 439 Windows XP 146 151 156 PS 158 Photographs Color Settings Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 Photographs printing 41 Photosensitive Paper 74 PIN number Storage Device Manager 605 Pitch width font 99 PLEASE POWER OFF message 524 Points Font Height 99 Polish displ
186. ach print jot Request Job Name for each print job Personal ID Number Setting of PIN Enter 4 digits Enter 4 digits Use number 0 9 b Type a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK 4 Select the number of copies Click Collate if applicable 5 Click OK Click Print The document is stored on the hard disk It can then be printed on demand or deleted Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 196 Hard Disk Drive Printing a stored document 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU and press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you selected above Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 197 Hard Disk Drive Deleting a stored document 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU and press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you selected above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Pre
187. age Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 472 Hard Disk Drive PCL or PostScript Storing a Document Store to hard disk job spooling allows print jobs to be prepared and stored on the hard disk for printing on demand This is good for forms generic memos letterhead stationery etc NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled Ifthe hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed fthe software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for Store to Hard Disk to operate correctly Store to Hard Disk may not be available in some software applications 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver 3 Select Print to file 4 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 473 5 Select Store to HDD PostScript Driver PCL Driver If you ve already stored a document on the printer s hard disk drive and want to store another one click the PIN button and enter a new Job Name Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 474 a Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name Setting If required select Request
188. age drum life Press SELECT to place the printer in Hexadecimal Hex Dump Mode In Hex Dump Mode all received data is printed in both Hexadecimal and ASCII format This information is often used when troubleshooting printer problems To return to normal print mode turn off the printer then turn it on Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 115 Item EEPROM RESET SAVE MENU RESTORE MENU POWER SAVE PAPER BLACK SETTING PAPER COLOR SETTING TRANSPR BLACK SETTING TRANSPR COLOR SETTING Maintenance Menu The default settings are bold Value Execute Execute Execute Enable Disable 2 1 0 1 2 2 1 0 1 2 2 1 0 1 2 2 1 0 1 2 Description Resets all User Menu settings to factory defaults All user defined customized settings are lost Saves the current printer menu settings Restore Menu is not the same as Reset to Factory defaults Restore Menu resets the menu to the last saved set of customized user defined settings If the settings have not been changed from the factory defaults Restore Menu cannot be accessed When no input is received for a specified time the printer enters Power Save Mode See POWER SAVE Mode on page 57 See also Power Save Delay Time under the System Configuration Menu on page 97 Not normally used Not normally used Not normally used Not normally used
189. al Setup Job Options Color gt Media Size fletter85x1ln I Source Automatically Select Paper Feed Options r Finishing Mode 4 up fil r Z Sided Printng _ None E A r Driver Settings Untitled m Add Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 259 Click the Options button Select the Page Borders Page Layout and Bind Margin Click OK Click OK Click Print Standard N up Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 260 Custom Page Sizes PostScript NOTE One custom paper size can be defined in the PostScript driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the driver to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 261 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PS driver Click the Paper Quality tab Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path
190. am open click Administrator Functions in the Printers menu Storage Device Manager Administrator s Functions xj Password Tasks Faites Files TEE gae f EGRMET Volumes 8 characters Delete File Change Password Beboot Panter ees peser NOTE Passwords consist of eight digits letters or numbers and are case sensitive 2 Type in the default password p1xs7dO0m under Enter Password then click Change Password 3 Type the 8 digit aloha numeric password of your choice under New Password 4 Type the password again under Confirm New Password New Password Accepted appears 5 Click OK 6 Click Exit twice Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 607 Forms PostScript NOTE Use PostScript forms if you are not experienced with PCL Macro commands Step 1 Create the Form Step 2 Create a Project Step 3a Add Files to the Project Step 3b Delete Files from the Project Step 4 Store the Files Step 5 Save and Download the Project Step 6 Test Print the Form Important Remember that file names and paths are case sensitive Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 608 Forms PostScript Step 1 Create the Form 1 2 5 6 Create the document in your software application Click File Print and make sure the Oki PostScript driver is selected Select
191. ame must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the name under which the file is stored on the printer s hard disk drive It is case sensitive 12 13 14 In ID Values enter the ID of the file Please refer to the instructions for the Storage Device Manager utility Select which pages the overlay is to be printed on from Print on Pages or use Custom Pages to select specific page numbers in the document Click Add Click Close 10 11 Repeat steps 5 though 9 for each overlay you wish to add Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name Click the Add button to add the overlay to the list in Active Overlays Select Print Using Active Overlays Click OK Click OK to close the Default dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 642 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 643 Print Job Accounting Utility Introduction The Print Job Accounting software designed specifically for OKI printers in a network environment provides job accounting features that allow you to track printer usage calculate printing costs and specify access available to each client user File Printer Log Help Printer xxx1 192 168 0 1 XXX2 192 168 0 2 1 User Microsoft Word Document 2 10001 User01 Book1 3 10002 User02 property
192. amily User s Guide Consumables 577 OKI Print Media continued OKI Premium Envelopes Security Tint Redi Strip Seal 2 Order No White COM 10 Box 100 52206301 White COM 10 Box 500 seseeee 52206302 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Consumables 578 Factory Default Settings Print Menu Item Factory default setting COPIES 1 DUPLEX OFF BINDING LONG EDGE PAPER FEED TRAY1 AUTO TRAY SWITCH ON TRAY SEQUENCE DOWN MP TRAY USAGE FEED WHEN MISMATCHING MEDIA CHECK ENABLE TRANSPARENCY DETECT AUTO RESOLUTION ES2426n 600 X 1200 dpi ES2426dn 600 X 1200 dpi ES2426e FAST 1200 dpi TONER SAVE MODE OFF MONO PRINT SPEED AUTO ORIENTATION PORTRAIT LINE PER PAGE 60 EDIT SIZE CASSETTE SIZE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 579 Media Menu Item Factory default setting TRAY1 MEDIATYPE PLAIN TRAY1 MEDIAWEIGHT AUTO TRAY2 MEDIATYPE PLAIN TRAY2 MEDIAWEIGHT AUTO TRAY3 MEDIATYPE PLAIN TRAY3 MEDIAWEIGHT AUTO MPP TRAY PAPERSIZE LETTER MP TRAY MEDIA PLAIN MP TRAY AUTO MEDIAWEIGHT UNIT OF MEASURE INCH X DIMENSION 8 5 INCH Y DIMENSION 11 INCH Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Factory Default Settings 580 Color Menu Item Factory default setting AUTO DENSITY MODE AUTO ADJUST DENSITY EXECUTE COLOR TUNING PRINT PATTERN CYAN HIGH LIGHT CYAN MID TONE CAN DARK MAGENTA HIGH LIGHT MAGENTA MID TONE MAGENTA DARK YEL
193. anced Job Options Color EJ PS Document Settings B ie Document Options B ip Paper Output Bl Paper Size Letter d Paper Source Multi Purpose Tray ip Input Slot Option Media Type lt Printer Setting gt B ip Layout ld N UP UP 8 2 Sided Printing None PostScript Options Change N UP Setting Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 440 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet N Up Printing PCL 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode select the required number of pages per sheet Setup Job Options Color m Media Size Leter 8 5 x 11in z Source Automatically Select 7 Paper Feed Options Finishing Mode z Options m 2 Sided Printing 4 None A r Driver Settings Untitled Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 441 4 Click the Options button Select the Page Borders Page Layout and Bind Margin Click OK 5 Click OK Print the document Standard N up am N rj l Non Insel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide
194. aphics See page 41 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 101 Item Pen width adjust PCL Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value ON OFF Description PCL only ON Emphasizes the pen width of very fine lines minimum line width This improves the appearance of the lines Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 102 Item Character pitch Font condense Character set PPR Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value 10 CPI 12 CPI 17 CPI 20 CPI PROPORTIONAL 12 CPI TO 20 CPI 12 CPI TO 12 CPI Set 1 Set 2 Description Specifies character pitch in IBM PPR emulation Specifies 12 cpi pitch for Condense Mode Specifies a character set Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 103 Item Symbol set LETTER 0 STYLE ZERO CHARACTER PPR Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value Description PC 8 PC 8 Dan Nor Specifies a symbol set PC 8 TK PC 775 PC 850 PC 852 PC 855 PC 857 TK PC 858 PC 866 PC 869 PC 1004 Pi Font Plska Mazvia PS Math PS Text Roman 8 Roman 9 Roman Ext Serbo Croat Serbo Croat2 Spanish Ukrainian VN Int l VN Math VN US Win 3 0 Win 3 1 Bit Win 3 1 Cyr Win 3 1 Grk Win 3 1 Heb Win 3 1 L1 Win 3 1 L2 Win 3 1 L5 ISO Swedish1 ISO Swedish2 ISO Swedish3 ISO 2 IRV ISO 4 UK ISO 6 ASC ISO 10 S F ISO 11 Swe ISO 14 JASC ISO 15 Ita IS
195. ard Disk 4 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 405 Paper Trays Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once or o Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options click Available Trays Select the appropriate number of trays not including the Multi purpose tray from the Change Available Tray Setting list Click OK Close the Printers dialog box General Ports Scheduling Sharing Security Device Settings X Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No xX Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts lt No gt Job Timeout lt 0 seconds gt g Wait Timeout lt 300 seconds gt g Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap lt 600 pixel s E a Installable Options f Available Tray lt 3 2 Optional Trays ip Duplex lt Installed gt fi Hard Disk Installed ip Memory Configuration lt 128 MB gt Change Available Tray Setting ip 1 Standard 2 1 Optional Tra Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s
196. ated to help you find the best match Click OK Print the custom swatch page Repeat these steps until you find the desired printed color For additional information see the Swatch Utility Read me file located in the Windows Programs list The file includes oc f Applying Color Value in your Application Setting Monitor Color Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Color Swatch Utility 596 PDF Direct Print Utility General Information PDF Direct Print allows you to send a selected PDF file directly to the printer This is faster and easier than using Adobe Acrobat separately before printing PDF Direct Print also lets you set paper source copies 2 sided printing print page range and other settings Load this program from the Menu Installer located on CD1 Requirements for Use An optional built in hard disk must be installed Supports version PDF 1 3 Acrobat 4 0 or below A font environment on your system NOTE Some PDF files may not be able to print correctly Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide PDF Direct Print Utility 597 Using NOTE The PDF Direct Print Utility works with version 1 3 Acrobat 4 0 or below PDF files 1 Right click on the file you want to print in Windows Explorer or the file icon on the Desktop 2 Click PDF Direct Print 3 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide PDF Direct Print Utility
197. ay Settings MPT is Manual feed Custom Size Default Cancel Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 136 7 Click OK twice Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 137 Network Printer Status Utility Available on TCP IP network connection only The Network Printer Status utility is available if your administrator has installed it If the utility is installed the printer driver Properties dialog box changes a new Status tab is added an Option button is added to the Device Option tab This utility allows you to view but not change the status of the following on the Status tab paper trays installed and the media assigned to them total size and percentage used of disk memory percentage of toner remaining Important If you select Automatic Status Update in the Status tab the driver automatically pings the printer for the latest status information every time you open the Properties dialog box This causes a significant
198. ay language 98 Portrait Envelopes 48 Letterhead 47 Ports of the printer 61 Portuguese display language 98 Posters printing Windows 2000 PCL only 309 Windows Me 98 95 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 769 PCL only 399 Windows NT PCL only 493 Windows XP PCL only 212 PostScript Communication Protocol Mode Network 97 USB 97 Forms 608 process simulation generator 95 PostScript Color Matching Windows 2000 249 252 Windows Me 98 95 338 341 Windows NT 435 438 Windows XP 154 157 PostScript Driver Color matching Windows 2000 248 Windows Me 98 95 337 Windows NT 434 Windows XP 153 PostScript Fonts 86 Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 PostScript3 internal font 572 print language 572 Power On off switch 56 59 operating specifications 574 Power cable 56 Power off sequence Shutdown sequence 88 Power Save 60 116 delays in printing 552 Setting the time 97 power saving specifications 574 Shutdown Sequence 88 specifications 573 574 standby specifications 574 Start up sequence 56 time to startup 573 POWER SAVE message 524 PPR Emulation Menu 103 default settings 584 Pressure Sensitive Paper 74 Print condensing 101 Print overrun automatic recovery 97 Print Position adjustment horizontal 114 for duplex 114 vertical 114 for duplex 114 Print in Grayscale Windows 2000 249 Windows Me 98 95 338 Windows NT 435 Windows XP 154 Print Job Accounting requirements 6
199. aylight conditions 9300k Cool the default setting for many monitors and television sets k degrees Kelvin a measurement of temperature Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 326 Factors that Affect Color Printing How your Software Application Displays Color Some graphics applications such as CorelDRAW or Adobe Photoshop may display color differently from office applications such as Microsoft Word Please see your application s online help or user manual for more information Paper Type The type of paper used can also significantly affect the printed color For example a printout on recycled paper can look duller than one on specially formulated glossy paper Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 327 Color Matching Choosing a Method General Information NOTE These suggestions are for guidance only Your results may vary depending on the application from which you are printing Some applications override without warning any color matching settings in the printer driver There is no one way to achieve a good match between the document displayed on your monitor and its printed equivalent There are many factors involved in achieving accurate and reproducible color However the following guidelines may help in achieving good color output from your printer There are several suggested methods depending on the
200. b paper trays installed and the media assigned to them total size and percentage used of disk memory percentage of toner remaining Important If you select Automatic Status Update in the Status tab the driver automatically pings the printer for the latest status information every time you open the Properties dialog box This causes a significant delay until the Properties dialog box opens To avoid this use the Update Status button in the Status tab to manually update the information on demand Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 419 Windows NT 4 0 Operation NOTE Most applications allow the printer properties to be accessed from within the document print dialog box This section explains how to set up color printing and how to use the printer s features Printer s features covered in this section include N up printing see page 440 Custom page sizes see page 443 Selecting print resolution see page 454 Duplex printing see page 456 Printing Booklets see page 460 Watermarks see page 462 Collating see page 464 Proof and Print see page 465 Secure print printing confidential documents see page 469 Storing files to the hard disk drive see page 473 Using overlays see page 478 Printing posters see page 493 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 420 Factors that Affect Color Printing
201. b name of up to 16 characters under Job Name If required select Request Job Name for each print job JOB PIN Job Name Setting Job Name Setting Job Name Job Name C Request Job Name for each print jot Request Job Name for each print job Setting of PIN Personal ID Number cuna oer Enter 4 digits Enter 4 digits Use number 0 9 b Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK 4 Enter the number of copies If required select Collate PostScript Driver PCL Driver amp Printing Preferences PR Eat Job Optone liza Quality Job Type Layout Paper Qualty Job Options Color Overlay O Normal Quality Job Type Proof and Print F Secure Print pede Pint OsmenHoD PN 9 Secure Print Copies 15 gt Collate Q Store to HDD PIN Scale duality 10 Copies 15 V Collate ONomal O Fast C Toner saving 5 Click OK Click Print The document is stored on the printer s hard disk 6 Go to the printer Use the front panel to print the document See below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 192 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Printing at the Printer 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the
202. been downloaded to the printer Sets the PCL font number internal resident font 1000 Courier C Font stored in the printer s Flash memory S downloaded soft font stored on the printer s internal hard disk drive Only applies if the printer has a hard disk drive installed Sets the font width in characters per inch Only displays if the font is a fixed space outline font Sets the font point size Only applies only to fixed fonts Does not apply to proportional fonts Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 99 Item SYMBOL SET PCL Emulation Menu The default settings are bold Value Description PC 8 PC 8 Dan Nor Selects a PCL character symbol PC 8 TK PC 775 PC 850 set PC 852 PC 855 PC 857 TK PC 858 PC 866 PC 869 PC 1004 Pi Font Plska Mazvia PS Math PS Text Roman 8 Roman 9 Roman Ext Serbo Croat1 Serbo Croat2 Spanish Ukrainian VN Int l VN Math VN US Win 3 0 Win 3 1 Bit Win 3 1 Cyr Win 3 1 Grk Win 3 1 Heb Win 3 1 L1 Win 3 1 L2 Win 3 1 L5 Wingdings Dingbats MS Symbol OCR A OCR B HP ZIP USPSFIM USPSSTP USPSZIP Bulgarian CWI Hung DeskTop German Greek 437 Greek 437 Cy Greek 928 Hebrew NC Hebrew OC IBM 437 IBM 850 IBM 860 IBM 863 IBM 865 ISO Dutch ISO L1 ISO L2 ISO L5 ISO L6 ISO L9 ISO Swedish1 ISO Swedish2 ISO Swedish3 ISO 2 IRV ISO 4 UK ISO 6 ASC ISO 10 S F ISO 11 Swe ISO 14 JASC ISO 15 Ita IS
203. bels1 Labels2 Transp Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 413 Paper Feed Size and Media Changing Defaults PCL The normal default for these items is automatic detection NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer driver instructions are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the software under Page Setup 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Document Defaults 3 On the Setup tab under Media select the required paper size in the Size drop down list Setup Job Options Color r Media Size Source Automatically Select z Paper Feed Options Einishing Mode Standard N up x Options r 2 Sided Printing None m LI r Driver Settings Untitled Add J Remove Legal 8 5 x 14in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 414 4 Select the required paper feed under Source Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 415 NOTE If a paper tray is selected the Weight field becomes visible 5 Select the required paper type under Weight Lette
204. cate the ICC profiles for your printer Windows ICM uses the information in these profiles to convert colors in your documents to colors that the printer can reproduce The way in which this conversion is performed can be controlled via the ICM Intent control in the printer driver NOTE The Color Match Using ICC Profiles feature provides an alternative to Windows ICM It is similar to Windows ICM but offers several additional features Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 162 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet N Up Printing PostScript 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PS driver Click the Preferences button 3 On the Layout tab under Pages Per Sheet select the required number of pages 4 Click OK Click Print Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Orientation Portrait O Landscape O Rotated Landscape Print on Both Sides 9 None O Flip on Long Edge Q Flip on Short Edge Page Order Front to Back Back to Front Pages Per Sheet m m OK Cancel Apply Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 163 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet N Up Printing PCL 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver C
205. cation f you use TrueType fonts and you do not print PostScript including eps files graphics choose the PCL driver This is more efficient and give good results f you use PostScript fonts or print PostScript graphics choose the PostScript driver In this situation performance is faster and graphics are printed at their best quality NOTE The line art graphics in this manual are PostScript If you plan to print parts of this manual choose the PostScript driver Otherwise the line art graphics print at low resolution The print quality may not be satisfactory If neither driver seems to cover all your needs you should install both drivers Select the same printer port LPT1 or Network Port for both drivers during the installation Set the driver you plan to use most of the time to be your Windows default driver Most applications allow you to choose a different printer from within the print dialog so you can use the alternative driver for printing whenever you need to Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 402 Memory Enabling PostScript Only Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once If you have additional memory in your printer use these instructions to update the Windows PostS
206. cessories 566 Paper Trays Two additional paper trays can be installed When combined with the standard paper tray paper capacity increases to approximately 1590 sheets Installation 1 Turn off the printer 2 Disconnect the power cable and printer interface cable WARNING The printer weighs 106 Ibs 48 kg 2 people are required to lift the printer safely and prevent any personal injury NOTE If installing both additional paper trays Put the two additional paper trays together as one unit first Then install the printer on top of the two additional paper trays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 567 Move the printer away from its location Position the additional paper tray s where you want the printer to go Lower the printer gently on to the additional paper tray s Align the holes and connection socket on the base of the printer with the locating pegs and connector on the additional paper tray unit Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 568 7 Load paper in each tray Use the same procedure you use for loading paper in Tray 1 See Loading Paper on page 42 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 569 8 Fold the tray media size identifier sheet to expose the appropriate media size Insert it in the holder at the right end of the tray The
207. ck cccccccccsssccccesessscececeesssseeceessssseeeeesesaee 577 OKI Premium Color Transparencies eee 577 OKI Premium Envelopes ertet cran 578 Factory Default Settings eerte 579 PrmtMenu sth rette pr REIS 579 Media Menu estetico a ide ree IRR EORR deed 580 Color Men 4nd d rete erret e ott veter 581 System Configuration Menu sss 582 PCL Emulation Menu esses eene eene nennen 583 PPR Emulation Menu sss eene enne aE 584 FX Emulation Menu cccccsssscccccsssssscscccsssscccecessnececceessesaceceessenes 585 Parallel Menu ie ert e Go sags ra eee ee AER SERERE eave 586 USB Menu ome nA nate te ES 587 Network Menu 2 eet hehe ERG ein rear Jovealeededeveoats 588 Memory Menu 4e mne e ett et ertt 589 Disk Maintenance Menu cccccccccccesssscececesssceeceessseeeecesenseeeeeeeseas 590 System Adjust MOU sssrinin e e Rs 591 Maintenance Mef irises a a a E ET 592 Color Swatch Utility iassictisiscnsiicitinscenteasceasneicnsn caste aahonaihaaiansaiassansnonsisnaads 593 General Information set a r E r 593 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 14 Printing Color Swatches o tret rey 594 Creating Custom Swatch Colors eseseeeeren 596 PDF Direct Print Utility es 597 General Information itae tereti 597 Requirements for Use
208. ck OK 2 Click Next to accept the terms in the license agreement Select the language 4 Click Network Software Administration Tools Job Accounting Client and follow the on screen instructions 5 When the installation finishes the following window appears See Client Software on page 716 for more information o f Print Job Accounting Client 2 xl File Hide Mode Help r Job Accounting Mode Driver o C Tab C Popup C Hide Not supported Change Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 649 Macintosh Client Computers Normally the Oki Job Accounting software is automatically installed when you install the printer driver To activate the Job Accounting Client software 1 Select Print Desktop on the File menu 2 Ensure that your printer model is selected then click General and select Plug in Preferences 3 Open the Print Time Filters menu then check Print Time Filters JobType and JobAccounting 4 Click Save Settings then click OK 5 Click Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 650 Server Software Capabilities Use the Print Job Accounting server software to register printers and clients to set print limits to set up automatic generation of print logs to set up automatic email of log reports to the Administrator For Each Client You Can Enable disable
209. ck the Color Swatch button to print the color swatch samples Select the shade of red that best suits your needs and make a note of the RGB value below that particular shade 6 Use your program s color picker to enter the same RGB values from step 5 Change the logo to that color Qo 0 ND NOTE The RGB color displayed on your monitor may not necessarily match what was printed on the color swatch If this is the case it is probably due to the difference between how your monitor and printer reproduce color Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 152 Color Matching Color Matching Options PostScript Driver The PostScript driver offers several different methods of controlling the color output of the printer Setting Options Manually 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Color tab Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Color mode Color Control Method er Color Simulation None Color Setting Black Finish Monitor 6500K Auto X f Auto r en C Glossy m C Matte Advanced Default Appl Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 153 4 Under Color Mode use the drop down list to select one of the following Color Control Methods a OKI Color Matching This is OKI s proprietary color matching system
210. color settings in your printer driver please be aware that color reproduction is a complex topic and there are many factors to take into consideration Some of the most important factors are the differences between the range of colors a monitor can reproduce versus the range of colors that a printer can reproduce viewing conditions printer driver color settings monitor settings how your software application displays color paper type Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 323 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can reproduce Neither a printer nor a monitor is capable of reproducing the full range of colors visible to the human eye Each device is restricted to a certain range of colors In addition to this a printer cannot reproduce all of the colors displayed on a monitor and vice versa Both devices use very different technologies to represent color A monitor uses Red Green and Blue RGB phosphors or LCDs a printer uses Cyan Yellow Magenta and Black CMYK toner or ink A monitor can display very vivid colors such as intense reds and blues These cannot be easily produced on any printer using toner or ink Similarly there are certain colors some yellows for example that can be printed but cannot be displayed accurately on a monitor This disparity between monito
211. counting window 1 Open the printer tree and double click the name of the printer group for which an Account ID is to be deleted 2 On the User tab click Register The following window appears Job Account ID registration 20x List of registered IDs Add Name JobAceo Grow Fred G 122 Delete Local Print 18790481 Writers 1000 Change Sram e Group Other Printer 3 Click the Name for the Account ID to be deleted Click Delete 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion 5 Click End Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 702 Print Logs NOTE The Server computer must be running continuously or at least be running at the scheduled time s each day for the software to acquire the print job information Setting Up Changing the Log Acquisition Interval The log acquisition interval is normally set up when you register a printer see Registering Printers on page 667 To change the log acquisition interval for a particular registered printer or group 1 From the main Job Accounting window click Printer to open the printer tree then click the printer for which you wish to change the acquisition interval 2 Click Printer Properties 3 On the Options tab make any desired changes under Acquire Logs then click OK Manually Setting Up Items Reported in the Log To set up the items to be displayed in or exported f
212. cript driver so that it recognizes the additional memory 1 Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options click Memory Configuration Set the memory in the Change Memory Configuration Setting list to match what is now installed in the printer as shown in the Menu Map To print the Menu Map see Printer Settings Menu Settings on page 82 6 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box oP ON General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Device Settings E 3 Form To Tray Assignment E In Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 16772 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray No Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts No Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixels Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s i Installable Options Available Tray 1 Standard Duplex Installed Hard Disk Installed Memory Configuration SERIE v Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 403 Hard Disk Drive Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer
213. d replace the image drum cartridge If dirty wipe the image drum gently with soft tissue If this does not work replace the image drum Ifthe lines or spots occur at intervals of approximately 113 mm the fuser roller is damaged Change the fuser unit See Changing the Fuser on page 514 The image drum has Remove the image drum from the printer and store it in been exposed to light a dark place for several hours If this does not work replace the image drum Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 540 Print Quality Problems Blurred letter edges Possible cause LED is dirty Cannot print desired color because toner is low Black formation method does not match application Remedy Clean LED with lens cleaner or soft tissue See Cleaning the LED heads on page 517 Replace toner cartridge See Changing the Toner Cartridge on page 498 Open the printer driver and set black formation to CMYK See Printing Black on page 41 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 541 Print Quality Problems Faded Output Streaks Possible cause LED head is dirty Toner is low Paper is unsuitable for printer Faded Output Random Patches Possible cause The paper is moist Faded Output Print Possible cause The toner cartridge is incorrectly installed Toner is low The paper is moist Paper is unsuitable for printer Reme
214. d rear stopper for the size of paper being used Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 44 4 A lower paper tray cannot be used for printing if any tray above it is not inserted Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 45 Setting Up 5 Gently close the paper tray Loading Paper Letterhead 1 Load letterhead paper face down for both portrait and landscape Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 47 Loading Paper Envelopes 1 Load envelopes face up flap down as shown for both portrait and landscape printing Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 48 Loading Paper Paper Out Use paper from next available tray Automatic Tray Switching NOTE When a paper tray runs out of paper the printer automatically switches to the next available paper tray when more than one paper tray is installed and AUTO TRAY SWITCH is set to ON This setting is in the Print Menu Refer to Changing the Printer Settings on page 83 If one paper tray runs out of paper during a print job the printer can use paper from the next available paper source tray This feature is called Automatic Tray Switching You can also specify the orde
215. delay until the Properties dialog box opens To avoid this use the Update Status button in the Status tab to manually update the information on demand Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 138 Windows XP Operation NOTE Most applications allow the printer properties to be accessed from within the document print dialog box This section explains how to set up color printing and how to use the printer s features Printer s features covered in this section include N up printing see page 163 Custom page sizes see page 166 Selecting print resolution see page 174 Duplex printing see page 175 Printing Booklets see page 179 Watermarks see page 184 Collating see page 186 Proof and Print see page 187 Secure print printing confidential documents see page 191 Storing files to the hard disk drive see page 195 Using overlays see page 199 Printing posters see page 212 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 139 Factors that Affect Color Printing The PCL and PostScript printer drivers supplied with your printer provide several controls for changing the color output For general use the default driver settings produce good results for most documents Many applications have their own color settings and these may override the settings in the printer driver Please refer to the documentation for your software application
216. dialog box indicating a conflict If you do click OK The driver automatically corrects for the conflict Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 357 o Select the unit Enter the Width and Length measurements Click OK User Defined Size should appear in the Size box on the Setup tab Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 358 NOTE To save the setting for future use Click Paper Feed Options Click Custom Size Enter the relevant information for Width and Height Give your custom size a name under Name Click Add Click OK twice The Custom Page Size is added to the bottom of the Paper Size list 8 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box 9 Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 359 Print Resolution PCL or PostScript Changing for a Print Job NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs default settings Click Start gt Settings Printers Highlight the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Click the Job Options tab A amp oxNA Executive Se
217. dialog in the printer driver This severely slows opening Printer Properties Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Network Printer Status Utility 735 Checking the Printer Status Click the WEB SETTING button The following screen displays F http 192 168 1 19 Microsoft Internet Explorer E 18 x Ble Edt View Favores Tools Help esk o OA A Qseach ijFavoites Hristoy S fee 5 Address J htp 77192 168 1 197 7 so Links Printer Status Network Connection Printer Status Network Summary Login as Admin Update Status Print Jobs Job Log Printer Menu Network Network Summary General Settings Printer Port NetWare TCP IP EtherTalk Email Alerts SNMP Traps Admin Web lee i Internet o Click on the items listed on the left to see Network Summary Login for Administrators Job Login Printer Menu To see real time printer status click the UPDATE STATUS button Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Network Printer Status Utility 736 Oki LPR Utility General Information Oki LPR Utility allows you to print directly to a printer on the network without a print server It creates an Oki Printer Port and installs a pop up status box so you can monitor printer status Oki LPR operates in Windows Me 98 95 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems Load this program from the Menu Ins
218. dy Clean LED head with lens cleaner or soft tissue See Cleaning the LED heads on page 517 Change toner cartridge See Changing the Toner Cartridge on page 498 Use recommended paper See Paper Media Recommendations on page 74 Remedy Store paper within specified temperature and humidity levels See Paper Media Recommendations on page 74 Remedy Reinstall the toner cartridge See Changing the Toner Cartridge on page 498 Change toner cartridge Store paper within specified temperature and humidity levels See Paper Media Recommendations on page 74 Use recommended paper See Paper Media Recommendations on page 74 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 542 Print Quality Problems Shading on unprinted sections Possible cause Remedy Paper has been affected Store paper within specified temperature and humidity by static electricity levels See Paper Media Recommendations on page 74 Paper is too thick Use recommended paper See Paper Media Recommendations on page 74 Toner is low Change toner cartridge See Changing the Toner Cartridge on page 498 Toner rubs off the output Possible cause Remedy Media Weight and Media Set the value of media weight to the next heaviest Type settings may not be one appropriate See Paper Media Weight and Type on page 70 Packing materials were left Careful Fus
219. e Use the Storage Device Manager utility to convert this PRN file print file to a storable file format Download the storable file to the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 629 Overlays Requirements for Using Read This First Important 1 An overlay may consist of more than one component file 2 When the hard disk drive is installed you must use the Shutdown Menu before turning OFF the printer 3 If your software application has a collate print option you must turn it OFF before you print overlays 4 You cannot use overlays with the Windows 2000 PostScript driver Macintosh driver 5 The message DISK FULL appears if there isn t enough memory for the data Cn OUO Hardware Software Requirements e the Storage Device Manager software must be installed printer internal hard disk drive Installation is highly recom mended Required Actions Before overlays can be printed they must be created in a software application saved as a print file downloaded to storage Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 630 Overlays Requirements for Using Storage Requirements Locations Use Storage Device Manager to store the overlays to the printer s hard disk drive or flash memory Maximum Available Space Hard Disk Drive 2 MB each for PCL Macros and PostScript Forms Flash Memory
220. e 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Loading 48 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 748 diagram 55 Manual paper feed 55 Multi purpose MP tray 92 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Paper Size 92 part numbers 578 Redi Strip seal 578 security 578 Size 90 Specifications 75 Storage 75 Temperature requirements for printing 75 Window 75 Environment operating the printer 574 Epson FX fonts 86 Error log 86 Error messages 52 67 70 128 133 223 228 317 410 414 522 LCD panel 63 when printing complex data 555 ERROR PDF to PS conversion failed 599 ERROR POSTSCRIPT message 523 Error Report 98 Errors Error Log Report 86 Ethernet frame type 111 EtherTalk NETBEUI 111 Protocol 111 Executive paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Exit Path Paper Size effect of 69 Paper Type effect of 72 73 Paper Type effect of 69 Paper Weight effect of 72 73 Paper Weight effect of 69 F Face Down Paper Sizes 69 Paper Type 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 Face Up Paper Sizes 69 Paper type 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 Printing 53 Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Factory defaults Menu Settings 579 Reset Printer Menu Settings 116 Faded output 542 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 749 Files deleting from HDD 624 626
221. e ACK pulse ACK WHILE BUSY BUSY LOW to the centre of the ACK pulse Sets or disables the i Prime signal When set to Enable The printer receives data even if an alarm error occurs the online button is pressed The printer issues a BUSY signal only when the receive buffer is full when a service call occurs Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 109 Item USB SOFT RESET OFFLINE RECEIVE USB Menu The default settings are bold Value Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Description Enable Activates the USB interface Enable With Soft Reset a software string not a hardware function can be sent to the USB port to flush all USB buffers and reset all USB pipes to defaults This reset DOES NOT change the USB addressing or USB configuration When set to Enable The printer receives data even if an alarm error occurs the online button is pressed The printer issues a BUSY signal only when the receive buffer is full when a service call occurs Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 110 TCP IP NETWARE ETHERTALK NETBEUI FRAME TYPE DHCP BOOTP RARP IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY ADDRESS PRINT SETTINGS INITIALIZE Network Menu Only appears if the network card is installed The default settings are bold Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable A
222. e Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 639 Overlays Windows Me 98 95 PostScript Defining 1 2 10 Click Start Settings Printers Right click the Oki PostScript printer icon Click Properties The Oki Properties dialog box appears Click the Job Options tab Click the Overlay button Set up an Overlay Group Click New The Define Overlays dialog box appears Under Group Name enter a name for the group of overlays you are creating To select the pages that the overlay prints on Inthe Print on Pages drop down list select on which pages the overlay is to be printed or Select Custom and enter specific page numbers under Cus tom pages Under Overlay Name type in the name of the overlay file exactly as it was stored using Storage Device Manager see the File List printout including the file extension HST Overlay file names are case sensitive Click Add 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to add additional overlays maximum of three per group Click OK To create additional overlay groups up to 32 can be defined repeat steps 4 to 10 above Finish 11 Click OK and close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 640 Overlays Windows NT PostScript PostScript Click Start Settings Printers Right click the printer name Click Document Defaults
223. e all of the printer driver settings with which you would like your overlay to print Try to keep the overlay to a single sheet Don t use N up duplex finisher options etc when creating an overlay These can be added when printing the document that includes the overlay Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box Click Print Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give the file a meaningful name such as my template prn Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 201 Creating documents to use as overlays PostScript An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and can print to a file 1 2 NO oo Open your application program Open the file to be stored as an overlay Choose File then Print Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your application s Print dialog box Depending on the application you may need to select your printer model Then click Properties This should open the printer driver settings Select the Job Options tab Click the Overlays button Choose Create Form from the menu Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Click OK to print the document to a file Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give
224. e bottom of the Paper Size list T Click OK 8 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 173 Print Resolution PCL or PostScript Changing for a Print Job NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs default settings Click Start gt Settings Printers and Faxes Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Preferences button 3 Click the Job Options tab 4 Select the required printing resolution under Quality PostScript Driver PCL Driver Layout Paper Quaity Job Options Color Overlay Job Type Normal Proof and Print O Secure Print Store to HDD Copes 1 L Colate Oren O Toner saving Portrait E1180 O Landscape 180 a Watermark 7 Oves Font Advanced OK L Cancel Hep _ C Cae 5 Select Toner Saving if appropriate 6 Click OK Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 174 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript Usage Restrictions NOTE Before you can perform duplex printing unit must be installed in the printer
225. e carrier sheet or adhesive must not be exposed to any part of the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 76 Adjusting the Color Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning Important In most cases Color Tuning is not necessary The printer is optimized for color printing at its default settings Once you change these settings they remain in effect until you go back in and change them Toreturn the settings to the defaults use the steps below to set each value back to 0 zero You can use the printer s menu to adjust the color intensity for a specific color by adjusting the HIGHLIGHT MID TONE and DARK shadows Color Tuning Patterns To increase the color intensity use a higher positive setting default 0 maximum 3 To decrease the color intensity use a higher negative setting default 0 maximum 3 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 77 Adjusting the Color Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning Print the Color Tuning Pattern NOTE When using the Print Job Accounting utility you cannot print when Local Print is set to No printing or No color printing 1 2 3 4 Make sure letter size paper is loaded in the tray Press MENU until COLOR MENU displays Press ITEM either or until COLOR TUNING displays Press SELECT The Color Tuning Pattern prints Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide
226. e colors are modified 7 Set any other required parameters Use the on line Help for guidance 8 When you are done click OK Close the Default dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 432 Color Matching Color Matching Options Print Color Swatch Utility For use with applications which allow you to set your own RGB values for colors The Color Swatch utility prints out charts of sample colors Listed below each color are the corresponding RGB Red Green Blue values to use in your application to match that printed color An example of using the Print Color Swatch function You wish to print a logo in a particular shade of red The steps you would follow are 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Document Defaults 3 Click the Color tab 4 Click the Color Swatch button to print the color swatch samples 5 Select the shade of red that best suits your needs and make a note of the RGB value below that particular shade 6 Use your program s color picker to enter the same RGB values from step 5 Change the logo to that color NOTE The RGB color displayed on your monitor may not necessarily match what was printed on the color swatch If this is the case it is probably due to the difference between how your monitor and printer reproduce color Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 433
227. e document is stored on the printer s hard disk 13 Go to the printer Use the front panel to print the document See below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 378 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Printing at the Printer 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the SELECT button The document prints and is deleted from the hard disk drive NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 379 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Deleting the confidential document before printing it 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the job from the printer NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document i
228. e drum 9 Close the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 38 Toner TONER LOW or CHANGE TONER NOTE After installing the new toner cartridges the message TONER LOW or CHANGE TONER may appear on the display If this message does not disappear after a few pages have printed reinstall the appropriate toner cartridge Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 39 Toner TONER SAVE Mode Use Toner Save to maximize the life of your toner cartridges Toner Save is turned on or off through the Print Menu Turn the feature on or off 1 Press ONLINE OFFLINE displays Press MENU repeatedly until PRINT MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or repeatedly until TONER SAVE displays Press VALUE either or until the desired status displays ON Toner Save is activated turned on OFF Toner Save is deactivated turned off 6 Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected status 7 When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays a AON Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 40 Toner Printing Black Your printer prints the color black in one of two ways Composite Black True Black Composite Black The cyan magenta yellow and black toners are combined to create composite black Use composite black when printing photographs True Black Only black toner is used to print true black
229. e et rhe m Or e een 25 Weight Requirements eese rennen eere eene 25 Space Requirements au peri tae Rte RR hs 25 Parts of the Printer ss uie eee aeter eee Pei erue en 26 External Internal Back Setting Up Shipping Materials Removing eee 29 TOleE tret ee oad RERO HU RR vast ied e Hle een 34 InstallatiOn 9 deo eater cO e em eds 34 TONER LOW or CHANGE TONER ee 39 TONER SAVE Mode 2 I repe E Ies 40 Printing Black dae a tht gebeten 41 TO adi NG Paper s ro t m eet teens 42 Tray tec ed oe E tte de 42 Letterhead er het ete lees 47 Envelopes 255 n aet ette eee eet eda 48 Paper Out 4e edi tree epe ER p Pe 49 Choosing the Paper Tray Paper Feed sess 52 Printings Paths 5 21er E eie 53 Face Up Straight Through eee 53 Face DO Wiis ipd do ete er tette t o e eee rer prts 54 Manual Feed soe rea e e re e a enn 55 lu c EERE 56 Connecting the power cable sese 56 POWER SAVE MOdex iret oie 57 Turn Off the Printer iere eet terne nene Ere SE ERR EE SR cadens 59 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 3 Hard Disk Drive not installed eee 59 Hard Disk Drive installed eee 60 Interfaces oer e ee e E et id 61 Location Diagram Ree e dees sets G 61 ParalleIz eee emen teen 62 WS Be eset a edo ed
230. e hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for Store to Hard Disk to operate correctly Store to Hard Disk may not be available in some software applications Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Preferences button N Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 195 3 On the Job Options tab select Store to HDD PostScript Driver PCL Driver E Printing Preferences amp Printing Preferences Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Setup Job Options Color e Quality Job Type Quality Job Type O Nomal z O Normal Proof and Print Proof and Print O Secure Print O Secure Print Store to HDD PIN Store to HOD Copies 15 F Colete Copies 1 2 E Colete Scale NOTE If you ve already stored a document on the printer s hard disk drive and want to store another one click the PIN button and enter a new Job Name a Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name Setting If required select Request Job Name for each print job JOB PIN Job Name Setting Job Name Setting Job Name Job Name Request Job Name for e
231. e harmful if inhaled swallowed or if it gets in the eyes Toner can also stain hands and clothing See the Material Safety Data Sheets in your Warranty Regulatory and Safety Information booklet for more information 1 Remove the black toner cartridge from the package 2 Shake the toner cartridge back and forth several times Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 34 4 Remove the plastic clip from behind the colored lever 5 Insert the toner cartridge into the black image drum left side first engaging the drum locating peg in the hole in the toner cartridge Make sure the colors of the toner cartridge and image drum correspond Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 35 6 Gently push the toner cartridge down engaging the locking pin into the groove on the image drum Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 36 7 Gently push the colored lever toward the rear of the machine until it stops This releases the toner into the image drum CAUTION The lever should go back easily If the lever resists moving STOP Press down on the cartridge to be sure that it is firmly in place before proceeding Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 37 8 Repeat the process for each color toner cartridge Make sure to match the color toner to the color imag
232. e printing paper feed movement If you change the current setting to a more negative value the value decreases Color registration moves UP the page in the same direction to the printing paper feed movement The adjustment is shown as an offset value for the color registration settings measured by the printer during Auto Color Registration The printer has its own process simulation generator which simulates standard colors in the printer PostScript only Sets the thickness of the toner layer If paper curls when using DARK select MEDIUM or LIGHT This should help reduce the curling Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 95 Item CMY 100 DENSITY Color Menu The default settings are bold Value Disable enable Description Normally you won t change this setting In normal printing Color Matching controls the TRC values In turn the TRC values control the print density ENABLE 100 CMY density output relative to the Toner Reproduction Curve TRC CMY 100 Density is only used in very special instances Example Specify the color for CMYK color space in PS Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 96 Item POWER SAVE DELAY TIME PERSONALITY USB PS PROTOCOL NETWORK PS PROTOCOL CLEARABLE WARNING AUTO CONTINUE MANUAL TIMEOUT System Configuration Menu The default settings are bold VEUT 5 min 15 min 30 min 60 min
233. e the process ended Time the job processing ended Total Sheets Number of sheets of paper Tray1 Number of sheets fed from Tray1 Tray2 Number of sheets fed from Tray2 Tray3 Number of sheets fed from Tray3 Tray4 Number of sheets fed from Tray4 Tray5 Number of sheets fed from Tray5 User User Name a This item is not displayed by default To display it see Manually Setting Up Items Reported in the Log on page 703 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 715 Client Software Starting the Client Software On the client computer click Start Programs Okidata Print Job Accounting Client Change Job Accounting Mode Setting the User Name and Account ID Print Job Accounting Client 21x File Hide Mode Help Job Accounting Mode Driver C Tab C Popup C Hide Not supported Change There are four Job Account Modes Tab Mode Popup Mode Hide Mode Not supported Mode Decide which mode you wish to use Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 716 Client Software Job Account Modes Tab Mode In this mode the tab for setting the User Name and Job Account ID will be displayed under Job Account Printer Driver Property This mode should be selected when the computer is used by one person Popup Mode In this mode the dialog box for entering the User Na
234. ects and the conditions under which they were taken sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printable colors are modified 7 Set any other required parameters Use the on line Help for guidance 8 When you are done click OK Close the Printing Preferences dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 246 Color Matching Color Matching Options Print Color Swatch Utility For use with applications which allow you to set your own RGB values for colors The Color Swatch utility prints out charts of sample colors Listed below each color are the corresponding RGB Red Green Blue values to use in your application to match that printed color An example of using the Print Color Swatch function You wish to print a logo in a particular shade of red The steps you would follow are 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences Click the Color tab Click the Color Swatch button to print the color swatch samples Select the shade of red that best suits your needs Make a note of the RGB value below that particular shade 6 Use your program s color picker to enter the same RGB values from step 5 Change the logo to that color a AON NOTE The RGB color displayed
235. ecutive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 330 Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Specific Colors Example Company logo RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 339 and the sRGB setting PCL or PS driver PostScript Color Matching using the Absolute Colorimetric option see page 341 Use the Color Swatch Utility to print out a chart of RGB swatches and enter your desired RGB values in your application s color picker PS only see page 336 RGB or CMYK f you are printing from a graphics application such as Adobe Photoshop you may be able to use Soft Proofing to simulate the printed image on your monitor To do this you can use the ICC profiles provided see Windows ICM Color Matching on page 346 Print using the ICC profiles as the Print Space or Output space PS only Alternatively use PostScript Color Matching with the Absolute Colorimetric Setting see page 341 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 331 Color Matching Choosing a Method Printing Vivid Colors RGB only Use Oki Color Matching see page 339 with the Monitor 6500k Vivid sRGB or Digital Camera settings PCL or PS RGB or CMYK Use PostScript Color Matching see page 341 with the Saturation option Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 332 Color Matching Color Matching Options PCL Driver T
236. ed Memory fem x Memory Cancel Apply Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 315 Duplex Unit Enabling PostScript or PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Options tab 4 Select Duplex Option Unit A checkmark appears in the box 5 Click OK PostScript Driver PCL Driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 316 Paper Feed Size and Media Changing Defaults PostScript or PCL The normal default for these items is automatic detection NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer driver instructions are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the software under Page Setup 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Setup tab PostScript Driver PCL Driver
237. ed as part of Settings Log or Total display see page 703 for more information 5 Refresh Display Refresh the display a Beforerunning select the subject item from the Log Tree on the left side of the window If you select Log all items will be subject to displaying exporting If you select one printer only that printer will be subject to displaying b Select Log Menu Refresh Display to update the information on the log pane after having run this menu Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 660 Server Software Pull Down Menus Option Menu Setup Set up mail server email address for Sender email address for Administrator where you wish to store logs closing date for logs select the day of the month which determines when logs are considered previous month logs as opposed to current month logs Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 661 Server Software Pull Down Menus Help Menu Server ID Display Server ID Help Display the Help Topics window with tabs Contents Index Find Version Info Display version information Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 662 Setting Up Automatic Email To set up monthly automatic email of selected print log data to the administrator open the Job Accounting software then 1 Click Option
238. ed is highlighted in the lower window of the Storage Device Manager 8 Select the Project menu Choose Send Project Files to Printer This downloads the file to the printer If the file was downloaded successfully Command Issued displays 9 Close the Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 485 Overlays Defining Overlays PostScript 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Document Defaults 3 On the Job Options tab click the Overlay button Setting of Overlay Disable Overlay Ei Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 486 4 Click the New button Define Overlays 5 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay Select the pages where you want the overlay to print NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the name under which the file is stored on the printers hard disk drive It is case sensitive Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 487 6 Under Form setting in the drop down list enter or select a form name Click Add Overlay Name poo i i lt C 72 3R Print on Pages Fite m Custom Pages oo Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12
239. ee page 145 professional desktop publishing and graphics CMYK see page 145 photographic images see page 146 specific colors i e a company logo see page 147 printing vivid colors see page 148 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 144 Color Matching Choosing a Method RGB or CMYK The guidelines for choosing a color matching method make distinctions between Red Green Blue RGB and Cyan Magenta Yellow Black CMYK Generally most documents you print are in RGB format This is the most common and if you do not know your document s color mode assume that it is RGB Typically CMYK documents are only supported in professional Desktop Publishing and Graphics applications Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 145 Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Photographs RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 155 is a generally a good choice Select a matching method appropriate to your monitor RGB or CMYK If you are printing photographic images from a graphics application such as Adobe Photoshop you may be able to use Soft Proofing to simulate the printed image on your monitor To do this you can use the ICC Profiles provided see Windows ICM Color Matching on page 162 Print using the ICC profiles as the Print Space or Output space Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 146
240. eee pet tenentis 597 USNS ter RR PTOREGPU EO R R da 598 Storage Device Manager essere eenre nennen te trnnnnnnantnt 600 LOR WIDOWS 4er er epe i ed tet e eet 600 General Information i 2 004 e Ree eer reser d 600 Summary of Functions si seie rin eneen A eene 601 Installation ene eee a aes 602 Getting Help 4 3 At deee e onis E a A edits 603 Network Administrator Functions 604 Notes and Ca tions cepe tere oe e 605 Using o tem eddie itat 606 Opening the Program 12 22 cial linn et etes 606 Setting Up an Administrative Password sees 607 FORMS ios ess So et eee i E Ad ean E ee ee a 608 POStSCEHDpU iae eee et AE E EO REIR 608 Step T Create the Form ae ei eerte eee 609 Step 2 Create a New Project 610 Step 3a Add Files to the Project sse 611 Step 3b Delete Files from the Project ssseeees 611 Step 4 Store the Elles enne te eee e enn 612 Step 5 Save the Project and Download it to the Printer 613 Step 6 Test Print the Form essere 614 PCL aki ene eee tears e pede dide ens 615 Step 1 Create the Forms in Your Software Application 616 Step 2 Create a New Project isnon oiie a a aie 616 Step 3 Convert the Files to Binary bin Format 617 Step 4a Add Files to the Project see 619 Step 4b Delete Files from the Project see 619
241. efer to the following table Feed Exit Paper Media Size Tray MP Tray Rear Top 1 Manual Face up Face down Straight Through A4 S D S D s S D S D AS SDA Spe SS S D S D A6 sa b sa sa b B5 S DARS Da SP S D S D Letter S D SD S S D S D Legal Gp oD ao S D S Dp 13in 330 2mm Legal SD SD sg S De S Da 14in 355 6mm Executive S D S D sa S p S p Envelopes b b sa sa b Custom b b S S D a S Simplex print on one side of the paper D Duplex printing on both sides of the paper b Not Usable c Width 3 to 8 5 inches 76 2 to 215 9 mm Height 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 6 mm Must be defined in the printer driver before printing Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 69 Paper Media Weight and Type Selecting CAUTION If type and weight are not correctly set print quality deteriorates the fuser roller may be damaged NOTE 1 If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays 2 The following printer settings are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the application page setup Menu tem Value Select Ready O O O Attention Cancel EXE 0 290 Your printer automatically detects paper type and weight To override these settings 1 Press ONLINE OFFL
242. elete the remaining copies of the document 5 The deletion confirmation message appears Press the SELECT button to delete the remaining copies NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 286 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents PCL or PostScript Using Secure Printing Secure printing printing with passwords allows you to print confidential documents on printers that are shared with other users in a network environment NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for secure printing to operate correctly Secure printing may not be available in some software applications 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Job Options tab 3 Under Job Type select Secure Print NOTE If you ve already used Secure Print to place a document on the hard disk drive but have not yet prin
243. en the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 514 3 Move the two locking levers 1 to the rear of the machine to release the fuser unit 4 Use the handle 2 to remove the fuser unit from the printer 5 Remove the new fuser unit from its packaging Lift off the shipping tape at either end As you remove the tape the levers at either end of the fuser should move into the locked position Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 515 6 Using the handle 2 install the new fuser unit into the printer Make sure the two spring loaded locking levers 1 lock the fuser unit into place Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 516 Cleaning the LED heads CAUTION Do not use methyl alcohol or other solvents on the LED heads These solvents damage the lens surface Clean the LED heads when printing does not come out clearly has white lines or when text is blurred 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 517 3 Gently wipe the LED head surface with LED lens cleaner or soft tissue Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 518 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 519 Moving Shipping the Printer WARNING This printer weighs 106 Ibs 48 kg Two people are required to lift the printer sa
244. enu 111 default settings 588 Network Printer Status Utility 733 Windows 2000 233 Windows Me 98 95 321 Windows NT 419 Windows XP 138 Network Utilities 24 No Color Matching Windows 2000 249 Windows Me 98 95 338 Windows NT 435 Windows XP 154 Noises 551 Norwegian display language 98 Numbers for identifying paper trays 570 Zero 0 character FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 104 N up printing Windows 2000 PCL 259 PS 258 Windows Me 98 95 PCL 349 PS 347 Windows NT PCL 441 PS 440 Windows XP PCL 164 PS 163 O Letter style FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 104 Office applications vs graphics applications Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Office graphics Windows 2000 246 Windows Me 98 95 335 Windows NT 432 Windows XP 151 Office printing Monitor settings Windows 2000 251 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 760 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 OFFLINE message 524 Offline receive Parallel 109 USB 110 OKI Bright White Proofing Paper part numbers 577 OKI Color Matching Windows 2000 249 PS 250 Windows Me 98 95 338 PS 339 Windows NT 435 PS 436 Windows XP 154 PS 155 OKI LPR Utility 737 OKI Premium Card Stock part numbers 577 OKI Premium Color Transparencies part numbers 577 OKI Premium Envelopes part numbers 578 OKI print media 577 OKI SynFlex part numbers 577 On Off switch 56 59 ONLINE printer does not go online 551 ONLINE but
245. er the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer settings are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the application page setup Ready Menu ltem Value Select Attention O E i Online Cancel Press ONLINE OFFLINE displays Press MENU repeatedly until PRINT MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until PAPER FEED displays Press VALUE either or until the required paper feed displays Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected paper feed 7 When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays oahwhnd Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 52 Printing Paths Face Up Straight Through CAUTION Don t open or close the rear paper exit while printing as it may result in a paper jam Always use the face up rear stacker straight through exit path for thick paper card stock etc For face up printing straight through path make sure the straight through paper exit is open and the paper support is extended The paper exits from the side of the printer Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 53 Printing Paths Face Down CAUTION Don t open or close the rear paper exit while print
246. er Setting Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 445 b Click Paper Size c In the Change Paper Size Setting list select Postscript Custom Page Size Document Settings Document Options Paper Output PSr Paper Source lt Multi Purpose Tray gt A Input Slot Option fi Media Type Printer Setting Layout Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 446 4 Click the Edit of Custom Paper button PostScript Custom Page Size Definition Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 447 5 Enter the Width and Height for the custom paper Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm 6 Select the Paper Feed Direction NOTE Long Edge First media feeds in long edge first Short Edge First media feeds in short edge first Long Edge First flipped Reserved for future use Short Edge First flipped Reserved for future use 7 Click OK twice 8 Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 448 Custom Page Sizes PCL NOTE Up to 32 custom page sizes can be defined in the PCL driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the drive
247. er layer thickness 95 TONER LOW does not disappear 39 printer stops printing 98 Toner Reproduction Curve TRC 93 Toner Save mode 40 Print Menu setting 90 TONER LOW message 39 522 message does not clear 498 Toner Save 40 174 270 361 455 TONER SENSOR ERROR message 522 Top of Form position FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Transfer belt Life 118 life expectancy 508 part numbers 576 replacing 508 Transparencies 91 92 auto detection 90 Duplexing 73 Exit path Stacker Face up Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Paper Exit 73 Paper Feed 73 Paper Weight 73 part numbers 577 Print Menu setting 90 Tray 0 is the MP Tray 522 Tray 1 Paper Sizes 69 Paper Types 72 73 Paper Weights 72 73 Tray 2 Paper Sizes 69 Paper Types 72 73 Paper Weights 72 73 Tray 3 Paper Sizes 69 Paper Types 72 73 Paper Weight 72 73 TRC Toner Reproduction Curve compensation 96 See Toner Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 780 Troubleshooting 551 Error Log Report 86 Fuser Roller damaged 70 Hexadecimal dump 115 Labels 76 website 74 76 True Black 41 101 True Type Fonts Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Turkish display language 98 U Ultra Heavy Paper Weight 72 73 91 printer menu setting 74 Unpacking 23 UNSUITABLE SIZE message 525 US Bond Metric paper Duplexing 7
248. er may be HOT on the fuser when it was Open the top cover and check to be sure that all the installed packing materials were removed from the fuser To remove the fuser see Changing the Fuser on page 514 Output is garbled or incorrect Possible cause Remedy Possible mismatch on Change parallel transmission mode parallel connection See Parallel Interface Problems on page 544 between computer and printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 543 Parallel Interface Problems Parallel Transmisssion Mode The parallel port supports IEEE 1284 and ECP mode If your computer s parallel port is not compatible with one of these modes the printer may not print at all or it may print corrupted data To correct for this enter the printer s Parallel Menu and change the ECP setting to Disable khOD Menu Item Value _ Select O Ready Attention ji Fonine Cancel O Press MENU until PARALLEL MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until ECP displays Press VALUE either or until DISABLE displays Press SELECT An asterisk appears to the right of the selected setting Press ONLINE The printer goes online ONLINE displays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 544 Parallel Interface Problems Cannot configure for parallel connection Windows only Possible cause Remedy The computer does There
249. er the personal ID number you selected above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the remaining copies of the document 5 When the deletion confirmation message appears confirm by pressing the SELECT button NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 385 Overlays What are Overlays An overlay can be a combination of graphics fonts or text that is stored in the printer s flash memory or on the hard disk optional and printed whenever required The result is similar to the Watermark feature but with the ability to be much more elaborate Overlays can be useful for tasks such as printing letterheads forms or invoices and should reduce the need for pre printed stationery Example of Using Overlays Suppose that you used the Storage Device Manager to create and store three files in the printer the company logo the company address the company mission statement The Overlay feature allows these files to be incorporated into your document in various combinations depending on your requirements Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 386 Creating Overlays 1 Create t
250. eration 156 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer It affects both RGB and CMYK data From the Rendering Intent drop down list select the rendering type Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Color mode Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching d Rm 3 Rendering Intent Advanced Default mre Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 157 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching Rendering Intents When a document is printed a conversion takes place from the document s color space to the printer color space The rendering intents are essentially a set of rules that determine how this color conversion takes place The printer driver provides the rendering intents listed below Auto Best choice for printing general documents Perceptual Best choice for printing photographs Compresses the source gamut into the printer s gamut while maintaining the overall appearance of an image This option attempts to simulate RGB color Saturation Best choice for printing bright and saturated colors if you don t necessarily care how accurate the colors are This makes it the recommended choice for graphs charts diagrams etc Maps fully saturated colors in the source gamut to fully saturated colors in the printer s
251. eration 239 Color Matching Choosing a Method RGB or CMYK The guidelines for choosing a color matching method make distinctions between Red Green Blue RGB and Cyan Magenta Yellow Black CMYK Generally most documents you print are in RGB format This is the most common format If you do not know your document s color mode assume that it is RGB Typically CMYK documents are only supported in professional Desktop Publishing and Graphics applications Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 240 Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Photographs RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 250 is a generally a good choice Select a matching method appropriate to your monitor RGB or CMYK If you are printing photographic images from a graphics application such as Adobe Photoshop you may be able to use Soft Proofing to simulate the printed image on your monitor To do this you can use the ICC Profiles provided see Windows ICM Color Matching on page 257 Print using the ICC profiles as the Print Space or Output space Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 241 Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Specific Colors Example Company logo RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 250 and the sRGB setting PCL or PS driver PostScript Color Matching using the Absolute Colorimetric option see page 252 Use the Co
252. eries 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 455 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript Usage Restrictions NOTE Before you can perform duplex printing unit must be installed in the printer and enabled in the driver e Standard paper sizes only Paper weight range 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper must be loaded print side up Only Tray 1 optional Trays 2 and 3 and the High Capacity Feeder trays can be used for duplex printing The Multi Purpose MP tray cannot be used for duplex printing Duplexing cannot be used if Paper Weight is set to Ultra Heavy See Paper Media Weight and Type on page 70 NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs Click Start gt Settings Printers Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 456 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript Using 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PS driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Advanced tab under Document Options Layout click 2 Sided Printing 4 In the Change 2 Sided Printing Setting list select Long Edge
253. erlay to a single sheet Don t use N up duplex finisher options etc when creating an overlay These can be added when printing the document that includes the overlay Click OK to Close the Default dialog box Print the document Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give the file a meaningful name such as my template prn Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 482 Overlays Creating documents to use as overlays PostScript An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and print to a file Open your application program Open the file to be stored as an overlay Choose File then Print Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your application s Print dialog box Depending on the application you may need to select your printer model Click Properties This should open the printer driver settings Select the Job Options tab Click the Overlays button Choose Create Form from the menu Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Click OK to print the document to a file O COON o oa kh ON _ Important You must use the Oki PostScript driver to do this Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give the fi
254. erver ID for future use You can also find it by clicking Help Server ID from the main Job Accounting Window Print Job Accounting X Server ID is 11487 This ID will be required if a printer is added to Print Job Accounting on another PC before being deleted from this PC Please take a note of the ID Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 655 The following window appears Print Job Accounting e Printer E Log Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 656 Server Software Pull Down Menus There are five Server Software Pull Down Menus File Menu Printer Menu Log Menu Option Menu Help Menu File Printer Log Option Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 657 Server Software Pull Down Menus File Menu Exit Close the application Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 658 Server Software Pull Down Menus Printer Menu Add a Printer Register a new printer Manages multiple Set up multiple registered printers as a group printers as a group Delete a Printer Delete a registered printer or group of printers Printer Group Change a Printer Add or delete registered printers from a group Group Start End Log Start end the process of acquiring information for logs from the printe
255. es the printer is not shown during printing Wait for a while and try again If it is still not shown specify that printer s IP address in the Specify the printer for which logs will be acquired window before clicking Next The content of Log Pane right side of window is not updated Click Log Refresh Display The following message was displayed Cannot connect to the printer Wait for a while and try again Check that the printer is not offline This message is sometimes displayed during printing Try again later The following message displays when select Printer Delete a Printer Cannot delete while log is being acquired With the printer selected in the Printer Tree click Printer Start End Log to cancel the process by which print logs are acquired from the printer Then click Printer gt Delete a Printer Printer Group The following message displays when select Printer Acquire a Log This processing cannot do between acquisition of a Log A print log is already being acquired from the printer at this time Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 726 Known Problems Solutions 1 2 When using Duplex printing with the PostScript driver if the reverse side is blank it is not counted as a page Installer installs a file for the currency unit according to the system s standard Regional Setting If the correct file is no
256. est colors sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color This option attempts to simulate RGB color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printable colors are modified Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 437 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer It affects both RGB and CMYK data From the Rendering Intent drop down list select the rendering type PostScript Color Matching alan Simulation Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 438 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching Rendering Intents When a document is printed a conversion takes place from the document s color space to the printer color space The rendering intents are essentially a set of rules that determine how this color conversion takes place The printer driver provides the rendering intents listed below Auto Best choice for printing general documents Perceptual Best choice for printing photographs Compresses the source gamut into the printer s gamut while maintaining the overall appearance of an image This option attempts to simulate RGB color Saturation Best choice for printing bright and saturated colors if y
257. et e RU ERRS 179 uou E S S 179 POI eate Iu ERR Ee dicet 182 Printing Watermarks 25 3 exer ep bees 184 PEL OHY x eerte d t e em ie test tete s 184 Collating 3 eL OO tet HE ad oi 186 BCE or POSSCHIpU accetto rt qe ipee 186 Proof and Print tede ea pie am pet 187 PCE or POStSGEIDU oder eee epe epp en end 187 Secure Printng c uae eode eene 191 Printing Confidential Documents eene 191 PCL or PostScript isis ug nette edere te en M 191 Hard Disk Drive or t ott pd erg 195 PCL or PostScript iet eee es 195 Overlays cosciente 199 What are Overlays 5 denen Adee toe 199 Example of Using Overlays seeseeeeeeeeee 199 Creating Overlays eon ene Rod a eee tnt 200 Creating documents to use as overlays see 201 Downloading the print file to use as an overlay 203 Defining Overlays norm ret teat ies 205 Printing Postetsz t os te On dM 212 PCIZOnly err eO t E E 212 Windows 2000 cnciccsnsnssnsessseriedecisssnnsesnviscertedetisnsnstecastecenacdssesdedtecaccutentesees 214 Printer Drivers RD eR REB HR t e e rds 214 Which Printer Driver to Use sesssseeeeeeeeeen e 215 Memory En bli g uo ed e Re eed ins 216 PostScript Only ied eoo deter tH re ea eden 216 Hard Disk Drive Enabling esee 217 PostScript eh C GE REI RR 217 PCE get nte etaient ivi dee 218 Paper Trays Enabling eindeutige
258. ew toner cartridge into the image drum left side first engaging the drum locating peg in the hole in the toner cartridge Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 502 10 Gently push the toner cartridge down engaging the locking pin into the groove on the image drum I LS isan 11 Gently push the colored lever forward until it stops This releases the toner into the image drum Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 503 12 Gently wipe the LED head surface with LED lens cleaner or a soft tissue CAUTION Do not use methyl alcohol or other solvents on the LED head These solvents damage the lens surface 13 Close the top cover After installing the new toner cartridge the message on the display TONER LOW or CHANGE TONER should disappear However this sometimes does not disappear until printing has been carried out If it still does not disappear reinstall the toner cartridge Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 504 Changing the Image Drum When the image drum reaches the end of its product life CHANGE DRUM is displayed in the control panel is the color name If printing continues without replacing the image drum CHANGE IMAGE DRUM is displayed and printing is cancelled Change the toner cartridge and clean the LED head atthe same time as changing the image drum Image d
259. example that can be printed but cannot be displayed accurately on a monitor This disparity between monitors and printers is often the main reason that printed colors do not match the colors displayed on screen Viewing Conditions A document can look very different under various lighting conditions For example the colors may look different when viewed standing next to a sunlit window compared to how they look under standard office fluorescent lighting Printer Driver Color Settings The driver settings for Manual color can change the appearance of a document There are several options available to help match the printed colors with those displayed on screen These options are explained in subsequent sections of this User Manual Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 141 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Settings The brightness and contrast controls on your monitor can change how your document looks on screen Additionally your monitor color temperature influences how warm or cool the colors look NOTE Several of the Color Matching options make reference to your monitor s Color Temperature Many monitors allow you to adjust the color temperature through their control panels There are several settings found on a typical monitor 5000k Warmest yellowish lighting typically used in graphics arts environments 6500k Cooler approximates daylight conditions
260. exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 319 8 Make any other selections 9 Click OK 10 Click OK to close the printer dialog box PostScript Driver PCL Driver Paper feed options x Pann sente Emse at o ce He Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 320 Network Printer Status Utility Available on TCP IP network connection only The Network Printer Status utility is available if your administrator has installed it If the utility is installed the printer driver Properties dialog box changes e a new Status tab is added an Option button is added to the Device Option tab This utility allows you to view but not change the status of the following on the Status tab paper trays installed and the media assigned to them total size and percentage used of disk memory percentage of toner remaining Important If you select Automatic Status Update in the Status tab the driver automatically pings the printer for the latest status information every time you open the Properties dialog box This causes a significant delay until the Properties dialog box opens To avoid this use the Update Status button in the Status tab to manually update
261. fely This printer is a precision machine Moving the printer without the protective packaging may damage the printer To prepare the printer for moving Turn off the printer Disconnect the power cable from the printer Disconnect the printer interface cable from the printer Remove any paper from the paper trays Open the top cover Remove the four image drums a kh ON Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Moving Shipping the Printer 520 6 Seal the aperture on each image drum and its toner cartridge with plastic adhesive tape 1 This prevents any toner from spilling during moving 7 Place the four image drums complete with their toner cartridges back into the printer 8 Use the original packaging materials that came with your printer Place the printer inside its box and seal the box WARNING This printer weighs 106 Ibs 48 kg Two people are required to lift the printer safely Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Moving Shipping the Printer 521 Troubleshooting Messages on Control Front Panel Display The control front panel has a liquid crystal display LCD The display indicates the printer status and if there is a problem with the printer The messages status and error are listed below together with an explanation of what each message means List of Messages The messages are listed in alphabetical order 10 11
262. for both drivers during the installation Set the driver you plan to use most of the time to be your Windows default driver Most applications allow you to choose a different printer from within the print dialog so you can use the alternative driver for printing whenever you need to Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 215 Memory Enabling PostScript Only Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once If you have additional memory in your printer use these instructions to update the Windows PostScript driver so that it recognizes the additional memory 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Device Settings tab 4 Under Installable Options click Memory Configuration then set the memory in the drop down list to be the same as that now installed in the printer as shown in the Menu Map To print the Menu Map see Printer Settings Menu Settings on page 82 5 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box 2x General Sharing Ports l Advanced l Color Management Security Device Settings d Device Settings m Form To Tray Assignment ie ae Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 4884 KB Output Prot
263. for details on how that particular program s color management functions If you wish to manually adjust the color settings in your printer driver please be aware that color reproduction is a complex topic and there are many factors to take into consideration Some of the most important factors are the differences between the range of colors a monitor can reproduce versus the range of colors that a printer can reproduce viewing conditions printer driver color settings monitor settings how your software application displays color paper type Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 140 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can reproduce Neither a printer nor a monitor is capable of reproducing the full range of colors visible to the human eye Each device is restricted to a certain range of colors In addition to this a printer cannot reproduce all of the colors displayed on a monitor and vice versa Both devices use very different technologies to represent color A monitor uses Red Green and Blue RGB phosphors or LCDs a printer uses Cyan Yellow Magenta and Black CMYK toner or ink A monitor can display very vivid colors such as intense reds and blues These cannot be easily produced on any printer using toner or ink Similarly there are certain colors some yellows for
264. g PCL or PS Windows 2000 257 Windows Me 98 95 346 Windows XP 162 Rough Paper Media Type 91 Rough paper Paper Media Type 91 S Sample Color Swatches 594 Saturation adjustment for color 596 Saving Toner 90 Second page Duplex printing 114 Secure print deleting a job from the front control panel Windows 2000 291 Windows Me 98 95 380 Windows NT 472 Windows XP 194 install the optional hard disk drive 562 printing at the printer Windows 2000 290 Windows Me 98 95 379 Windows NT 471 Windows XP 193 Using Windows 2000 287 Windows Me 98 95 377 Windows NT 469 Windows XP 191 Security envelopes 578 SELECT button 65 Self sealing envelopes 75 Service ID Check Pattern 87 Image drum test 87 SERVICE CALL message 525 SERVICE CALL 034 message 560 Settings Menu 82 Printer 82 Shading 543 Shipping the printer 29 520 packing materials 29 521 LED head restraint 30 sealing the toner 521 Short edge duplex double sided printing Print Menu setting 89 Shutdown Shutdown Menu 88 Shutdown sequence Data lost when printer turned off 88 SHUTDOWN message 525 Simplex Single sided printing 69 72 73 Single sided Simplex printing 69 72 73 Size of Flash memory 112 of Font Cache 112 of Receive Buffer 112 SIZE MISMATCH message 525 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 777 Skew paper 538 Slow printing 553 and Print Resolution 553 Windows 2000 233 Windows Me 98 95 321 Windows NT 419 Windows XP
265. g the Printer Settings on page 83 When using the Multi Purpose MP tray manual feed the paper size has to be selected If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer settings are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the application page setup Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 67 Paper Media Size Selecting aoa h whNnd o N Menu Item Value _ Select Press ONLINE OFFLINE displays Press MENU until PRINT MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or repeatedly until EDIT SIZE displays Press VALUE either or until the required paper size displays Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected paper size When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays Before printing the file select the correct paper settings in the printer driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 68 Paper Media Size Paper Feed Exit Path and Duplex Options The size weight and type of the paper print media determine which paper feed tray can be used which paper exit path can be used whether you can use double sided duplex printing Single sided printing is also known as simplex printing Please r
266. gamut Relative Colorimetric Good for proofing CMYK color images on a desktop printer Much like Absolute Colorimetric except that it scales the source white to the usually paper white Unlike Absolute Colorimetric Relative Colorimetric attempts to take the paper white into account Absolute Colorimetric Best for printing solid colors and tints such as Company logos Matches colors common to both devices exactly Clips the out of gamut colors to their nearest printed equivalent Tries to print white as it appears on screen The white of a monitor is often very different from paper white so this may result in color casts especially in the lighter areas of an image Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 158 Color Matching Color Control Method Using ICC Profiles PostScript Only Affects RGB data only This provides a method of matching RGB colors similar to Windows ICM matching The main advantage it has over Windows ICM color matching is that it provides a method of printing using both input and output profiles Windows ICM matching only allows output profiles to be chosen Input Profiles e g a digital camera provide information about the color in the original device that was used to capture or display the image data For example an input device could be a scanner digital camera or monitor Output Profiles e g the printer provide information about the device to which
267. he Color Matching Options in the PCL driver can be used to help match your printed colors to the ones displayed on your monitor NOTE The PCL driver s color options are only designed to work with RGB data If you are printing CMYK data we recommend you use the PostScript driver Manually set the options in the PCL driver 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the appropriate printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Color tab General Details Color Management Setup Job Options Color Device Option Color Mode C Manual Color C Monochrome Color Swatch Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 333 4 Under Color Mode click Manual Color 5 Under Color Setting click Natural Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 334 6 Select the method you wish to use Monitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics Monitor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For s
268. he PRINT JOBS MENU and press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you selected above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the remaining copies of the document 5 When the deletion confirmation message appears confirm by pressing the SELECT button NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 477 Overlays What are Overlays An overlay is a combination of graphics fonts or text that is stored and printed whenever required An overlay is stored in the printer s flash memory or on the hard disk optional An overlay is similar to a watermark However an overlay can be much more elaborate than a watermark Overlays can replace as pre printed stationery add your logo or company address to a document create forms When to Use Overlays Use overlays to print letterheads forms or invoices Using overlays can reduce the need for pre printed stationery Example of Using Overlays Use the Storage Device Manager to create and store three files in the printer the company logo the company address the company mission statement Use the Overlay feature
269. he document that you wish to use for Overlay printing e g a letterhead 2 Use the printer driver to generate a PRN file print file 3 Use the Storage Device Manager utility to convert this PRN file print file to a storable file format 4 Download the storable file to the printer Once someone has set up all the necessary overlay files on the printer other users only have to switch on the required settings in the printer driver to use the overlays NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for overlay to operate correctly An overlay may consist of more than one component file Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 387 Creating documents to use as overlays PCL An overlay can be created in any software application that can handle logos letterheads forms etc and can print to a file To create a print PRN file 1 2 Open your application program Open the file to be stored as an overlay Choose File then Print Make sure that the Print To File option is switched on in your application s Print dialog box Depending on the application you may need to select your printer
270. he document to a file Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give the file a meaningful name such as my template prn Important You must use the Oki PostScript driver to do this Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 389 Downloading the print file to use as an overlay In the previous topic you created a print PRN file on your PC s hard disk This topic explains how to use the Storage Device Manager to download this file to the printer The Storage Device Manager software is included with the original software CDs that were supplied with your printer 1 Launch Storage Device Manager Allow the program to discover locate the printer 2 Click Project then New Project 3 From the Project menu select Add File to Project 4 Select the PRN file s that you created earlier PCL This automatically generates a BIN file PostScript This automatically generates a PostScript hst file Important The BIN file is automatically assigned an ID number To change the ID number double click the number enter a new one in the ID field 5 Note the name that the file is assigned in the Storage Device Manager Names are case sensitive NOTE The assigned file name is very important You mustuse this ID number or name when creating overlays in the printer driver You should change the ID number o
271. he face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 232 Network Printer Status Utility Available on TCP IP network connection only The Network Printer Status utility is available if your administrator has installed it If the utility is installed the printer driver Properties dialog box changes anew Status tab is added an Option button is added to the Device Option tab This utility allows you to view but not change the status of the following on the Status tab paper trays installed and the media assigned to them e total size and percentage used of disk memory percentage of toner remaining Important If you select Automatic Status Update in the Status tab the driver automatically pings the printer for the latest status information every time you open the Properties dialog box This causes a significant delay until the Properties dialog box opens To avoid this use the Update Status button in the Status tab to manually update the information on demand Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 233 Windows 2000 Operation NOTE Most applications allow the pri
272. he first toner cartridge installed in a new image drum needs to be replaced after less than this amount because the toner cartridge has to fill a new image drum WARNING Take extreme care when handling toner Toner can be harmful if inhaled swallowed or if it gets in the eyes Toner can also stain hands and clothing See the Material Safety Data Sheets in your Warranty Regulatory and Safety Information booklet for more information Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 498 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 499 3 Check the color label of the toner cartridge to be changed 4 Locate the colored lever 1 on the right side of the toner cartridge Move it as shown by the arrow as far as it will go 5 Lift the lever end of the cartridge This disengages the locating peg on the image drum from the toner cartridge 6 Remove the toner cartridge 2 CAUTION Dispose of the toner cartridge in accordance with local legislation Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 500 7 Unpack the new toner cartridge and remove the orange shipping clip 8 Shake the new toner cartridge back and forth several times Then holding the toner cartridge horizontally remove the tape Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 501 9 Insert the n
273. he ones displayed on your monitor NOTE The PCL driver s color options are only designed to work with RGB data If you are printing CMYK data we recommend you use the PostScript driver Manually set the options in the PCL driver 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the appropriate printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Color tab Setup Job Options Col Colo Mode Auto Cole C Manual Color C Monochrome Color Swatch Defaukt Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 149 4 Under Color Mode click Manual Color 5 Under Color Setting click Natural Setup Job Options Color g L Color Mode C Auto Color Manual Color Manual Adjustment Lightness o QO aj Saturation E ml 213 BE Monochrome Color Setting C Auto Natural Monitor 6500K Perceptual l Black Finish C Unadjusted Auto C Gloss C Malte Color Swatch Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 150 6 Select the method you wish to use Monitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics Mon
274. he software application being used has a collate print option it must be turned OFF for proof and print to operate correctly Proof and print may not be available in some software applications Open the file in your application Select File gt Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Select Print to File Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Enter the number of copies If required select Collate ah OND PostScript Driver PCL Driver Advanced Job Options Color Setup Job Options Color C Secure Print Store to HDD PIN Copies 5 24 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 465 a On the Job Options tab under Job Type select Proof and Print b Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name Setting If required select Request Job Name for each print job PostScript Driver PCL Driver JOB PIN 2 x Job PIN x Job Name Setting Job Name Settings Job Name Job Name I fest Request Job Name for each print job Iv Request Job Name for each print job zoe Ihres Personal ID Number PIN ers umber a o Enter 4 digits 15 4 oe 03 EC TN c Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK 6 Click OK Print the document The document is stored on the hard disk drive One copy is printed for checking 7 After checking the proof print or delete if
275. herTalk Email Alerts SNMP Traps Admin Web Copyright 2002 OKIDATA Div of Oki Data Americas Inc E L Om GQNMU UN 00 1 NE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 724 The System Administrator can make changes in the menu settings directly through the web page For example 1 Click Print and Media 2 Make any changes desired 3 Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and click Submit Changes Z http 192 168 0 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer olx Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help e 0 1 A Links 4 Best of the Web Back Forward Stop Refresh Home 3 BeN E Address hetp 192 168 0 1 z er Line Per Page 60 Edit Size CASSETTESIZE zl Media Menu Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Media Weight MP Tray TABLOIDEXTRA PLAIN sj AUTO Tray 1 LETTERLONGEDGE PLAIN auro J Tray 2 TABLOID PLAIN zl auro zl Custom Paper Size System and PCL Parallel and USB Memory S n PS Unit of Measure INCH E System Adjus i Finisher Menu X Dimension 8 5 Y Dimension 1 1 Submit Changes Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 725 Troubleshooting Q A The printer selected is not shown in the list when click Printer D Add a printer gt Next If it is offline the printer will not be shown Check to see that the printer is online There are tim
276. ht for the custom paper Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm 6 Select the Paper Feed Direction NOTE Long Edge First media feeds in long edge first Short Edge First media feeds in short edge first Long Edge First flipped Reserved for future use Short Edge First flipped Reserved for future use 7 Click OK three times 8 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 169 Custom Page Sizes PCL NOTE Up to 32 custom page sizes can be defined in the PCL driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the driver to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 170 Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 171 1 Open the file in your application Select F
277. ial documents Deleting Windows 2000 291 Windows Me 98 95 380 Windows NT 472 Windows XP 194 Printing Windows 2000 290 Windows Me 98 95 379 Windows NT 471 Windows XP 193 Using Windows 2000 287 Windows Me 98 95 377 Windows NT 469 Windows XP 191 Consumables life expectancy fuser 118 514 image drum 505 by color 118 toner 498 by color 118 transfer belt 118 508 Usage Life Image drum by color 118 Toner by color 118 Control Front Panel 63 Buttons diagram 64 65 Display LCD diagram 63 Language on display 66 list of available 98 Lights diagram 63 Messages See Messages Costs tracking 644 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 745 CPU specifications 572 CR Code FX emulation 107 PCL emulation 101 PPR emulation 105 Curl paper 538 reducing 95 Current printer settings Printing a list 82 Custom colors creating 593 594 596 Custom page size See Paper Size D Danish display language 98 Darkness adjustment for color 596 DATA ARRIVE message 523 Data lost when printer turned off 88 DATA PRESENT message 523 Data complex print jobs 555 Defaults Menu Settings 579 Defaults Paper Feed Windows 2000 PCL 228 PS 223 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 317 Windows NT PCL 414 PS 410 Windows XP PCL 133 PS 128 Defaults Paper Size Windows 2000 PCL 228 PS 223 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 317 Windows NT PCL 414 PS 410 Windows XP PCL 133 PS 128 Demonstration Page 86 Density adjustmen
278. icator comes on and stays on green ONLINE appears on the display Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 56 Power POWER SAVE Mode Use Power Save to avoid turning off the printer If you MUST turn off the printer you must perform a shutdown sequence See Hard Disk Drive installed on page 60 Power Save is turned on or off through the Maintenance Menu You can choose the length of time the printer waits before entering Power Save This is done through the setting Power Save Delay Time in the System Configuration menu Turn the feature on or off Press ONLINE OFFLINE displays Press MENU repeatedly until MAINTENANCE MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until POWER SAVE displays Press VALUE either or until the desired status displays ENABLE Power Save is activated turned on DISABLE Power Save is deactivated turned off 6 Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected status 7 When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays a kh WD Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 57 Power POWER SAVE Mode Set the Wait interval oa h whd Make sure Power Save is activated See the previous procedure Press MENU until SYSTEM CONFIG MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until POWER SAVE DELAY TIME displays Press VALUE either or until the desired time display
279. ice Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 203 7 Select the Project menu Choose Send Project Files to Printer This downloads the file to the printer If the file was downloaded successfully Command Issued displays 8 Close the Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 204 Defining Overlays PostScript 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Overlay tab 4 Click the Overlay button Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Disable Overlay Active Overlay MAX 4 Overlay Page Logo First Page Address All Pages Defined Overlay MAX 32 Page First Page All Pages ok Cancel Am Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 205 5 Click the New button Define Overlays Overlay Name WES Print on Pages All Pages bd Custom Pages Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 r Form setting Form Name Add Rename Defined Forms 6 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay Select the pages where you want the overlay to print NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the
280. ice Manager for Windows 635 Overlays Windows Me 98 95 PCL Defining 1 2 o0 Ww Click Start Settings Printers Right click the Oki PCL printer icon then click Properties The Oki Properties dialog box appears Click the Job Options tab click the Overlay button Click Define overlays Under Overlay Name enter a name for the overlay Under ID Value enter the ID number for the file saved using Storage Device Manager see the File List printout Inthe Print on Pages drop down list select on which pages the overlay is to be printed or select Custom and enter specific page numbers under Custom pages Click Add then click Close Each overlay you defined appears in the Defined overlay list Click OK and close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 636 Overlays Windows Me 98 95 PCL Printing 1 2 Open the document in the software application Click File Print The Print dialog box appears Make sure the Oki PCL driver is selected then click Properties or your application s equivalent The Oki Properties dialog box appears Click the Overlay tab Under Defined Overlays click any overlays you wish to use To select more than one press the Ctrl key while selecting the names Click Add The names appear in the Active overlays box e To print a sample of an overlay to see what it
281. ick a printer gt Next or the Option tab of the Properties of printer from which logs are acquired window click a printer in the Printer Tree Printer Properties Option Printer Use Time Size Tray Media Type Pages Toner use amount Drum use amount Belt fuser use amount Finisher IV Belt fuser use amount Belt Fee 0 dollar s pages Fuser Fee 0 dollar s pages printer used for fee automatic calculation Belt Price dollars Fuser Price 0 dollar s Automatic calculation Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 680 Fees Define Fees window Finisher Tab Staple Select to set a fee for each use of the stapler Applies only when the optional finisher is installed on applicable models Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 681 Operation at log full Here you can set what the printer does when the buffer for log storing becomes full and cannot store any more logs Operation at Log Full Delete old logs Y Cancel the job Cancels the jobs once the buffer is full Do not acquire the log Prints without acquiring logs once the buffer is full Delete old logs Deletes old logs and stores new logs a The default setting Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 682 Inhibit the initialization of HDD Iv Inhibit the ini
282. ies 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 774 Ready light 56 Flashing 63 ON 63 Rear paper exit Opening and closing 53 54 55 Rear stopper 44 Receive buffer full Parallel 109 USB 110 size 112 Recovery Automatic memory overflow 97 print overrun 97 Recycled Paper Media Type 91 Recycled paper 74 Paper Media Type 91 Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Redi Strip Envelopes 578 Reducing text to fit 107 letter to A4 101 Registering clients 651 printers 651 Registration Auto Adjust 94 fine adjustment by color 95 REGISTRATION ADJUST TEST message 525 REGISTRATION ERROR message 525 Relative Colorimetric PS Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 REMOVE THE PAPER message 525 Rendering Intents Absolute Colorimetric Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Auto Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Perceptual Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Relative Colorimetric Windows 2000P 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Saturation Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Rendering Color Rendering Dictionaries Windows 2000 252 Windows Me 98 95 341 Windows NT 438 Windows XP 157 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 775 Reports Color Swatch Sample 594 Error 98 Error Log 86 He
283. ile Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Preferences button 3 On the Setup tab under Media in the Size drop down list select User Defined Size E Printing Preferences 2 x Setup Job Options Color Media Size User Defined Size 215 9 x 2 v Source Automatically Select v Set Free Size Finishing Standard Lenath Driver Settings Untitled v Add Remove User Defined Size 215 9 x 273 4mm OK Cancel Help NOTE You may see a Warning dialog box indicating a conflict If you do click OK The driver automatically makes the needed changes to correct for the conflict Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 172 4 Select the unit Enter the width and length measurements Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Setup Job Options Color ize User Defined Size 21532 v 5 Click OK 6 Check that User Defined now appears in the Size list on the Setup tab NOTE To save the setting for future use Click Paper Feed Options Click Custom Size Select the unit Enter the relevant information for Width and Height Give your custom size a name under Name Click Add Click OK The Custom Page Size is added to th
284. ily User s Guide PrintSuperVision 732 Network Printer Status Utility General Information This utility creates an additional tab STATUS in the PostScript and PCL drivers that allows the client to monitor the selected printer s status Load this program from the Menu Installer located on CD1 Installation 1 Insert the Drivers Color and Network Utilities disk into the CD ROM drive If CD does not AutoPlay click Start gt Run Browse Browse to your CD ROM and double click Install exe then click OK 2 Click Network Software Administration Tools gt Network Printer Status Follow the on screen instructions Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Network Printer Status Utility 733 Using 1 Click Start Settings Printers Right click the Oki Printer icon Click Properties 2 Click on the STATUS tab 3 Click the UPDATE button to see device settings The following screen displays f E Flash Memory E Toner Remaining Black 99 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Network Printer Status Utility 734 Click on an item to see this information Trays Paper Type weight Duplex Installed not installed Disk Memory RAM size and used Flash Memory size and used Toner Remaining toner remaining is all cartridges NOTE If the Automatic Status Check box is checked this utility pings the printer every time you open the Printer Properties
285. ing as it may result in a paper jam Always use the face up rear stacker straight through exit path for thick paper card stock etc For face down printing make sure the rear paper exit is closed The paper exits from the top of the printer Paper is stacked in printed order Paper tray capacity is about 500 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 54 Printing Paths Manual Feed CAUTION Don t open or close the rear paper exit while printing as it may result in a paper jam 1 Open the Multi purpose MP tray Extend the paper feed guides 2 Load the paper Load the media face up Adjust the paper guides to the size of the media being used Don t exceed the Paper Full line about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Load envelopes or letterhead stationery as shown ABC Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 55 Power Connecting the power cable WARNING Make sure the printer is turned OFF before connecting the power cable 1 Connect the power cable 1 to the printer 2 Connect the cable to a grounded power supply outlet 3 Use the on off switch 2 and turn ON the printer 4 The printer goes through its initialization and warm up sequence When the printer is ready to print the READY ind
286. ing the Multi purpose tray in the drop down list Click OK Close the Printers dialog box ZC 0 084 General Sharing Ports l Advanced l Color Management Security Device Settings EA Device Settings Form To Tray Assignment E A Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 4884 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s E Ai Installable Options Available Tray Bagge Duplex Installed Hard Disk Installed Memory Configuration 128 MB Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 219 Additional Paper Trays Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 On the Device Option tab select the appropriate number of trays not including the Multi purpose tray 4 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box Genel Shaino Pots l Advanced CBE ST DESEE Avalable Options Available Tray Es T Duplex Option Unit T Printer Hard Disk CO orem ow
287. inting Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PCL Using 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Setup tab under 2 Sided Printing select Long Edge or Short Edge 4 Click OK Print the document Setup Job Options Color Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in v Source Automatically Select v Paper Feed Options Finishing Mode Standard N up v 2 Sided Printing Ala prre Driver Settings ped Untitled v Add Letter 8 5 x 11in Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 459 Printing Booklets PCL Only NOTES You must have the duplex unit installed and enabled in order to print booklets Not available on some network connections see the Help file Some software applications may not support booklet printing The right to left setting allows a booklet to be printed for right to left reading which is used in some languages 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode in the drop down list select Booklet Letter 85 x Tin El Automatically Select Executive Series 2426 Printer Famil
288. ion Unit About Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 123 Paper Trays Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options click Available Trays then select the appropriate number of trays not including the Multi purpose tray in the drop down list 4 Click OK Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box General 1 Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Device Settings m Form To Tray Assignment E ay Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 10540 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray No Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts No Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixels Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s S Installable Options Available Tray Duplex Installed Hard Disk Installed Memory Configuration 128 MB gt 3 2 Optional Trays fia
289. ions You only need to do this once If you have additional memory in your printer use these instructions to update the Windows PostScript driver so that it recognizes the additional memory 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Options tab 4 Under Installed Memory set the memory in the drop down list to be the same as that now installed in the printer as shown in the Menu Map To print the Menu Map see Printer Settings Menu Settings on page 82 General Details Color Management Fonts Setup Job Options Color Device Options PostScript Installable options Available Tray fi zi T Duplex Option Unit T Printer Hard Disk Installed Memory 128 MB Cancel Apply Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 312 5 To specify usable printer memory size click the Memory button The driver automatically adjusts font cache size according to the memory option selected under Installed 6 Click OK twice Memory Configuration x Memory Configuration Available printer memory in MB E zi Available font cache in MB a cet __ Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 313 Hard Disk Drive Enabling PostScript or PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additi
290. is no solution for this problem not support You must use a computer that supports a bi directional bi directional parallel parallel interface interface Parallel cable does Use a bi directional parallel cable that meets the not meet IEEE 1284 1994 specifications specifications The interface is Check that the parallel interface is set to enable disabled Configuration Configure again from the beginning procedure was not correctly followed or cancelled Parallel cable is Reconnect or try another cable disconnected or faulty A converter buffer or Test by connecting printer and computer directly extension cable is being used Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 545 Parallel Interface Problems Output is garbled or incorrect Windows only Possible cause Remedy Possible mismatch on Change parallel transmission mode see Parallel parallel connection Transmission Mode above between computer and printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 546 USB Problems Cannot configure for USB connection NOTE Windows 95 and NT 4 0 do not support USB Windows 98 upgraded from Windows 95 may not support USB Windows 98 original installation and Windows Me 2000 and XP all support USB Possible cause Remedy Computer does not Check if there is a USB controller in the Windows device support USB manager interface USB cable does
291. is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 224 3 Click the Paper Quality tab Under Tray Selection in the Paper Source drop down list select the paper feed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 225 4 Click the 5 Under Paper Output in the Paper Size drop down list select the Advanced button media size a B 35 Paper Output Paper Size B inj Graphic Ei Image Color Management TrueType Font Substitute with Device Font E fig Document Options Advanced Printing Features Enabled PostScript Options B E Printer Features Advanced Document Settings Teri URN ICM Method ICM Disabled ICM Intent Pictures Media Type Printer Setting Multipurpose tray is handled as manual Feed No Tray Switch On Media Check On Page Rotate Normal cos Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 226 6 Under Document Options Printer Features click Media Type and select the media from the drop down list 7 Click OK twice Close the Printers dialog box Advanced Document Settings B 25 Paper Output Paper Size Letter Bg lu Graphic B Q Image Color Management ICM Method ICM Disabled
292. isk drive installed A printer with a hard disk drive performs better Important If your software application has a collate option use it instead of the collate option in the printer driver To use the printer driver to select collating 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Preferences button 3 On the Job Options tab under Job Type enter the number of copies required Only if the application has no collate option select Collate 4 Click OK Click Print PostScript Driver PCL Driver amp Printing Preferences amp Printing Preferences Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Setup Job Options Color Quality Job Type Q Job Type L Normal Normal O Proof and Print Proof and Print O Secure Print O Secure Print O Store to HDD O Store to HDD Copes 10 1 CI Collate Copies 10 5 Collate Scale Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 186 Proof and Print PCL or PostScript Using Proof and print allows printing of a single copy of a document for checking before printing multiple copies of the same document NOTES The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data
293. ist enter or select a form name Click Add Overlay Name oo i i s S C S Print on Pages Fite m Custom Pages RENE Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3512 r Form setting Form Name Stationery zl gerere Defined Forms NOTE The Form Name is a random name of your selection 8 Click OK 9 To continue to add files to the overlay if required repeat steps 5 through 8 10 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name s Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 304 11 Click Add to add the overlay s to the list under Active Overlay To select more than one overlay hold the CTRL key while clicking on each name A E Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Disable Overlay pe Active Overlay MAX 4 Page Logo First Page ADdress First Page Add Delete Defined Overlay MAX 32 Page First Page ADdress First Page New Edit Delete 12 At the top of the dialog box use the drop down list to select Use Overlay Click OK 13 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 305 Defining Overlays PCL Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click Printing Preferences Click the Job Options tab
294. it has over Windows ICM color matching is that it provides a method of printing using both input and output profiles Windows ICM matching only allows output profiles to be chosen Input Profiles e g a digital camera provide information about the color in the original device that was used to capture or display the image data For example an input device could be a scanner digital camera or monitor Output Profiles e g the printer provide information about the device to which you are printing The Using ICC Profiles feature uses both the input and output profiles to generate a CRD Color Rendering Dictionary which is used to match the colors as closely as possible NOTE This feature may not work for all application programs However many professional graphics applications offer a similar feature in their print settings with the ability to choose a source input color space and a print output color space Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 344 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Driver Using ICC Profiles Setting Up 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Color tab 4 Under Color mode in the Color Control Method drop down list select Using ICC Profile 5 Click the New button 6 Under Select ICC profile use the drop down lists to select the Input profile and Outpu
295. itor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For some photographs other settings may be better depending on the subjects and the conditions under which they were taken sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printable colors are modified 7 Set any other required parameters Use the on line Help for guidance 8 When you are done click OK Close the Printing Preferences dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 151 Color Matching Color Matching Options Print Color Swatch Utility For use with applications which allow you to set your own RGB values for colors The Color Swatch utility prints out charts of sample colors Listed below each color are the corresponding RGB Red Green Blue values to use in your application to match that printed color An example of using the Print Color Swatch function You wish to print a logo in a particular shade of red The steps you would follow are 1 Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences Click the Color tab Cli
296. ixel s g Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap lt 600 pixel s Jai Installable Options ip Available Tray 3 2 Optional Trays to EYES A Hard Disk Installed t Memory Configuration 128 MB Ehange Duplex Setting j Not Installed coea Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 408 Duplex Unit Enabling PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Option tab click Duplex Option Unit 4 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 409 Paper Feed Size and Media Changing Defaults PostScript The normal default for these items is automatic detection NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer driver instructions are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the software under Page Setup 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers
297. ize appears in the Size box Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 354 Custom Page Sizes PCL NOTE Up to 32 custom page sizes can be defined in the PCL driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the driver to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 355 Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 356 Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Click the Setup tab Under Media in the Size drop down list select User Defined Size The Set Free Size dialog box appears kh OD NOTE You may see a Warning
298. jobs to be prepared and stored on the hard disk for printing on demand This is good for forms generic memos letterhead stationery etc NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for Store to Hard Disk to operate correctly Store to Hard Disk may not be available in some software applications Open the file in your application Select File gt Print In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Job Options tab 3 Select Store to HDD N Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 292 4 Select the number of copies Click Collate if applicable PostScript Driver PCL Driver axi ax General Layout Paper uality Job Options Calor Overlay General Setup Job Options Color Job Type Job Type C Normal C Normal C Proof and Print Proof and Print i C Secure Print C Secure Print Q PIN Store to HDD PIN Store to HDD Copies fi0 I Collate Copies i0 Collate ae ae fro a C Normal NOTE If you ve already stored a document on the printer s hard disk drive and want to store another one click the PIN button and enter a new Job Name a
299. k Tray for paper jam MP tray is Tray 0 Check the transfer belt for paper jam correct installation etc Check the duplex unit for paper jam correct installation etc Check the fuser unit for paper jam correct installation etc Check the image drum for correct installation etc Color is indicated Collating of multiple copies has failed Adjusting head so that colors do not shift on to each other Adjust the color balance There is an error with communications to computer Data has been received but processing has not started yet Unprinted data remains in buffer Waiting for data to follow Error with hard disk operations Hard disk flash memory full The internal hard drive is full Call for service Indicates which paper tray is empty A PostScript error has occurred Call for service Fuser unit is missing Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 523 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Display Message INSTALL ADDITIONAL MEMORY INSTALL NEW IMAGE DRUM INSTALL NEW TONER INSTALL PAPER CASSETTE INVALID DATA LOAD MEDIA MISMATCH NETWORK ERROR OFFLINE ONLINE OPEN UPPER COVER PAPER JAM PAPER SIZE ERROR PLEASE POWER OFF POWER SAVE PRINTING PROCESSING RAM CHECK Meaning Additional memory is required before job can be printed See Memory Additional on page 555
300. label is supplied with the optional tray 9 Place the appropriate self adhesive tray number identifier label 2 or 3 on the lower rectangle at the right side of the tray The label is supplied with the optional tray Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 570 10 11 12 13 14 Connect the printer interface cable and power cable Turn on the printer Print a Menu Map To print the MenuMap a Press MENU twice INFORMATION MENU displays b Press SELECT PRINT MENU MAP displays c Press SELECT The Menu Map prints Check that TRAY 2 and TRAY 3 if installed appear under MEDIA MENU The printer automatically configures to include this option For Windows only 15 In the printer driver s change the installed memory to match the new value For Windows XP see page 124 For Windows 2000 see page 219 For Windows Me 98 95 PostScript driver only see page 315 For Windows NT 4 0 see page 406 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 571 Specifications Print method Resolution Colors CPU Memory Print language Internal font Print Start Parallel Interface Universal Serial Bus USB interface LED exposed light source electronic photographic memory ES2426n 600 x 1200dpi ES2426dn 600 x 1200dpi ES2426e 1200 x 1200dpi Cyan magenta yellow black CMYK Power PC 750 processor 32 bit RISC CPU 500 MH
301. ld not use this Initializes flash memory if installed Ordinarily you should not use this Changes the size of the flash memory area n n indicates the actual size in MB You cannot specify 10096 because special data is stored in the Flash Memory Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 112 Disk Maintenance Menu CAUTION Unless you know what you are doing do not use this Menu The System Administrator or someone who is knowledgeable in this area should use the Storage Device Manager software to perform disk maintenance Use the Disk Maintenance Menu to initialize the printer s internal hard disk drive reassign the partition contents and reformat the partitions Disk Maintenance Menu Only appears if the hard disk drive is installed The default settings are bold Item Value Description HDD INITIALIZE EXECUTE Partitions the hard disk and formats each partition PARTITION SIZE nnn mmm Sets usage of hard disk drive XXX partitions nnn Common mmm PCL xxx PS Range for each partition 1 to 98 in 1 increments nnn mmm xxx 100 HDD PCL COMMON PS Formats specified partition FORMATTING Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 113 Item X ADJUST Y ADJUST DUPLEX X ADJUST DUPLEX Y ADJUST TRAY 1 LEGAL 14 TRAY 2 LEGAL 14 TRAY 3 LEGAL 14 System Adjust Menu The default settings are bold Value 0 00 MM
302. le a meaningful name such as my template prn Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 483 Overlays Downloading the print file to use as an overlay PCL or PostScript Once you have created a print PRN file on your PC s hard disk you must download this file to the printer Use the Storage Device Manager to download the PRN file The Storage Device Manager software is included with the original software CDs that were supplied with your printer Launch Storage Device Manager Allow the program to discover locate the printer Click Project then New Project From the Project menu select Add File to Project Select the PRN file s that you created earlier PCL This automatically generates a BIN file ak ON PostScript This automatically generates a PostScript hst file Important The BIN file is automatically assigned an ID number To change the ID number double click the number enter a new one in the ID field Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 484 6 Note the name that the file is assigned in the Storage Device Manager Names are case sensitive NOTE The assigned file name is very important You must use this ID number or name when creating overlays in the printer driver You should change the ID number or name from the default value Note the new name for later use 7 Make sure the printer being us
303. leshooting 548 Application Error or General Protection Fault Possible cause Remedy Application is not Upgrade the application suitable for Windows Windows only version Windows only Memory is insufficient Close all other applications for number of applications running Print file is corrupted Correct or recreate the file Memory is insufficient Increase computer s memory for application See Memory Additional on page 555 Insufficient free space Delete unnecessary files on hard disk Printer driver is Correctly configure printer driver incorrectly configured Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 549 Paper Size Change request Possible cause Remedy Paper loaded in tray is Either change paper in tray to match size formatted in different size from that application and press ONLINE to continue formatted in software or application Continue printing on existing paper by pressing ONLINE Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 550 Printer does not go online Possible cause Bad connection Remedy Turn off the printer Disconnect the power cable Reconnect power cable Turn on the printer If this does not clear the fault call for service Printer makes a strange noise Possible cause The printer is not horizontal There are scraps of paper or other foreign matter inside the printer The top cover is not firmly sh
304. lick Start Settings Printers and Faxes Highlight the printer name Click Printing Preferences Click the Job Options tab Click the Overlay button A amp oKx Print Using Active Overlays Active Overlays Defined Overlays Name Define Overlays Test Print Cancel Help Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 209 5 To define an overlay click the Define Overlays button Define Overlays Defined Overlays Name Pages 1 verlay Name 1 j IDVawls Print on Pages aas Custom Pages 1 Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 6 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the name under which the file is stored on the printer s hard disk drive It is case sensitive 7 In ID Values enter the ID of the file Please refer to the instructions for the Storage Device Manager utility 8 Select which pages the overlay is to be printed on from Print on Pages or use Custom Pages to select specific page numbers in the document Click Add 9 Click Close 10 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name Click the Add button to add the overlay to the list in Active Overlays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide
305. lick the Preferences button 3 On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode select the required number of pages per sheet Setup Job Options Color Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in X Source Automatically Select v Paper Feed Options Finishing Mode DICERE Options mw dE Driver Settings Untitled ES J J Add Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Cancel Apply Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 164 4 Click the Options button Select the Page Borders Page Layout and Bind Margin Click OK 5 Click OK Click Print Standard N up Options Pages per Sheet mm v Page Borders v Page leyout Pottiait Z v Landscape law Bind Margin None 0 00 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 165 Custom Page Sizes PostScript NOTE One custom paper size can be defined in the PostScript driver Custom page sizes can only be printed from the multi purpose tray The paper media size for the multi purpose tray must be manually set in the driver to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 166 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the approp
306. list of files in printers memory HDD 623 viewing from HDD 624 Fit to Letter FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Flash memory change size 112 initialize 112 maintenance Storage Device Manager 600 PCL FlashO 620 2 620 storing forms 612 Flip side Duplex printing 114 Font cache size 112 Font substitution Windows Me 98 95 372 Fonts Condensed PPR 103 Fonts downloaded to Hard disk drive 99 Fonts Embedded fonts in PDF files 599 Fonts Epson FX 86 Fonts fixed space 99 Fonts Font Source PCL 99 Fonts IBM PPR 86 Fonts Internal fonts 572 Fonts List of FX 86 PCL 86 PPR 86 PS 86 Fonts PCL 86 downloaded 99 Flash memory 99 font DIMM ROM 99 internal 99 number 99 Resident 99 Fonts PDF files 599 Fonts PostScript 86 Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Fonts proportional 99 Fonts True Type Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Fonts width pitch 99 Form length FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 750 Forms ID number 622 PCL Macros 615 PostScript 608 Storage Device Manager 608 storing in printer flash memory 612 storing on printer hard disk drive 612 test print 614 volume number 620 Frame type Ethernet 111 French display language 98 Front Control Panel Messages See Control Front Panel See Messages Front Control panel See Control Front Panel Front panel See Cont
307. looks like click its name in the Defined overlays box then click Test Print e f you wish to add more overlays to the list click Define over lays In the Define overlays dialog box fill in the appropriate information Click Close Click Print using active overlays Click OK and print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 637 Overlays Windows Me 98 95 PCL Editing Defined 1 2 3 a Click Start Settings Printers Right click the Oki PCL printer icon Click Properties The Oki Properties dialog box appears Click the Job Options tab Click the Overlay button Click Define overlays The Define overlays dialog box appears Under Defined overlays click the overlay to be edited Make any changes Click Apply 10 11 Click Close Click OK and close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 638 Overlays Windows Me 98 95 PCL Deleting 1 2 Click Start Settings Printers Right click the Oki PCL printer icon then click Properties The Oki Properties dialog box appears Click the Job Options tab Click the Overlay button Click Define overlays The Define overlays dialog box appears Under Defined overlays click the overlay to be deleted Click Remove then Close Click OK and close the Printers dialog box Executiv
308. lor Swatch Utility to print out a chart of RGB swatches and enter your desired RGB values in your application s color picker PS only see page 247 RGB or CMYK f you are printing from a graphics application such as Adobe Photoshop you may be able to use Soft Proofing to simulate the printed image on your monitor To do this you can use the ICC profiles provided see Windows ICM Color Matching on page 257 Print using the ICC profiles as the Print Space or Output space PS only Alternatively use PostScript Color Matching with the Absolute Colorimetric Setting see page 252 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 242 Color Matching Choosing a Method Printing Vivid Colors RGB only Use Oki Color Matching see page 250 with the Monitor 6500k Vivid sRGB or Digital Camera settings PCL or PS RGB or CMYK Use PostScript Color Matching see page 252 with the Saturation option Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 243 Color Matching Color Matching Options PCL Driver The Color Matching Options in the PCL driver can be used to help match your printed colors to the ones displayed on your monitor NOTE The PCL driver s color options are only designed to work with RGB data If you are printing CMYK data we recommend you use the PostScript driver Manually set the options in the PCL driver 1 Click Start gt Settings
309. lors that the printer can reproduce The way in which this conversion is performed can be controlled via the ICM Intent control in the printer driver NOTE The Color Match Using ICC Profiles feature provides an alternative to Windows ICM It is similar to Windows ICM but offers several additional features Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 257 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet N Up Printing PostScript 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PS driver Click the Layout tab 3 Under Pages Per Sheet select the required number of pages 4 Click Print Tn 0X General Layout Paper Qualiy Job Options Color Overlay m Orientation Portrait C Landscape Rotated Landscape m Print on Both Sides Duplex gt None C Flip on Long Edge Flip on Short Edge r Page Order Front to Back C Back to Front Pages Per Sheet mm Advanced Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 258 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet N Up Printing PCL 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Setup tab 3 Under Finishing Mode select the required number of pages per sheet aix Gener
310. ly User s Guide Troubleshooting 529 Paper Jams Clearing Check the transfer belt CAUTION Never expose image drums to light for more than 5 minutes Always hold an image drum by the ends Never expose image drums to direct sunlight Never touch the green surface of the drum 4 Remove all four image drums as one unit in their cradle Place the cradle on a flat surface This prevents damage to the shiny green surface on the bottom of the drums a Carefully remove any jammed paper from the transfer belt and top paper exit b Replace all four image drums as one unit into the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 530 Paper Jams Clearing Check behind the rear cover 5 Open the rear cover a Remove any jammed paper b Close the rear cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 531 Paper Jams Clearing Check the fuser unit WARNING The fuser unit is very hot after printing Always use the handle when lifting it a If necessary lift out the toner drum cradle to access the jammed page Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 532 b Release the fuser roller lock levers at either end of the fuser and slowly remove the jammed paper c Re lock the levers at either end of the fuser Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 533 Paper Jams Clearing Check the
311. me and Job Account ID will be displayed every time printing is run A printer client enters their assigned User Name and Account ID to print This mode is useful if several people share the same computer Hide Mode In this mode the System Administrator creates an ID file that describes the information on all clients Next each client clicks Import ID File on their computer then specifies this file Printer clients need not know anything about their own Account ID This ID file describes the information on each and every client in one line using the following format Login User Name Account ID User Name Login User Name User name entered when logging onto Windows Account ID Account ID corresponding to the user name User Name User name displayed in this System This is optional If this is unspecified the Login User Name will be used as the User Name Use the extension csv to save the file Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 717 Client Software Job Account Modes Not supported Mode In this mode all jobs to be printed will be recognized as Unregistered ID 0 NOTE For print jobs recognized as Unregistered ID you can set it so they are permitted or refused for printing but document names will not be displayed on the print logs Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility
312. n the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PS driver 3 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 352 4 Click the Setup tab Under Media in the Size drop down list select Custom Page 1 Custom Page 2 or Custom Page 3 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 353 5 11 12 Click the Custom Size button Custom Size L2 x Papername JETER n Page 1 Width 3 00 300 1295 Units UM pa Doras Inches Length poo ES 5 00 47 25 Milimeters Transverse 7 cm one In the Paper name box yype in the name you wish to use for the custom paper size Enter the Width and Length for the custom paper Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Select Transverse if you wish to rotate the image by 90 degrees Click OK Check that the name of the custom paper s
313. nd click Add Any IDs not already registered for the printer appear in the User box Import User 24 x User Job Account IC Delete Graphic Artists 110t Managers 120t Import Source Group Publications Group T raining 5 Click any Name Account IDs that you do not wish to add and click Delete then click OK The selected Account ID s are imported into the List of registered IDs for the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 699 Changing Account ID Settings From the main Print Job Accounting window 1 Open the Printer Tree and double click the printer for which you wish to change Account IDs 2 On the User tab click Register The following window appears Job Account ID registration 2l x List of registered IDs Add Name JobAcco Group Fred G 122 Delete Local Print 18790481 Writers 1000 Change Shane Group Other Printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 700 3 Click the Name for which you wish to change settings then click Change The following window appears Properties of Job Account ID 24x gd DG Hot Br LETTO TU E asa aaup Oe ca 4 Make any desired changes Click OK 5 Click End Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 701 Deleting Account IDs From the main Print Job Ac
314. ndard sizes are checked Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 89 Item TRANSPARENCY DETECT RESOLUTION TONER SAVE MODE MONO PRINT SPEED ORIENTATION LINE PER PAGE EDIT SIZE Print Menu The default settings are bold Value Auto Disable ES2426n 600 x 1200 dpi 600 dpi ES2426dn 600 x 1200 dpi 600 dpi ES2426e 1200 dpi Fast 1200 dpi 600 dpi ON OFF Auto Color speed Normal speed Portrait Landscape 5 to 128 Default 60 Cassette size Letter Executive Legal 14 Legal 13 5 Legal 13 A4 A5 A6 B5 Custom Com 9 envelope Com 10 envelope Monarch envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope Use short edge feed Description Enable Disable the transparency auto detect function Selects print resolution ON Enables Toner Save mode OFF Disables Toner Save mode See page 40 Selects monochrome printing speed Auto Prints at the most appropriate speed for the type of printing being done Color Always prints at the color print speed Normal Always prints at the monochrome print speed Sets page orientation for printing Sets the number of lines that can be printed on a page standard letter size Invalid in PostScript Cassette size is selected when using standard sized paper in the paper tray Edit size is only used when printing one page size onto a different paper size Example To print A6 onto A4 set Edit Size to A6 The
315. ne way to achieve a good match between the document displayed on your monitor and its printed equivalent There are many factors involved in achieving accurate and reproducible color However the following guidelines may help in achieving good color output from your printer There are several suggested methods depending on the type of document you are printing most common RGB see page 426 professional desktop publishing and graphics CMYK see page 426 photographic images see page 427 specific colors i e a company logo see page 428 printing vivid colors see page 429 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 425 Color Matching Choosing a Method RGB or CMYK The guidelines for choosing a color matching method make distinctions between Red Green Blue RGB and Cyan Magenta Yellow Black CMYK Generally most documents you print are in RGB format This is the most common and if you do not know your document s color mode assume that it is RGB Typically CMYK documents are only supported in professional Desktop Publishing and Graphics applications Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 426 Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Photographs RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 436 is a generally a good choice Select a matching method appropriate to your monitor Executive Series 2426 Printer Family
316. nitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K This is best for printing photographic images Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics and text Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce brightest colors Monitor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For some photographs other settings may be better depending on the subjects and the conditions under which they were taken Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce brightest colors sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color This option attempts to simulate RGB color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printable colors are modified Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 251 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer It affects both RGB and CMYK data From the Rendering Intent drop down list select the rendering type Layout Paper Quality Job Options Colo
317. noise sess 551 Printer takes a long time to start printing sene 552 Printing is slow ette tiet o e en RU HS 553 Printing does NOUWSUAL eene to Re EC eee 553 Printng cancelsi ee e edt petet 553 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 13 ACCessOrles 2 ose EE AE a AEE E ESAE 554 Memory Additional sese 555 WMhen ito Install 5 4 2 eee eerie core re RETE 555 Available Amounts cccccccsssccccessssecceeesssseeeceeesssseececesstseseesenaee 555 How to Ins tall sig insere orte m ret eter er ie breed 556 Hard Disk A BITA E E E eee torre pe ree OS Ue Eee PER dee 562 Initialize Automatically eee 565 Initialize Manually esee 565 Dupl x Unit tel tete eee ri eo e e 566 Installation 45 Ret iet ete ie e a Re SERO Eo Ede 566 Paper Trays nr eere eet a RP eines 567 Installation este eite sire rec ye E e ERR SE LATE 567 SpecificatiOfis r aaa aeaaea ratae ce cata rao bn eed esed Canne Use Ce Ced acne piuue 572 Consumables na eoa diesel c I Seton e deseas danin 575 OBTIENE 575 Drums eot onte mittam me 575 E set nlts345 tere ets fee Seek ech ete os re CIR Sows ads eens 576 iLranster Belt 225 nih e orte GRE A 576 OKI Print Media sese entere ettet ent 577 OKLSynElexIM 4 estoit Ott hn inet 577 OKI Bright White Proofing Paper eee 577 OKI Premium Card Sto
318. ns m Finishing Mode m Driver Settings 3 Untitled 7 Add Remove Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 278 4 Click the Options button Set the Signature 2pages Right to Left and Bind Margin as required See the online Help for information Click OK 5 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 279 Printing Watermarks PCL Only 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Job Options tab 3 Click Watermark 4 Select a name from the Watermark list Watermark CONFIDENTIAL COPY Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 280 NOTE To create a new watermark or edit an existing watermark Click the New or Edit button TEE T Di ea li mx m Eom Coo Enter the text for the watermark Select the attributes font size angle to be used Click OK The new watermark appears in the Watermark list 5 f you wish to print the watermark only on the first page of the document select First Page only 6 Click OK T Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 281 Collating PCL or PostScript Collating can be carried out with or
319. nt booklets Not available on some network connections see the Help file Some software applications may not support booklet printing The right to left setting allows a booklet to be printed for right to left reading which is used in some languages 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver 3 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 365 4 On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode in the drop down list select Booklet 5 Click the Options button 6 Set the Signature 2pages Right to Left and Bind Margin as required See the online Help for information 7 Click OK 8 Click OK Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 366 Printing Watermarks PostScript 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the print dialog box click the appropriate PS driver 3 Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 4 In the Select a watermark list click the name of the watermark you wish to use Watermarks L2 x T On first page only Iv In background T As outline only Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 367 NOTE To create a new watermark or edit an existing watermark
320. nter broken down by User ID including User ID Job ID Date Document Name Paper Size Media Type Total Sheets Color Pages Mono Pages Job Cost Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 711 Available Excel Macros Macro What is Included User Usage Chart of data in the User Summary worksheet User Summary Includes the following for each User eee Jogs Total Sheets Color Pages Mono Pages Duplex Pages Total Costs Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 712 Viewing Acquired Logs From the main Job Accounting window click the beside Log to expand the Log Tree f Print Job Accounting File Printer Log Option Help Printer Log Date Printer 8 Click the beside the submenus to drill down to the log you wish to view Date Submenu Lists the logs by date year month then by registered printer Printer Submenu Lists the logs by registered printer then date 9 To view a log Double click an entry or e Click an entry then click Log Display Log Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 713 Reading Log Entries The items displayed in Print Log are as follows Log Entries in alphabetical order Column Description 1200dpi Number of
321. nter page numbers and or separated by commas For wares ber 542 Ce j s 6 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the name under which the file is stored on the printer s hard disk drive It is case sensitive 7 In ID Values enter the ID of the file Please refer to the instructions for the Storage Device Manager utility 8 Select which pages the overlay is to be printed on from Print on Pages or use Custom Pages to select specific page numbers in the document Click Add 9 Click Close 10 Repeat steps 5 though 9 for each overlay you wish to add 11 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name Click the Add button to add the overlay to the list in Active Overlays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 491 12 Select Print Using Active Overlays First Page First Page serine 13 Click OK 14 Click OK to close the Default dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 492 Printing Posters PCL Only This option allows you to configure and print posters by breaking up the document page into multiple pieces Each piece prints enlarged on a separate sheet Then the separate sheets are combined to produce a poster It is only available with the PCL printer driver 1 Open
322. nter properties to be accessed from within the document print dialog box This section explains how to set up color printing and how to use the printer s features Printer s features covered in this section include N up printing see page 258 Custom page sizes see page 261 Selecting print resolution see page 270 Duplex printing see page 271 Printing Booklets see page 275 Watermarks see page 280 Collating see page 282 Proof and Print see page 283 Secure print printing confidential documents see page 287 Storing files to the hard disk drive see page 292 Using overlays see page 296 Printing posters see page 309 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 234 Factors that Affect Color Printing The PCL and PostScript printer drivers supplied with your printer provide several controls for changing the color output For general use the default driver settings produce good results for most documents Many applications have their own color settings and these may override the settings in the printer driver Please refer to the documentation for your software application for details on how that particular program s color management functions If you wish to manually adjust the color settings in your printer driver please be aware that color reproduction is a complex topic and there are many factors to take into consideration Some of the most important factors are
323. ntrol Front Panel Buttons Diagram and Explanations MENU ITEM VALUE SELECT 0 9 9 ON LINE CANCEL Item Press briefly to scroll forward to the next menu item Item Press briefly to scroll backward to the previous menu item Value Press briefly to scroll forward to the next value setting for each menu item Value Press briefly to scroll backward to the previous value setting for each menu item Select Press briefly to select the displayed menu item or value Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 65 Control Front Panel Language of Display Changing aoa hwWHN Menu__item___Value__ Select Ready Menu Item Value Select Attention O Cancel O30 Press ONLINE OFFLINE displays Press MENU until SYSTEM CONFIG MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until LANGUAGE displays Press VALUE either or until the required language displays Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected language When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 66 Paper Media Size Selecting NOTE When using paper trays Custom paper sizes must be set Standard paper sizes are automatically recognized if CASSETTE SIZE is selected CASSETTE SIZE is the default setting for EDIT SIZE in the Print Menu Refer to Changin
324. o Tray Switch Automatic switching when paper tray is empty 89 sequence of use 89 set to ON 49 B B5 paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Back page duplex printing 114 BELT UNIT MISSING message 522 Bi Directional parallel 109 BIN files 617 618 Binding 89 Black Composite Black 101 printing black 41 True Black 101 Black stripes 540 Blank page skip when printing FX emulation 107 PCL emulation 101 PPR emulation 105 Blurred print 541 Bond paper type 91 Booklets printing Windows 2000 PCL 278 PS 275 Windows Me PCL 365 Windows NT PCL 460 Windows XP PCL 182 PS 179 BUSY signal Parallel 109 USB 110 C CANCEL button 64 CANCELLING JOB message 522 Carbon Paper 74 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 740 Card stock Paper Media Type 91 92 Paper Feed 53 54 part numbers 577 Carrier sheet 76 Cassette Size and custom paper sizes 67 CENTRO I F ERROR message 522 CHANGE IMAGE DRUM message 505 522 CHANGE TONER 498 CHANGE BELT UNIT message 508 522 CHANGE FUSER UNIT message 514 522 CHANGE PAPER TO message 522 CHANGE TONER 39 message does not disappear 39 498 Character height FX emulation 108 PPR emulation 105 Character pitch FX emulation 106 PPR emulation 103 Character set FX Emulation 106 PPR Emulation 103 Characters per inch 99 Charts Color matching Windows 2000 PS 253 Windows Me 98 95 PS 342 Windows NT PS 439 Windows XP PS 158
325. o be stuck go to the printer and check the display The Oki Storage Device Manager software contains an online Help system To access it from the main Storage Device Manager screen click Help Topics from the Help pull down menu To access it from other Storage Device Manager screens click the Help button NOTE Storage Device Manager requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher to run Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 603 Network Administrator Functions On network systems the Network Administrator oversees the Storage Device Manager software uses Storage Device Manager to manage and monitor the printer s internal hard disk and flash memory The Administrator s Functions Feature lets you setup the Administrative Password establish 4 digit PIN numbers for each client using any four numbers from 0 through 7 8 and 9 cannot be used reboot the printer delete files Show Resources is preferable format the internal hard drive Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 604 Network Administrator Functions Notes and Cautions NOTES PIN Numbers Clients can choose their own PIN numbers The administrator must know these PINs in order to access client information CAUTION Deleting Files With Show Resources you can browse to the file click it click Delete then click
326. o perform step 3 Delete a printer without fail before uninstalling the Server Software 3 Select Delete a printer from the Printer menu You are prompted as to whether or not you wish to delete the print log for the jobs that have been run by the printer you are deleting CAUTION Even if you select No at this point unless you register the printer again the print log for those jobs cannot be referenced If you need the log even after deletion of the printer be sure to select Export Logs from the Log menu then save them in a file before deleting the printer 4 Click Start Programs Okidata gt OKI Print Job Accounting Delete OKI Print Job Accounting Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 728 Uninstalling Print Job Accounting Uninstall the Client Software On each Client computer click Start Programs Okidata OKIPrint Job Accounting Client Delete OKI Print Job Accounting client Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 729 PrintSuperVision General Information PrintSuperVision is a web based application for managing printing devices connected to a network PrintSuperVision provides access to networked printer data for monitoring reporting and managing networked printers It provides a full range of management functions for Oki printers and for other brands of printers as well Load this p
327. o put the printer Weight Requirements Place the printer on a flat surface large enough and strong enough to accept the size and weight of the printer WARNING This printer weighs 106 Ibs 48 kg Two people are required to lift the printer safely Space Requirements There must be enough space around the printer to allow for access and printer maintenance 60cm 23 62in 48Kg L i 106l 40cm sd 15 75in Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Getting Started 25 Parts of the Printer External SCO ON OO FR WHD Top cover Control panel Top cover release catch Multi purpose tray manual feed Paper support extension Paper guides Front cover Paper tray Paper level indicator Power switch Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Getting Started 26 Parts of the Printer Internal 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 LED heads 4 Discharge roller Fuser unit Image drum and toner cartridge cyan Image drum and toner cartridge magenta Image drum and toner cartridge yellow Image drum and toner cartridge black Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Getting Started 27 Parts of the Printer Back 18 Power connector 19 Rear exit paper tray 20 Interfaces and option card slot 21 USB interface connector 22 Parallel interface connector 23 Network interface card
328. oa hoN NOTE When initializing the hard disk any fonts overlays or print jobs that have been stored are erased You can also use Storage Device Manager to initialize the hard disk For more information please refer to the User Guide for the Storage Device Manager Press MENU until DISK MAINTENANCE displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until HDD INITIALIZE displays Press the SELECT button Press the ITEM button to shut down the printer Turn on the printer The printer has to be turned off and on again to initialize the hard disk before use Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Accessories 565 Duplex Unit Installation 1 2 A o o 0 Oi Turn off the printer Disconnect the power cable Open the front cover 1 Insert the duplex unit 2 into the printer Engage the sides of the duplex unit in the slots in the printer Gently slide the duplex unit 2 fully into the printer Close the front cover 1 Connect the power cable Turn on the printer The printer automatically configures to include this option For Windows only 10 In the printer driver s change the installed memory to match the new value For Windows XP see page 126 For Windows 2000 see page 221 For Windows Me 98 95 PostScript driver only see page 316 For Windows NT 4 0 see page 408 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Ac
329. ob Options tab Click the Overlays button Choose Create Form from the menu Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Click OK to print the document to a file Instead of sending the print job to the printer this prompts you to save the print job on your PC s hard disk Give the file a meaningful name such as my template prn Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 299 Downloading the print file to use as an overlay In the previous topic you created a print PRN file on your PC s hard disk This topic explains how to use the Storage Device Manager to download this file to the printer The Storage Device Manager software is included with the original software CDs that were supplied with your printer 1 Launch Storage Device Manager Allow the program to discover locate the printer 2 Click Project Click New Project From the Project menu select Add File to Project 4 Select the PRN file s that you created earlier PCL This automatically generates a BIN file o PostScript This automatically generates a PostScript hst file Important At this step look in the project window The BIN file is assigned an ID number You can change this ID number by double clicking it Enter a new one in the ID field 5 Note the name that the file is assigned in the Storage Device Manager Names are case sensitive NOTE The assigned file name is very important Y
330. ocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s 6 Installable Options Available Tray 1 Standard Duplex Installed Hard Disk Installed Memory Configuration Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 216 Hard Disk Drive Enabling PostScript Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Device Settings tab 4 Under Installable Options make sure Hard Disk is set to Installed 5 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box aix General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Device Settings d PS Device Settings BE 3 Form To Tray Assignment E A Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 4884 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Job Timeout 0 seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s i Installable Options Available
331. olution The print quality may not be satisfactory The procedure for printing from Acrobat Reader is 1 From the toolbar select File then Print or press the Ctrl P keys 2 Choose the pages you wish to print a All pages for the entire manual b Current page for the page at which you are looking c Pages from and to for a range of pages You select the range by entering the appropriate page numbers 3 Click OK Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Introduction 22 Getting Started Unpacking WARNING This printer weighs 106 Ibs 48 kg Two people are required to lift the printer safely Unpack the printer Save all of the packing materials Use them if you have to move ship the printer Choose a suitable place to put the printer Check that you have all of these parts BEFORE you continue 1 The printer 2 Toner cartridges 4 cyan magenta yellow and black 3 Power cable 4 Documentation Setup Guide Software Installation Guide Warranty booklet 5 LED lens cleaner not illustrated 6 Light proof plastic bags not illustrated 7 CD s not illustrated Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Getting Started 23 Printer Drivers Software Utilities and Documentation The CDs supplied with your printer contain Drivers Color Utilities Network Utilities Manuals Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Getting Started 24 Where t
332. ome photographs other settings may be better depending on the subjects and the conditions under which they were taken sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printable colors are modified 7 Set any other required parameters Use the on line Help for guidance 8 When you are done click OK Close the Properties dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 335 Color Matching Color Matching Options Print Color Swatch Utility For use with applications which allow you to set your own RGB values for colors The Color Swatch utility prints out charts of sample colors Listed below each color are the corresponding RGB Red Green Blue values to use in your application to match that printed color An example of using the Print Color Swatch function You wish to print a logo in a particular shade of red The steps you would follow are 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties Click the Color tab Click the Color Swatch button to print the color swatch samples Select the shade of red that best suits your needs Note of the RGB value below that particular shade Oc 0 ND 6 Use your program s color picker to enter the same RGB values from step 5 Change the logo
333. on 20 How to use this manual This manual covers the unpacking setup and operation of your printer It helps you use your printer s many features This manual also includes troubleshooting information maintenance guidelines instructions for adding options NOTES This User s Guide was written using one printer as a model The illustrations screenshots reflect this The information in this manual is supplemented by the extensive online help facility in the printer driver software Online Use Adobe Acrobat Reader to read this manual on screen Use the navigation and viewing tools provided in Acrobat You can access specific information in two ways n the list of bookmarks down the left hand side of your screen click the topic of interest to jump to the required topic If the bookmarks are not available use the Table of Contents n the list of bookmarks click Index to jump to the Index If the bookmarks are not available use the Table of Contents Find the term of interest in the alphabetically arranged index Click the associated page number to jump to the page containing the subject Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Introduction 21 Printing Pages The whole book individual pages or sections may be printed NOTE The line art graphics in this manual are PostScript If you plan to print parts of this manual choose a PostScript driver Otherwise the graphics print at low res
334. on page 253 Type in a name for the profile Click OK The new name appears in the Setting Name drop down list under ICC Profile Setting 8 Repeat steps 5 7 for each ICC profile you wish to define 9 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 256 Color Matching Color Control Method Windows ICM Color Matching PCL or PostScript ICM is the color management system built into Windows Affects RGB data only Can be associated with either the PCL or PS driver Windows ICM uses ICC profiles for your monitor and printer These profiles describe the colors that your device is capable of reproducing ICC profiles can be associated with your printer via the Color Management tab of the printer driver Depending on how you have installed the printer driver the color profiles may already be associated with the driver To associate ICC Color Profiles with the printer driver 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Color Management tab 4 Under Color Profiles currently associated with this printer you should see the names of profiles that match your printer model If you do not see any profiles associated with the driver click Add and locate the ICC profiles for your printer Windows ICM uses the information in these profiles to convert colors in your documents to co
335. on can be stored on it The Hard Disk Drive has much greater memory capacity Therefore we highly recommend that your printer be equipped with a Hard Disk Drive for use with the Print Job Accounting software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 645 Overview Sample Network Diagram Server Windows XP 2000 or NT 4 0 SP6 or later Client PCs Client Macs Windows XP 2000 Me 98 a OS 8 x or 9 x 95 NT 4 0 SP6 or later Macintosh Requirements The Print Job Accounting utility requires E Server computer using an appropriate Windows operating system E Client computers using Windows and or Macintosh operating systems Connection to the printer s to be managed either a direct connection USB or Parallel to the server or a network TCP IP connection NOTE Print Job Accounting does not operate in NetBEUI or NetWare environments Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 646 Operating System Requirements Server Windows Only The Print Job Accounting server software can be run under any of the following Windows operating systems with the latest Service Pack installed Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 6 or later Client Computers Windows or Macintosh The Print Job Accounting Client software can run under any of the following operating systems Windows
336. on one side of the paper D Duplex printing on both sides of the paper b Not Usable Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 72 Paper Media Weight and Type Paper Feed Exit Path and Duplex Options Transparencies and Labels The size weight and type of the paper print media determine which paper feed tray can be used which paper exit path can be used whether you can use double sided duplex printing Single sided printing is also known as simplex printing Feed Exit Paper Tray Tray MP Tray Rear Top Media 1 2 3 Manual Face up Face down weight Straight Through Transparencies Media Weight Ignored Set MediaType sa b sa sa b Transparency Labels Thickness Medium 5 b sa sa b 004 to 007 in Heavy 0 1 to 0 17 mm Thickness Ultra b b sa sa b 007 to 008 in Heavy 0 17 to 0 2 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 73 Paper Media Recommendations Paper CAUTION Print media must be able to withstand 446 F 230 C for 0 2 second For recommended papers see the Handy Reference Guide or check http my okidata com Paper should be stored flat and away from moisture direct sunlight and heat sources Don t use damp damaged or curled paper Using heavily laid or textured paper a seriously shortens the life of the image drum b causes poor print quality Change the media setting to Ultra Heavy
337. on your monitor may not necessarily match what was printed on the color swatch If this is the case it is probably due to the difference between how your monitor and printer reproduce color Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 247 Color Matching Color Matching Options PostScript Driver The PostScript driver offers several different methods of controlling the color output of the printer Setting Options Manually 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Color tab Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay r Color mode Color Control Method Color Simulation p Color Setting p Black Finish Monitor 6500K Auto x Auto JF User Setting C Glossy C Matte Advanced Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 248 4 Under Color Mode use the drop down list to select one of the following Color Control Methods a OKI Color Matching This is OKI s proprietary color matching system It affects RGB data only See OKI Color Matching on page 250 PostScript Color Matching This uses PostScript Color Rendering Dictionaries built into the printer It affects both RGB and CMYK data See PostScript Color Matching on page 252 Using ICC Profiles This option provides a method of matching RGB colors simila
338. onal trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Options tab 4 Select Printer Hard Disk A checkmark appears in the box 5 Click OK PostScript Driver PCL Driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 314 Paper Trays Enabling PostScript or PCL Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties 3 Click the Device Options tab 4 Next to Available Trays select the appropriate number of trays not including the Multi purpose tray in the list 5 Click OK PostScript Driver PCL Driver General Details Color Management Fonts Setup General Detais Color Management Sew Job Options Color Device Options PostScript Job Options Color Device Option Installable options Available Options DT Available Tray P 4 ential E s Em I Duplex Option Unit I Duplex Option Unit FL P T Printer Hard Disk Deo iat Install
339. ont panel to print the document See below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 470 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Printing at the Printer 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the SELECT button The document prints and is deleted from the hard disk drive NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 471 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Deleting the confidential document before printing it 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the CANCEL button to delete the job from the printer NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Stor
340. or each page printed in color and for each page printed in mono Sheet Select to set a fee to be charged for each printed sheet In this case the same fee will be charged for two sided printing as for one sided printing Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 673 Fees Define Fees window Toner use amount Tab 7 Toner use amount Select to set a standard feel per page for color and for mono printing Automatic calculation Use this to set up automatic calculation of fees for toner use and save it under the name you enter Once the settings are saved they can be used for other printers as well by selecting the saved settings name in the Fees drop down box in either the Add a printer for which logs will be acquired window Printer Adda Printer click a printer Next or the Option tab of the Properties of printer from which logs are acquired window click a printer in the Printer Tree Printer Properties Option Printer Use Time Size Tray Media Type Belt fuser use amount Finisher Pages Toner use amount Drum use amount V Toner use amount 0 1 2 3 4 5 ecOocoooco ecOoocococ ange printer used for fee automatic calculation Color Price 0 dollar s Mono Price 0 dollar s Large capacity Automatic calculation Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utilit
341. ork 719 Troubleshooting retten prete eee 726 Known Problems Solutions cccccsscccccsesssseeceessssseeeceesssseeecesesaee 727 Uninstalling Print Job Accounting eee 728 Uninstall the Client Software eeeseseeeeeeeeeeee 729 PrintSuperVisiOn aeni niania enne e nnne tatnen ieamand naa 730 General Informatiori 2 e rece oe i e e ds ea EO Peake 730 BeatuFes se v utebe meta eiut sies artt n 730 Using rei dee e Re ree ets 731 By Pes OF Useri tu ero eei ten 731 Typical Usage Scenarios eene 731 System Requirements missionair rare ras ente Ritt 732 Server SoftWare 2 uites e ssa de AEN VOS ules Qe eR e YA aea Ud 732 Chent S oftware ssi cccessinonsianancisseackeseereenlanatigesa RII 732 Additional Information meissont er a a e G 732 Network Printer Status Utility ern 735 General Information 3 nete eere eer rere e reri RISE 733 Installation 5i etaient tede tient ERN 733 Using cpu he e een eee 734 Checking the Printer Status eene nter nnne nin 736 Oki LPR Utility riter cene ous ert cos sonne tace rerandbdosaPdeEE 731 General Information seinne o eene enne eene 737 How to Install 4 rtr te tee ae tae EP E CERCA NN AFE 73 Oki CPR Status BOK dece pero iio grep 738 Additional Information ccccccsccccessssseccceesssseeceeessseeeeeeesssseeeesesaes 73
342. orm The Test PostScript Form dialog box appears 2 Click the file name for the form you wish to print you can get this from the File List printout Click OK Command Issued appears 3 Click OK and wait for the form to print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 614 Forms PCL Important Unless you are experienced with PCL macro commands it is best to stay with the PostScript Forms Here are the processes to producing PCL macros Step 1 Create the Form Step 2 Create a Project Step 3 X Convert the Form Step 4a Add Files to the Project Step 4b Delete Files from the Project Step 5 Check the Settings and Save the Project Step 6 Download the Project Step 7 Test Print the Form Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 615 Forms PCL Important Remember that file names and paths are case sensitive Step 1 Create the Forms in Your Software Application 1 Create the document in your software application 2 Click File Print and make sure the Oki PCL driver is selected 3 Print the document to a file using the extension PRN Step 2 Create a New Project 1 Open Storage Device Manager 2 Click Projects New Project The Project dialog box opens 3 Click Projects Save Project enter the path name for storing the project on your hard drive or your network then click Save Executi
343. ort 9100 15934 Time Flapsed 0 hours 2 minutes 1 seconds Job Information TCP IP IP Address 192 168 0 2 TCP Port 9100 165 By Time Elapsed 0 hours 7 minutes 47 seconds Job Information TCP IP IP Address 192 168 0 3 LPR Queue LP 2595 Time Elapsed 0 hours 33 minutes 57 seconds Job Information TCP IP IP Address 192 168 0 4 TCP Port 9100 74 By Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 723 Printer Menu Once you are logged in as the Administrator clicking this will bring up the following window through which you can make changes in the printer s menu settings The left pane contains a list of menu setting groups from which to select Printer Summary General Settings Print and Media System and PCL Parallel and USB Memory System Adjust Finisher Menu appears only if optional Finisher is installed Z http 192 164 0 17 Microsott Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help fe gt 0 Ala um d ne Best of the Web Back Forward Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Address etp 7 192 168 0 1 x Go x Printer Status Network Connection Printer Menu Printer Summary General Settings Print and Media System and PCL Parallel and USB Memory System Adjust Finisher Menu Network Network Summary General Settings Printer Port NetWare TCP IP Et
344. ostScript If you plan to print parts of this manual choose the PostScript driver Otherwise the line art graphics print at low resolution The print quality may not be satisfactory If neither driver seems to cover all your needs you should install both drivers Select the same printer port LPT1 or Network Port for both drivers during the installation Set the driver you plan to use most of the time to be your Windows default driver Most applications allow you to choose a different printer from within the print dialog so you can use the alternative driver for printing whenever you need to Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Printer Drivers 120 Memory Enabling PostScript Only Certain options such as additional memory the duplexer or additional trays may be installed in your printer Before using the printer you must enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once If you have additional memory in your printer use these instructions to update the Windows PostScript driver so that it recognizes the additional memory 1 2 3 4 Under Installable Options click Memory Configuration then Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes Highlight the printer name Click File then Properties Click the Device Settings tab set the memory in the drop down list to be the same as that now installed in the printer as shown in the Menu Map To print
345. ou don t necessarily care how accurate the colors are This makes it the recommended choice for graphs charts diagrams etc Maps fully saturated colors in the source gamut to fully saturated colors in the printer s gamut Relative Colorimetric Good for proofing CMYK color images on a desktop printer Much like Absolute Colorimetric except that it scales the source white to the usually paper white Unlike Absolute Colorimetric Relative Colorimetric attempts to take the paper white into account Absolute Colorimetric Best for printing solid colors and tints such as Company logos Matches colors common to both devices exactly Clips the out of gamut colors to their nearest printed equivalent Tries to print white as it appears on screen The white of a monitor is often very different from paper white so this may result in color casts especially in the lighter areas of an image Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 439 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet N Up Printing PostScript 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PS driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Advanced tab under Document Options Layout click N UP 4 In the Change N UP Setting list select the number of pages per sheet 5 Click OK Print the document 6 PS Properties 2 x Adv
346. ou must use this ID number or name when creating overlays in the printer driver You should change the ID number or name from the default value Note the new name for later use Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 300 Make sure the printer being used is highlighted in the lower window of the Storage Device Manager Select the Project menu Choose Send Project Files to Printer This downloads the file to the printer If the file was downloaded successfully Command Issued displays Close the Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 301 Defining Overlays PostScript 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences 3 Click the Overlay tab 4 Click the Overlay button Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 302 5 Click the New button Define Overlays 6 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay Select the pages where you want the overlay to print NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section The file is stored on the printers hard disk drive under this name The name is case sensitive Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 303 7 Under Form setting in the Form Name drop down l
347. our choice then click Next The following window appears Add a printer group Printer Address Group Status NOTE At this point no printers have been registered so none appear in the box Printers can be added to established Groups as they are being registered If you create a new group after registering printers a list of the registered printers will appear in the box and can be highlighted for inclusion in the group 3 Click Finish Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 666 Registering Printers To use Print Job Accounting you need to register printers to be managed in the Server Software Before starting check that the printers are powered up and properly connected 1 From the main Print Job Accounting window click Printer Add a printer The following window appears Add a printer for which logs will be acquired 2 xi Specify the printer for which logs will be acquired Local Port Parallel USB v TCP IP Network Broadcast Address 255 255 255 255 C Specify the printer by address TCP IP Network Address IP Address C Display export the log acquired by another remote server Remote Server Servers Display Back Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 667 2 Select the appropriate box es NOTE Only printers supported by this System will
348. overlays eee 388 Downloading the print file to use as an overlay 390 Defining Overlays iere itae d ru ded 392 Printing Posters eoe Ren o a ed 399 PCIOnly x 2r tee or eta e ite i iones 399 LTD EN mmc OR 401 Printer Drivers uiis ee e t e eres 401 Which Printer Driver to Use sessseseeeeeeneeeeen enn 402 Memory Enabling uote diee ed e e ee t i edt 403 PostScript Only dede cooo te tecto tee e ea eter 403 Hard Disk Drive Enabling eene 404 PostScript innere eo n E eU 404 PCD 4 nete detenti Deep tette ivi deus 405 Paper Trays Enabling ettet eite 406 POStS Cr pti iet tea e ntt ep ett 406 PCL sasanhensca deeem ence eti oet 407 Duplex Unit Enabling eerte 408 PostScript iet eee DR DR 408 PCT iR AU Re HR EE 409 Paper Feed Size and Media ence a 410 Changing Defaults 2 tete de aed ee i deed 410 PostScript urere ote etg 410 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 10 Network Printer Status Utility eese 419 OPErAON oisi E H 420 Factors that Affect Color Printing eseseseesseersseersersseersresreresrerrsreseses 421 Monitor Colors vs Printer Colors eene 422 Differences between the range of colors a monitor or printer can re Jun P 422 Viewing Conditions entree reri
349. ox on the General tab click the appropriate driver 3 Click the Job Options tab 4 Under Quality select the required printing resolution PostScript Driver PCL Driver ucom X 8 0s E Prt x General Layout Paper Qualiy Job Options Color Overlay General Setup Job Options Color Nomal Nomal C Proof and Print F Proof and Print C Secure Print C Secure Print FIN C Store to HDD PIN Store to HDD Copies 1 I Collate Copies I I Collate 5 Select Toner Saving if appropriate 6 Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 270 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript Usage Restrictions NOTE The optional duplex unit must be installed in the printer and enabled before duplex printing can be carried out Standard paper sizes only Paper weight range 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper must be loaded print side up Only Tray 1 optional Trays 2 and 3 and the High Capacity Feeder trays can be used for duplex printing The Multi Purpose MP tray cannot be used for duplex printing NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs e Click Start gt Settings Printers Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults Executive Series 2426
350. paper separator a Release and lift the separator 1 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 534 Check the duplex unit Paper Jams a Open the front cover b Slide out the duplex unit Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 535 Troubleshooting c Open the duplex top cover and remove any jammed paper d Close the duplex top cover and slide the duplex unit back into the printer e Close the front cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 536 Paper Jams Clearing Check additional paper trays If any optional paper tray s are installed 6 Pull them out Check that no paper is jammed along the various parts of the exit path 7 Close the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 537 Paper Jams Examples of Paper Jams Paper jams are frequent More than one sheet feeds at a time Paper curls Paper feeds at an angle Possible cause The printer is not horizontal The paper is too thin The paper is moist or affected by static The paper is creased or wrinkled The paper is not aligned correctly Paper doesn t feed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Remedy Place the printer on a stable level surface Use the correct type of paper See Specifications Store paper within specified temperature and humidity levels Remove the creased
351. pplication has a collate option use it instead of the collate option in the printer driver To use the printer driver to select collating 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Job Options tab under Job Type enter the number of copies required Only if the application has no collate option select Collate 4 Click OK Print the document PostScript Driver PCL Driver Advanced Job Options Color Setup Job Options Color Quality Quality r dob Type Nomal Fine Quality Normal C Normal C Fast I Toner Saving C Fast T Toner saving Orientation Orientation Portrait ae WN Potrat T 180 4 C Landscape C Landscape 180 Watermark Overlay Font Advanced Dea Cancel Help Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 464 Proof and Print PCL or PostScript Using Proof and print allows printing of a single copy of a document for checking before printing multiple copies of the same document NOTES The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing Ifthe hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy is printed Ift
352. pt Driver PCL Driver EET M Job Name Job Name Settings I Job Name T Request Job Name for each print job ftes V Request Job Name for each print job Setting of PIN Enter 4 dote Personal ID Number PIN Enter 4 digits Use numbers 0 9 een OK Cancel c Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK 6 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box 7 Print the document The document is stored on the hard disk drive One copy is printed for checking 8 After checking the proof print or delete if incorrect the remaining copies of the document Use the procedures given below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 374 Proof and Print Printing Copies 1 2 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter your personal ID number Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed Press the SELECT button to print the remaining copies of the document NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online help for Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 375 Proof and Print Deleting Copies If the proof is not ready for printing the job must be deleted
353. r Overy r Color mode Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching Color Simulation None 7 m Rendering Intent 4 Perceptual Advanced Default cows ee Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 252 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Color Matching Rendering Intents When a document is printed a conversion takes place from the document s color space to the printer color space The rendering intents are essentially a set of rules that determine how this color conversion takes place The printer driver provides the rendering intents listed below Auto Best choice for printing general documents Perceptual Best choice for printing photographs Compresses the source gamut into the printer s gamut while maintaining the overall appearance of an image This option attempts to simulate RGB color Saturation Best choice for printing bright and saturated colors if you don t necessarily care how accurate the colors are This makes it the recommended choice for graphs charts diagrams etc Maps fully saturated colors in the source gamut to fully saturated colors in the printer s gamut Relative Colorimetric Good for proofing CMYK color images on a desktop printer Much like Absolute Colorimetric except that it scales the source white to the usually paper white Unlike Absolute Colorimetric
354. r to Windows ICM matching See Using ICC Profiles on page 254 No Color Matching Use this option to switch off all printer color matching No color correction occurs when selected This option is good when other matching regimens are used specifically if you select a Color Simulation option Print in Grayscale This option prints all documents as monochrome No color prints The printer interprets all colors as a variation of grays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 249 Color Matching Color Control Method OKI Color Matching PostScript This is OKI s proprietary color matching system and affects RGB data only This is the default setting It provides the fastest best color matching for your printer Under Color Setting use the drop down list to select the type to be used Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay r Color mode Color Control Method Color Matching M Color Simulation None X Color Setting 3 rge Auto User Setting C Glossy C Matte Advanced Default OK Cancel Apply Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 250 Color Matching Color Control Method OKI Color Matching PostScript Color Settings Monitor 6500k Auto Optimized for printing general documents when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Mo
355. r 8 5 x 11in IM ti P arpo mi Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 416 NOTE If Printer Setting is selected make sure the printer has been set to the correct media type A Warning may appear indicating a setting conflict If it does click OK The driver automatically corrects the problem 6 Click the Paper Feed Options button 7 Make any other selections 8 Click OK Paper feed options Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 417 9 Click OK twice Close the Printers dialog box Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT Printer Drivers 418 Network Printer Status Utility Available on TCP IP network connection only The Network Printer Status utility is available if your administrator has installed it The printer driver Properties dialog box changes anew Status tab is added an Option button is added to the Device Option tab This utility allows you to view but not change the status of the following on the Status ta
356. r Form setting Form Name Stationery zl Defined Forms NOTE The Form Name is a random name of your selection 7 Click OK 8 To continue to add files to the overlay if required repeat steps 5 through 8 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 488 9 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name s Click Add to add the overlay s to the list under Active Overlay To select more than one overlay hold the CTRL key while clicking on each name Setting of Overlay L2 1x Disable Overlay x Active Overlay Max 4 Pages First Page Logo First Page EN Defined Overlay Max 32 Pages Address First Page Logo First Page Mew Edit Delete OK Cancel 10 At the top of the dialog box use the drop down list to select Use Overlay Click OK 11 Click OK to close the Default dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 489 Overlays Defining Overlays PCL 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click Document Defaults 3 Click the Job Options tab 4 Click the Overlay button Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 490 5 To define an overlay click the Define Overlays button Defined Overlays Add Apply Remove QveleyName OO Dya Print on Pages alPages m Custom Pages Se E
357. r at the set interval time Acquire a Log Acquire a print log saved in the printer Setting the Time Set the present time in the printer Define Fees Set up and select fees Properties Set the printer properties a Before running select the subject printer from the Printer Tree on the left side of the window b Select Log Menu Refresh Display to update the information on the log pane after having run this menu c Ifthe printer has been switched on and off the correct time will not set in the printer until the next time printer logs are acquired You need only do this if the printer has been switched on and off in between acquisition of logs Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 659 Server Software Pull Down Menus Log Menu Display Logs Change the display from Total to Logs Display Total Change the display to Total per Printer Account ID or Month Export Report Export the required fields for the report macro in a Logs csv file Export Logs Export the log as a csv file Export Total Export totals as a csv file by Printer Account ID or Month Delete the log Delete the selected log Display Details Switches back and forth between displaying only the default items in the log and displaying the entire detailed list of items in the log Display Export Item Select the items to be shown or export
358. r in which the paper trays are used during Automatic Tray Switching The factory defaults for these settings are Automatic Tray Switching is ON Tray Sequence is DOWN Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 49 Loading Paper Paper Out Use paper from next available tray Automatic Tray Switching Turn on or off Press MENU until PRINT MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or 1 until AUTO TRAY SWITCH displays Press VALUE either or 1 until the desired setting displays Press SELECT Press ONLINE The printer goes online ONLINE displays aoa h whNnd Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 50 Loading Paper Paper Out Use paper from next available tray Automatic Tray Switching Set the sequence of use 1 Make sure Automatic Tray Switching is ON See Turn the feature on or off on page 57 Press MENU until PRINT MENU displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or 1 until TRAY SEQUENCE displays Press VALUE either or 1 to select the desired setting Choices are down up and paper feed tray The factory default for this setting is DOWN Press SELECT 7 Press ONLINE The printer goes online ONLINE displays a Rk ON o Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 51 Loading Paper Choosing the Paper Tray Paper Feed NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your comput
359. r name from the default value Note the new name for later use 6 Make sure the printer being used is highlighted in the lower window of the Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 390 7 Select the Project menu Choose Send Project Files to Printer This downloads the file to the printer If the file was downloaded successfully Command Issued displays 8 Close the Storage Device Manager Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 391 Defining Overlays PostScript 1 Click Start Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Job Options tab 4 Click the Overlay button Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 392 5 Click the New button Define Overlays 6 In the Overlay Name list enter the file name of the overlay Select the pages where you want the overlay to print NOTE The Overlay Name must be EXACTLY the same as the file name you noted in the previous section This is the name under which the file is stored on the printers hard disk drive It is case sensitive Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 393 7 Under Form setting in the drop down list enter or select a form name Click Add Overlay Name ko s S Print on Pages Fite o m Custom Page
360. r to the custom paper size before use Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 449 Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 450 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Setup tab under Media in the Size drop down list select User Defined Size The Set Free Size dialog box appears Job Options Color J User Defined Size 215 9 x 27 v Automatically Select el NOTE You may see a Warning dialog box indicating a conflict If you do click OK The driver automatically makes the needed changes to correct for the conflict Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 451 4 Select the unit Enter the width and length measurements Custom page sizes range Width 3 to 872 inches 89 to 216 mm Length
361. rays Tray number paper size 114 Paper trays Weight setting Media Menu 91 Paper Type and Print Quality 70 Automatic detection 70 Bond 91 Card stock 91 Change settings 70 effect on double sided printing 72 73 duplex double sided print ing 69 72 73 Exit Path 69 72 73 Paper Exit exit path 72 73 Paper Feed 72 73 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 766 single sided printing 72 73 Face down 72 73 Face Up 72 73 Letterhead 91 MP tray 72 73 92 Printer driver 71 Rear exit 72 73 Recycled 91 Rough 91 Selecting 70 Settings 52 67 70 Top exit 72 73 Transparencies 91 Tray 172 73 Tray 272 73 Tray 372 73 Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Paper Weight and Print Quality 70 Auto 91 Automatic detection 70 91 by Paper Tray 91 Change settings 70 effect on double sided printing 72 73 duplex double sided print ing 72 73 Exit Path 72 73 Paper Exit exit path 72 73 Paper Feed 69 72 73 paper trays paper feed 72 73 single sided printing 72 73 stacker capacity Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Face down 72 73 Face Up 72 73 Heavy 72 73 91 Light 72 73 91 Medium 72 73 Medium Heavy 72 73 91 Medium Light 72 73 91 MP Tray 72 73 Multi purpose MP tray 92 Printer driver 71 Rear exit 72 73 Selecting 70 Top exit 72 73 Tray 172 73
362. ress the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the SELECT button The document prints It is deleted from the hard disk drive NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 290 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Deleting the confidential document before printing it 1 Press the MENU button to access the PRINT JOBS MENU Press the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you set above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the job from the printer NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the remaining copies of the document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 291 Hard Disk Drive PCL or PostScript Storing a Document Store to hard disk job spooling allows print
363. ress the SELECT button 2 Use the buttons on the printer control panel to enter the personal ID number you selected above 3 Press the VALUE button until ALL JOBS or the required job name is displayed 4 Press the CANCEL button to delete the remaining copies of the document 5 When the deletion confirmation message appears confirm by pressing the SELECT button NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 295 Overlays What are Overlays An overlay can be a combination of graphics fonts or text that is stored in the printer s flash memory or on the hard disk optional and printed whenever required The result is similar to the Watermark feature but with the ability to be much more elaborate Overlays can be useful for tasks such as printing letterheads forms or invoices and should reduce the need for pre printed stationery Example of Using Overlays Suppose that you have created and stored three files in the printer using the Storage Device Manager the company logo the company address the company mission statement The Overlay feature allows these files to be incorporated into your document in various combinations depending on your requirements Executive Series 2426 Printer Family
364. riate PS driver Click the Preferences button Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 167 3 Click the Paper Quality tab Under Tray Selection in the Paper Source drop down list select Multi Purpose Tray E Printing Preferences Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay Tray Selection Paper Source Multi Purpose Tray O Black amp White Color Color Cancel 4 Click the Advanced button Under Paper Output in the Paper Size drop down list select Postscript Custom Page Size PostScript Custom Page Size Definition Custom Page Size Dimensions Unit width EE 3 00 8 50 Inch Height 17 00 6 00 47 24 ee oll Paper Feed Direction Short Edge First v Paper Type Cut Sheet Roll Feed Offsets Relative to Paper Feed Direction Perpendicular Direction ooo 0 00 0 00 Parallel Direction ooo 0 00 0 00 OK Cancel Restore Defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 168 5 Enter the Width and Heig
365. ries 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 360 a Select the required printing resolution under Quality Select Toner Saving if appropriate Click OK Print the document N Oo PostScript Driver PCL Driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 361 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PostScript or PCL Usage Restrictions NOTE Before you can perform duplex printing unit must be installed in the printer and enabled in the driver Standard paper sizes only Paper weight range 20 to 28 Ib US Bond 75 to 105 g m Paper must be loaded print side up Only Tray 1 optional Trays 2 and 3 and the High Capacity Feeder trays can be used for duplex printing The Multi Purpose MP tray cannot be used for duplex printing Duplexing cannot be used if Paper Weight is set to Ultra Heavy See Paper Media Weight and Type on page 70 Duplexing cannot be used if White Page Skip is set to ON See White page skip on page 101 PCR Emulation page 105 PPR Emulation and page 107 FX Emulation Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 362 NOTE To change the settings to apply to all jobs e Click Start gt Settings Printers Highlight the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for
366. roduction Curve TRC Plus darker Minus lighter See Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning on page 77 Adjusts DARK of Cyan Magenta Yellow or Black Toner Reproduction Curve TRC Plus darker Minus lighter See Adjust the Color Intensity Color Tuning on page 77 Adjusts Cyan Magenta Yellow or Black engine density The Darkness settings for each color are reflected as offset values additions to the corrections through the Adjust Density Toner Reproduction Curve TRC Compensation function Execute the printer performs an Auto Adjust Registration Perform when the printer is idle May not work if the printer is not idle Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 94 Item CYAN REGISTRATION FINE ADJUST MAGENTA REGISTRATION FINE ADJUST YELLOW REGISTRATION FINE ADJUST INK SIMULATION INK LIMIT Color Menu The default settings are bold Value 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 Off SWOP Dark Medium Light Description Use this to correct color misalignment when printing Adjusts the image registration of Cyan Magenta or Yellow CMY relative to Black K Adjustments are made in increments of 1 1200th of an inch 21 17 microns If you change the current setting to a more positive value the value increases Color registration moves DOWN the page in the opposite direction to th
367. rogram from the Menu Installer located on CD1 Features Provides real time status of all your printers to monitor and report printer usage manage consumables usage and replenishment Administrator interface to the system is via a standard web browser enabling you to check on printer status and compatible multi function devices from anywhere on the web Performs initial discovery and configuration of printing devices connected to network View groups of printers by list floorplan or maps Monitors devices over time including maintenance data and saves data for statistical reports Sends mail alerts of events affecting device functionality Generates reports on screen or in XHTML Excel and XML formats plus Text and CSV formats Integrates with Oki Data s on line web support Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide PrintSuperVision 730 Using Types of Users Guest Users A user without username can get basic information about devices such as type status and location of printing devices Standard Users in addition to guest user information standard users can get information about printing resources configure e mail alerts and get basic statistics reports Administrators Can manage devices maps alerts user accounts maintenance data and create comprehensive statistics reports Typical Usage Scenarios The network administrator in a large organization can get customized daily reports of the s
368. rol Front Panel Fuser cautions for handling 514 changing 514 FUSER UNIT MISSING message 523 Handling precautions 532 life expectancy 118 514 Paper jams 532 roller damaged 70 Fuser roller damaged 70 Fuser unit 514 part numbers 576 FX Emulation Menu 106 default settings 585 G Gateway address 111 German display language 98 Glossy paper Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Grain of Paper 74 Graphics applications vs office applications Windows 2000 238 Windows Me 98 95 327 Windows NT 424 Windows XP 143 Graphics eps files Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Graphics and monitor setting Windows XP 142 Graphics and monitor settings Windows 2000 237 251 Windows Me 98 95 326 340 Windows NT 423 437 Windows XP 156 Graphics office printing Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 Graphics PostScript Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 751 Graphics professional Windows 2000 PS 254 Windows Me 98 95 PS 344 Windows XP PS 159 Graphs Color matching Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Grayscale Printing Windows 2000 249 Windows Me 98 95 338 Windows NT 435 Windows XP 154 H Hard disk drive 562 0 partition PCL 620 1 partition Common 620 deleting a document Windows
369. rom a log 1 From the main Job Accounting window click the printer group for which you wish to set up the log display 2 Click Log Display Export Item Settings 3 Click one of the following selections to set the items to be displayed and the sequence in which they will be displayed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 703 Log Display Items Standard acquisition Log The following window appears Log Display Items V Loa No v Job amp ccount ID v User V Document Name v Fees V Total Sheets M Pages IJGWIT M Status Total Display Items Listing of totals for a registered printer The following window appears Total Display Items Group v Fees V Jobs M Sheets M Fages M Color M Mono V Printer Use Time Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 704 Log Export Items Items to be included in an exported log file The following window appears Log Export Items 20x Item List Log No Job Account ID User Document Name Fees Total Sheets Pages Down Status Cancel ELLE Default Total Export Items Items to be included in an exported file containing a listing of totals for a registered printer The following window appears Total Export Items ltem List Group Fees Jobs Sheets Pages Color Mona Bown Printer Use Time x Cancel
370. rough exit 531 Transfer belt 530 Paper Loading 42 47 48 49 50 51 52 Letterhead 42 47 Paper loading precautions 42 Paper out Automatically switch to next available paper tray 49 50 89 sequence of use 51 Paper Size 69 Double sided printing effect on 69 matching print job to tray 89 Paper Exit effect on 69 Paper Feed effect on 69 print data paper size doesn t match paper tray 89 Printer request 550 Printing one size onto another 90 Single sided printing effect on 69 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 764 PAPER SIZE ERROR message 524 Paper Size A4 69 Paper Size A5 69 Paper Size A6 69 Paper Size Automatic recognition 67 Paper Size B5 69 Paper Size Custom 67 69 89 Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Units of measure 92 length 92 width 92 Windows 2000 PCL 265 PS 261 Windows Me 98 95 PCL 355 PS 351 Windows NT PCL 449 PS 443 Windows XP PCL 170 PS 166 Paper Size Defaults Windows 2000 PCL 228 PS 223 Windows Me 98 95 PS or PCL 317 Windows NT PCL 414 PS 410 Windows XP PCL 133 PS 128 Paper Size effect on duplex double sided printing 69 Exit Path options 69 Paper Feed options 69 Paper Size Envelopes 69 Paper Size Error Messages 64 Paper Size Executive 69 Paper Size Face down 69 Paper Size Face Up 69 Paper Size Fit to Letter FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Paper Size Legal 13 69 Paper Size Legal 14 69 Paper Size Length FX emulation
371. rs and printers is often the main reason that printed colors do not match the colors displayed on screen Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 324 Factors that Affect Color Printing Viewing Conditions A document can look very different under various lighting conditions For example the colors may look different when viewed standing next to a sunlit window compared to how they look under standard office fluorescent lighting Printer Driver Color Settings The driver settings for Manual color can change the appearance of a document There are several options available to help match the printed colors with those displayed on screen These options are explained in subsequent sections of this User Manual Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 325 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Settings The brightness and contrast controls on your monitor can change how your document looks on screen Additionally your monitor color temperature influences how warm or cool the colors look NOTE Several of the Color Matching options make reference to your monitor s Color Temperature Many monitors allow you to adjust the color temperature through their control panels There are several settings found on a typical monitor 5000k Warmest yellowish lighting typically used in graphics arts environments 6500k Cooler approximates d
372. rum life is approximately 23 000 sheets of letter size media This assumes a typical office environment where 20 of print jobs are one page emails 30 are 3 page documents containing only words no graphics and 50 are print runs of 15 pages or more CAUTION Never expose the image drum to direct sunlight Never expose the image drum to light for more than 5 minutes Never touch the surface of the green drum inside the image drum unit 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 505 3 Remove the appropriate image drum toner cartridge from the printer 4 Make sure the replacement image drum is the correct color and remove it from the packaging 5 Remove the protective sheet from the new image drum Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 506 6 Install the new image drum in the printer 7 Push the tab inwards and remove the blanking plate from the image drum 8 Install a new toner cartridge See Changing the Toner Cartridge on page 498 9 Close the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 507 Changing the Transfer Belt When the transfer belt reaches the end of its product life CHANGE BELT UNIT is displayed in the control panel Transfer belt life depends on the number of sheets per print job When single sheets are printed transfer belt life is reduced
373. s Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected time When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 58 Power Turn Off the Printer Hard Disk Drive not installed Shutdown Sequence CAUTION NEVER turn the printer off while it is printing After turning the printer off wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again This allows the internal power levels to drop Turning on too soon could cause the printer to malfunction 1 Use the on off switch 2 and turn OFF the printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 59 Power Turn Off the Printer Hard Disk Drive installed Shutdown Sequence CAUTION NEVER turn the printer off while it is printing If the optional hard disk has been installed the following procedure MUST BE FOLLOWED before turning off the printer This protects any data that is stored on the hard disk Follow this procedure every time the printer is turned off for any reason After turning the printer off wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again This allows the internal power levels to drop Turning on too soon could cause the printer to malfunction Use Power Save to avoid turning off the printer Refer to POWER SAVE Mode on page 57 If you MUST turn off the prin
374. s Load this program from the Menu Installer located on CD1 NOTE The Swatch Utility does not guarantee that the printer prints the same color as displayed on your monitor Consider the displayed color as a reference The printer may not be able to print the exact color that you desire Your software may not be able to match colors using the swatch information You may need to use other matching methods The color swatch samples do not show all the colors your printer can print Other factors influence how you see color the color and finish of the paper ambient light even the color surrounding the one you are looking at Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Color Swatch Utility 593 Color Swatch Utility Printing Color Swatches NOTE The color swatch samples do not show all the colors your printer can print The Swatch Utility does not guarantee that the printer prints the same color as displayed on your monitor Consider the displayed color as a reference The printer may not be able to print the exact color that you desire 1 Install the utility from CD1 using the OKI Menu Installer Windows 2 Click Start gt Programs Color Swatch Color Swatch Utility 3 A swatch page displays showing commonly used colors 4 Select print to print sample pages watch Utility x File Help 3 233 0235 RSS DOE X31 X102 PET 2 253 EIS 3 208 ENTE A102 giis c10 Hn za Go Go 1 2
375. s OO Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 r Form setting Form Name Stationery zl Bee NOTE The Form Name is a random name of your selection 8 Click OK 9 To continue to add files to the overlay if required repeat steps 5 through 8 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 394 10 Under Defined Overlay highlight the overlay name s Click Add to add the overlay s to the list under Active Overlay To select more than one overlay hold the CTRL key while clicking on each name Overlay 21x MAX 4 Overlay Group Page Logo First Page Address All Pages Edd Delete Defined Overlay MAX 32 Page First Page All Pages 11 At the top of the dialog box use the drop down list to select Use Overlay Click OK 12 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 395 Defining Overlays PCL Click Start Settings Printers Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties Click the Job Options tab Click the Overlay button Ao NA J HEmovE Name 0 0 0 Pages 0 0 0 Hest renin Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 396 5 To define an overlay click the Define Overlays button Defined Overlays Pages 1 1 Add Apply
376. s in the PCL driver 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the appropriate printer name Click Document Defaults 3 Click the Color tab Setup Job Options Color Color Mode C Manual Color C Monochrome Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 430 4 Under Color Mode click Manual Color 5 Under Color Setting click Natural Monitor 6500K F hb E ow HE p Eg ur Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 431 6 Select the method you wish to use Monitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics Monitor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For some photographs other settings may be better depending on the subjects and the conditions under which they were taken sRGB Optimized for matching specific colors such as a company logo color The colors within the printer s color gamut are printed without any modification and only colors that fall outside the printabl
377. s is the default setting It provides the fastest best color matching for your printer Under Color Setting use the drop down list to select the type to be used Advanced Job Options Color m Color Mode Color Control Color Matching Color Simulation None m Color Setting p Black Finish Monitor 6500K Perceptual ded Auto C Glossy User Seti E tar Saiting C Matte Advanced Default F Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 436 Color Matching Color Control Method OKI Color Matching PostScript Color Settings Monitor 6500k Perceptual Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K This is best for printing photographic images Monitor 6500k Vivid Optimized for printing bright colors when using a monitor with a color temperature of 6500K Ideal for office graphics and text Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce brightest colors Monitor 9300k Optimized for printing photographs when using a monitor with a color temperature of 9300K Digital Camera Optimized for printing photographs taken with a digital camera This tends to produce prints with lighter and brighter colors For some photographs other settings may be better depending on the subjects and the conditions under which they were taken Vivid or Digital Camera settings produce bright
378. s to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 380 Hard Disk Drive PCL or PostScript Storing a Document Store to hard disk job spooling allows print jobs to be prepared and stored on the hard disk for printing on demand This is good for forms generic memos letterhead stationery etc NOTE The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data DISK FULL is displayed and only one copy printed If the software application being used has a collate print option this must be turned OFF for Store to Hard Disk to operate correctly Store to Hard Disk may not be available in some software applications Open the file in your application Select File Print In the Print dialog box click the appropriate driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent C N Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 381 4 Click the Job Options tab Under Job Type select Store to HDD PostScript Driver PCL Driver NOTE If you ve already stored a document on the printer s hard disk drive and want to store another one click the PIN button and enter a new Job Name 5 Under Job Name Setting enter a job name of up to 16 characters
379. sable Color Printing a E lt Back Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 670 5 Set up the printer Printer Name Type in a printer name containing up to 32 characters Printer Group If the printer is to be included in a group select the group here NOTE Groups must first be defined using Printer Manages multiple printers as a group in the main Job Accounting window See page 665 Acquire Logs You can designate the time to acquire logs in one of two ways by an interval of up to 24 hours If this value exceeds 24 hours it is set to 24 hours or by up to five preset times per day Select Interval then click Change Time to set times Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 671 Fees In the drop down box select a fee definition to be used Some fee settings are available with defaults To custom define settings for the printer click Define fees and then click Add in the Defined Fees window The following window appears Define fees 2l xj Name oU Belt fuser use amount Finisher Printer Use Time Size Tray Media Type Pages Toner use amount Drum use amount Page Sheet U Cancel Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 672 Fees Define Fees window Pages Tab Page Select to set a fee to be charged f
380. ss the CANCEL button to delete the remaining copies of the document 5 When the deletion confirmation message appears confirm by pressing the SELECT button NOTE An alternative method of printing or deleting the stored document is to use the Storage Device Manager Please refer to the online Help for the Storage Device Manager software Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 198 Overlays What are Overlays An overlay can be a combination of graphics fonts or text that is stored in the printer s flash memory or on the hard disk optional and printed whenever required The result is similar to the Watermark feature but with the ability to be much more elaborate Overlays can be useful for tasks such as printing letterheads forms or invoices and should reduce the need for pre printed stationery Example of Using Overlays Suppose that you used the Storage Device Manager to create and store three files in the printer the company logo the company address the company mission statement The Overlay feature allows these files to be incorporated into your document in various combinations depending on your requirements Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows XP Operation 199 Creating Overlays 1 Create the document that you wish to use for Overlay printing e g a letterhead 2 Use the printer driver to generate a PRN file print file 3 Use
381. stripes on output black 540 white 540 toner rubs off output 543 White doesn t print white Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Print queue High priority 89 List 86 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 771 Print resolution 572 and slow printing 553 Print Menu setting 90 Print speed heavy weight paper 74 laid paper 74 monochrome 90 specifications 573 textured paper 74 Print start position 573 FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Print start times 572 Print Status LCD panel 63 Printer access 644 Components 26 Control panel 63 Cover right side 529 CPU specifications 572 depth 574 dimensions 574 does not go ONLINE 551 does not print 539 height 574 life expectancy 574 Location 25 measurements 574 moving 29 LED head restraint 30 operating environment 574 operating specifications 574 packing materials 543 Ports 61 print method 572 Printer does not print 78 registering 651 Settings 82 Shipping the printer 29 Space around 25 specifications 572 storage specifications 574 tracking usage 644 Unpacking 23 weight 574 width 574 Printer Menu Settings factory defaults resetting to 116 See Menu Printer Settings Printer does not print 52 67 70 128 133 223 228 317 410 414 Printer drivers 24 Choosing Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Color settings Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 325 Windows NT 42
382. t installed please check the Regional Setting If you wish to set to the system standard check Set as system default local under Regional Setting Printing with Network Menu s PRINT SETTING is handled as an unregistered client job and will not be recognized as a local print job PostScript printer drivers Macintosh do not store document names in the log In applications that create their own PostScript codes when using the Windows PS driver the Job Accounting command Job Account ID user name will not be output Examples of such applications include Adobe PageMaker and CorelDraw when the Use PPD check box is checked in the Print dialog box If you print from Win2000 Client to Win2000 Shared Printer Job account Mode already set you have to remove the check from the Enable advanced printing features under the Advanced tab in the shared printer s Properties Removing the check however will disable both the Booklet PCL and Page Order PS features Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 727 Uninstalling Print Job Accounting Uninstall the Server Software 1 Select a printer in the left pane of the Server Software 2 Select Start end log from the Printer menu Important At this stage the Server Software stops acquiring print logs from the printer at the set interval time However the printer will continue logging until it is deleted Be sure t
383. t a sample of an overlay for review 1 2 Under Defined Overlays click the name Click Test Print To add more overlays to the list 1 2 A Click Define overlays In the Define overlays dialog box fill in the appropriate information Click Close Click Print using active overlays Click Print Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 633 Overlays Windows 2000 PCL Editing 1 2 A oN OU Click Start Settings Printers Right click the Oki PCL printer icon then click Printing Preferences The Oki Printing Preferences dialog box appears Click the Overlay tab Click Define overlays The Define overlays dialog box appears Under Defined overlays click the overlay to be edited Make your changes then click Apply Click Close Click OK and close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 634 Overlays Windows 2000 PCL Deleting 1 2 Click Start Settings Printers Right click the Oki PCL printer icon then click Printing Preferences The Oki Printing Preferences dialog box appears Click the Overlay tab Click Define Overlays The Define Overlays dialog box appears Under Defined overlays click the overlay to be deleted Click Remove then click Close Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Dev
384. t for color 93 94 DHCP BOOTP 111 Diagrams Color matching Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 of Control Front Panel buttons 64 display 63 lights 63 of Interface Ports 61 of loading envelopes 48 of loading letterhead 47 Digital camera Color matching Windows 2000 246 251 Windows Me 98 95 335 340 Windows NT 432 437 Windows XP 151 156 Input Profiles Windows 2000 PS 254 Windows Me 98 95 PS 344 Windows XP PS 159 Dimensions of printer 574 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 746 DIMMO 99 DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED message 523 DISK FULL 523 Overlays 480 630 Windows 2000 297 Windows Me 98 95 387 Windows XP 200 Proof and Print Windows 2000 283 Windows Me 98 95 373 Windows NT 465 Windows XP 187 Secure Print Windows 2000 287 Windows Me 98 95 377 Windows NT 469 Windows XP 191 Store to Hard Disk Windows 2000 292 Windows Me 98 95 381 Windows NT 473 Windows XP 195 Disk Maintenance Menu 113 default settings 590 Display language list of available 98 messages on See Messages Disposal of toner 500 Documentation Manuals 24 Double sided duplex printing See Duplex double sided printing dpi dots per inch 90 Drivers printer 24 Choosing Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Default in Windows Windows 2000 215 Windows Me 98 95 311 Windows NT 402 Windows XP 120 Paper size 68 Paper type 71 Paper weight 71 Drum
385. t profile 7 Select the desired Rendering Intent see Rendering Intents on page 342 Type in a name for the profile Click OK The new name appears in the Setting Name drop down list under ICC Profile Setting 8 Repeat steps 5 7 for each ICC profile you wish to define 9 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 345 Color Matching Color Control Method PostScript Driver Windows ICM Color Matching PCL or PostScript ICM is the color management system built into Windows Affects RGB data only Can be associated with either the PCL or PS driver Windows ICM uses ICC profiles for your monitor and printer These profiles describe the colors that your device is capable of reproducing ICC profiles can be associated with your printer via the Color Management tab of the printer driver Depending on how you have installed the printer driver the color profiles may already be associated with the driver To associate ICC Color Profiles with the printer driver 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Color Management tab 4 Under Color Profiles currently associated with this printer you should see the names of profiles that match your printer model If you do not see any profiles associated with the driver click Add and locate the ICC profiles for your
386. taller located on CD1 How to Install The Oki LPR Utility supports TCP IP Your network administrator must set up an IP address and TCP IP properties for your printer 1 To install the utility insert the Oki CD1 into the CD ROM drive If CD does not AutoPlay click Start Run Browse Browse to your CD ROM driver and double click Install exe then click OK 2 Click Network Software Installation Config LPR Utility Follow the on screen instructions Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Oki LPR Utility 737 Oki LPR Status Box ea L PRAEMGOCO ME E Fie Remote Print Option Help Printer Queue Status Finish Queue The Oki LPR Utility Status Box displays the following information e Printers Names of added printers You can add up to 30 printers e Status LPR Utility status empty connecting sending paused checking status not connected e Finish Number of completed jobs Queue Number of jobs waiting to be printed Additional Information For help using the Oki LPR Utility click on HELP in the program Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Oki LPR Utility 738 Index Symbols diskO Hard disk drive PS partition 620 Flash0 Flash Memory PCL 620 CHANGE DRUM message 505 TONER LOW message 498 e DRUM NEAR LIFE message 522 wes EMPTY 522 NEAR END message 522 Numerics 0 Zero character FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 104 0 partition
387. tatus of all printers including usage reports User accounts can be configured so that a person in each department can manage their local printers The system can be set to alert the local user and the administrator of problems The administrator can log into the PrintSuperVision system from any client machine and manage printers on different sites looking at a map view to see instantly the status of all the printers PrintSuperVision allows the administrator to track the cost of the printers e tracks maintenance advises when to replace consumables based on current printer usage Oki color printers Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide PrintSuperVision 731 System Requirements Server Software Pentium 75 64MB or better with CD support running Windows 98 with Microsoft Personal Web Server Version available for free download from Microsoft as Option Pack 4 0 Windows NT4 Workstation SP6 0a Microsoft Personal Web Server Version available for free download from Microsoft as Option Pack 4 0 Windows 2000 or NT4 Server SP6 0a Microsoft IIS avail able for free download from Microsoft as Option Pack 4 0 Client Software Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 01 or above Netscape Navigator 4 0 or above Recommended minimum screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pix els Additional Information For more information click on Help in the PrintSuperVision program Executive Series 2426 Printer Fam
388. ted it out click the PIN button and enter a new job name Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 287 a Enter a job name of up to 16 characters under Job Name If required select Request Job Name for each print job b Type in a four digit personal ID number from 0000 to 7777 Click OK PostScript Driver PCL Driver Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 288 4 Enter the number of copies If required select Collate PostScript Driver PCL Driver f Print Ei General Layout Paper Qualty Job Options Color Overlay General Setup Job Options Color r Quality Job Type r Quality Job Type C Normal C Normal ay Proof and Print Secure Pint dum je ET thy tore to ud Store to HDD PIN Copies fi0 F Collate Copies 10 F Collate EC G Fine Quality T0 C Normal eeu C Fast T Toner Saving C Fast Toner saving p Sede p Orientation 1o 2 tenera T 180 a C Landscape 180 us Watermark Overlay Font Advanced 5 Click Print The document is stored on the printer s hard disk 6 Go to the printer Use the front panel to print out the document See below Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 289 Secure Printing Printing Confidential Documents Printing at the Printer 1 P
389. ter 1 Press MENU until SHUTDOWN MENU displays 2 Press SELECT 3 Press SELECT again to begin the shutdown sequence 4 When PLEASE POWER OFF SHUTDOWN COMPLETED displays use the on off switch to turn off the printer Wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again This allows the internal power levels to drop Turning on too soon could cause the printer to malfunction Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 60 Interfaces Location Diagram a o e i 2 Your printer has three interfaces 1 Parallel 2 USB 3 Network Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 61 Interfaces Parallel For direct connection to a PC This port requires a bi directional IEEE 1384 compliant parallel cable USB For connection to a PC running Windows 98 or above not Windows 95 upgraded to Windows 98 or Macintosh This port requires a cable conforming to USB version 1 1 or above The printer may not operate properly if a USB compatible device is connected at the same time as other USB compatible machines When connecting multiple printers of the same type they appear as 2 3 etc These numbers depend on the order of connecting or turning on each printer Network For network cable connection NOTE Administrator s authority is required when installing a network connection See your printed Software Installation Guide for information on
390. ters Right click the appropriate printer name Select Properties Follow steps 3 etc below More tabs appear in the Properties screen for setting defaults Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 273 Duplex Printing Printing on Both Sides of the Paper PCL Using 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Setup button 3 Under 2 Sided Printing select Long Edge or Short Edge 4 Click Print ax General Setup Job Options Color m Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in Source Automatically Select Paper Feed Options m Finishing Mode Options r 2 Sided Printing Long Edge A 4 m Driver Settings Untitled Add Remove Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 274 Printing Booklets PostScript NOTES You must have the duplex unit installed and enabled in order to print booklets Not available on some network connections See the Help file Some software applications may not support booklet printing The right to left setting allows a booklet to be printed for right to left reading which is used in some languages Important Booklet printing with the PostScript driver is restricted to two 2 pages per sheet Examples
391. tetas 422 Printer Driver Color Settings eee 422 Monitor Settings seso 1 epeeete ei eei P tenebre epo 423 How your Software Application Displays Color 424 Paper Type iin ERI REUTERS RR ERROR 424 Color Matching uui noui RE etti EEEE 425 Choosing a Method ete tete ei reed ird 425 RGB or CMYK sea aied etd des ase RARI ns 426 Matching Photographs eese nennen 427 Matching Specific Colors cece cece eeeeseeeeceseeseeseeeseeeseeseenseeaeeaes 428 Example Company logo eee 428 Printing Vivid Colors sessies iinn neisiu 429 POL Driver ede attt ue eee 430 Print Color Swatch Utility eese 433 PostScript Driver is eerte rt i tune 434 OKI Color Matching eese eere 436 PostScript nine esc onim a aa een ite etd 436 PostScript Color Matching 0 eee cece ceeeeeeeseeseesseeeeeseeneeeseens 438 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet sess 440 N Up Printing i dide Re lai eet 440 PostScript aiseee issnin esaa e he e e tetra 440 Io p Pr E 441 Custom Page S1Z6S 4 eret re RA e ate e n E E 443 PostScript screamin de od das e e IR d ER vts 443 PCT iit etuer er oial eiteiemidue ite ie 449 Print Resol tion seris tere ee e et oS D RETE VER RUE 454 PCT or PostScript aceon ah ttp tenen 454 Duplex Printing eoe ene eee ads eee A 456 Prin
392. th 3 to 8 inches 89 to 216 mm Length 5 to 14 inches 127 to 356 mm Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 265 Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit is open and the paper support is extended Paper is stacked in reverse order Tray capacity is about 100 sheets depending on paper weight Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 266 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate PCL driver Click the Setup tab 3 Under Media in the Size drop down list select User Defined Size The Set Free Size dialog box appears E print xt General Setup Job Options Color m Media Size User Defined Size 215 9 x 2 Source Automatically Select 7 Paper Feed Options m Finishing Mode Standard N up z Options r 2 Sided Printing None be Ja r Driver Settings Untied Add Remove User Defined Size 215 9 x 279 4mm Default NOTE You may see a Warning dialog box indicating a conflict If you do click OK The driver automatically makes the needed changes to correct for the conflict Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s
393. the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Setup tab under Finishing Mode select Poster Print Setup Job Options Color Media Size Letter 8 5 x 11in x Source Automatically Select x Paper Feed Options Finishing Mode r Driver Settings Untitled x dETmBYE Add Letter 8 5 x 11in Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 493 Click Options and enter the configuration details Click OK twice Print the document PosterPrint Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 494 Maintenance Adding Paper The display indicates when the number of sheets of paper in any paper tray falls below 30 1 Remove the paper tray 2 Remove the remaining sheets of paper 3 Refill the tray with up to a ream 500 sheets of paper Replace the sheets removed in step 2 This guarantees that the oldest paper is used first Doing this helps preventing paper jams Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Maintenance 495 4 Check that the paper guides and rear stopper are correct for the size of paper being used 5 Close the paper tray gently
394. the information on demand Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Printer Drivers 321 Windows Me 98 95 Operation NOTE Most applications allow the printer properties to be accessed from within the document print dialog box This section explains how to set up color printing and how to use the printer s features Printer s features covered in this section include N up printing see page 347 Custom page sizes see page 351 Selecting print resolution see page 360 Duplex printing see page 362 Printing Booklets see page 365 Watermarks see page 369 Collating see page 371 Proof and Print see page 373 Secure print printing confidential documents see page 377 Storing files to the hard disk drive see page 381 Using overlays see page 386 Printing posters see page 399 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 322 Factors that Affect Color Printing The PCL and PostScript printer drivers supplied with your printer provide several controls for changing the color output For general use the default driver settings produce good results for most documents Many applications have their own color settings and these may override the settings in the printer driver Please refer to the documentation for your software application for details on how that particular program s color management functions If you wish to manually adjust the
395. tialization of Hard Disk and Flash Memory This controls whether or not the Hard Disk Drive if installed and the Printer Flash if installed can be initialized If initialization is inhibited a client cannot delete the log using the printer s front panel Use this in order to prevent the logs stored in the printer from being deleted Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 683 Auto Export Logs Auto Export Logs Do not automatically export Sets whether or not and how log data will automatically be exported when it is acquired Do not automatically export Logs are not automatically exported Automatically export logs Automatically exports logs in the format you select see page 703 Automatically export logs for report Automatically exports logs in a format which works with the Microsoft Excel macro reports see page 707 Mail logs to administrator Automatically exports logs in the format you select see page 703 then sends an email to the Administrator with a copy of the log data attached at the end of the day following the Closing date you specify Mail logs for report to administrator Automatically exports logs in a format which works with the Microsoft Excel macro reports see page 707 then sends an email to the Administrator with a copy of the report attached at the end of the day following the Closing date you specify
396. ting daylight monitor settings Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 sunlight vs fluorescent Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 325 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 Lightness adjustment for color 596 Lights Attention 63 Control Front Panel diagram 63 Ready 56 63 Line length FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Line pitch FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Line spacing FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 755 Lines lines per page 90 minimum width and pen width adjust 102 printing fine lines 102 Lines on output 113 mm intervals 540 44 94 mm intervals 540 See also Print Quality Problems evenly spaced 540 White horizontal 115 LOAD message 524 Loading paper 42 47 48 49 50 51 52 precautions 42 Location 25 Logos Matching colors Windows 2000 242 Windows Me 98 95 331 Windows NT 428 Windows XP 147 Logs printing information 651 Long edge duplex double sided printing Print Menu setting 89 Long edge feed 92 LOW TONER menu setting 98 LPT WRITE ERROR message 548 M Maintenance Fuser unit replacing 514 Image drum cleaning 115 Image drum changing 505 LED head cleaning 517 Toner cartridge changing 498 Transfer belt changing 508 Maintenance Menu 116 default settings 592 Manual paper feed Cautions for using 55 Multi purpose MP tray 55 MANUAL TIMEOUT display interval of request for paper 97 Manuals 24
397. ting on Both Sides of the Paper esse 456 PostScript RERO RU eased ESTER ees 456 PCL iip etat y E Go PO DO He eas 458 Printing Booklets 5 5 i aei etit t oe eodein 460 PCL Only 5 9 d rg tea a aer elei 460 Printing Watermarks eese nennen nennen 462 PCL Only en toten ne eu prt e rn 462 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 11 Collating act ere t o tir Penes 464 PCIE ot POSISCHDU 5 iHe eei ete eie 464 Proof and Print i ideo ena eet eter 465 PCL or PostScript ee e eec PME cun 465 Secure Printing e tete inet TO EE 469 Printing Confidential Documents sese 469 PCT r POSSCEHDU ient rp tte speed pi tte 469 Hard Disk Drives 45 e RR RERO ee e UE 473 PCLE Ot P sts eri Dtm iain e tr tr ee ied 473 OVverla ys ioitcote ete net Ret eee e tet 478 Whatare Overlays isis uir ert o e eed 478 When to Use Overlays cece eiai e a E aa 478 Example of Using Overlays eese 478 Creating Files for Overlays sess 479 Requirements Tor Using 5 oem ederet tinens 480 Read This First xeu den itn Bese EH tea 480 Hardware Software Requirements esee 480 Required Actions eene bna bee e vede 480 Storage Requirements eroe eate eye erred 481 Locations eee ae Ue D e RE 481 Maximum Available Space sese 481 Creating documents to use as overlays sseeeeee 482 jue
398. tings Monitor 6500K Perceptual Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 Monitor 6500K Vivid Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 Monitor 9300K Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 Color Settings Photographs Windows 2000 251 Windows Me 98 95 340 Windows NT 437 Windows XP 156 Color Swatch Utility 593 594 596 Color swatches matching monitor Windows 2000 247 Windows Me 98 95 336 Windows NT 433 Windows XP 152 print sample 594 Swatch Utility Read me File 596 Color Temperature default Windows 2000 237 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide 744 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Windows XP 142 Color Tuning 77 78 79 80 93 Color Tuning Pattern Printing 78 Sample 79 Dark by color 94 Darkness Density by color 94 Highlight by color 93 Mid tone by color 94 See also Color Intensity Color Utilities 24 Color Adjusting Color swatches 596 Colors See also Color matching COMMUNICATION ERROR message 523 Company logos Absolute Colorimetric Windows 2000 253 Windows Me 98 95 342 Windows NT 439 Windows XP 158 Color matching Windows 2000 242 246 251 Windows Me 98 95 331 335 340 Windows NT 428 432 437 Windows XP 147 151 156 Components 26 Composite Black 41 101 Computer settings vs Printer settings 52 67 70 128 133 223 228 317 410 414 Condensed fonts 103 Confident
399. to that color NOTE The RGB color displayed on your monitor may not necessarily match what was printed on the color swatch If this is the case it is probably due to the difference between how your monitor and printer reproduce color Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 336 Color Matching Color Matching Options PostScript Driver The PostScript driver offers several different methods of controlling the color output of the printer Color Matching Option RGB data CMYK data Oki Color Matching PostScript Color Matching Windows ICM Matching Using ICC Profiles Yes Yes Yes Yes a Not Windows NT 4 0 Setting Options Manually 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Color tab Details Color General Job Options r Color Mode Color Control OKI Color Matching Color Management Device Options Pe User Setting Color Simulation None z r Color Setting Black Finish Auto Moniter 500K Auto x Glossy Matte No Yes No No Fonts Setup PostScript Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 337 4 Under Color Mode use the Color Control drop down list to select one of the following Color Control Methods a OKI Color Matching This is OKI s proprietary color matching system and affects
400. ton 64 ONLINE message 56 524 OPEN UPPER COVER message 524 Options Duplex unit 566 Internal hard disk 562 Memory 555 Paper trays 567 Out of paper automatic switching 89 sequence of use 89 switch to next available tray 50 sequence of use 51 Output devices Output Profiles Windows 2000 254 Windows Me 98 95 344 Windows XP 159 output doesn t match monitor display Windows 2000 236 237 Windows Me 98 95 324 326 Windows NT 422 423 Windows XP 141 142 Profiles Windows 2000 PS 254 Windows Me 98 95 PS 344 Windows XP PS 159 Output tray Face Up Capacity Windows 2000 224 232 262 266 Windows Me 98 95 319 352 356 Windows NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 761 Overlays ID number 620 Overlays Creating Windows 2000 297 Windows Me 98 95 387 Windows NT 479 629 Windows XP 200 Overlays Defining Windows 2000 PCL 306 PS 302 Windows Me 98 95 PCL 396 PS 392 Windows NT PCL 490 642 PS 486 641 Windows XP PCL 209 PS 205 Overlays Description Windows 2000 296 Windows Me 98 95 386 Windows NT 478 628 Windows XP 199 Overlays Documents to use as Windows 2000 PCL 298 PS 299 Windows Me 98 95 PCL 388 PS 389 Windows NT PCL 482 PS 483 Windows XP PCL 201 PS 202 Overlays Downloading Windows 2000 300 Windows Me 98 95 390 Windows NT 484 Windows XP 203 Overlays Example Windows 2000 296 Windows Me 98 95 386 Windows NT 478 628
401. ts of Menus 85 Maintenance 116 Media 91 92 Memory 112 Network 111 Parallel 109 PCL Emulation 99 PPR Emulation 103 Print 89 Print Jobs 85 Shutdown 88 System Adjust 114 115 System Configuration 97 Test Print 87 Usage 117 118 USB 110 Message ERROR PDF to PS conversion failed 599 Messages Asterisk symbol repeating 526 Control Front Panel display 522 526 Listed by message 522 Messages amount of time before deleting PCL 97 PS 97 Messages CHANGE TONER 39 Messages DISK FULL Overlays Windows 2000 297 Windows Me 98 95 387 Windows XP 200 Proof and Print Windows 2000 283 Windows Me 98 95 373 Windows NT 465 Windows XP 187 Secure Print Windows 2000 287 Windows Me 98 95 377 Windows NT 469 Windows XP 191 Store to Hard Disk Windows 2000 292 Windows Me 98 95 381 Windows NT 473 Windows XP 195 Messages Error log 86 Messages Error messages don t display 97 Messages LOW TONER menu setting 98 Messages MANUAL TIMEOUT 97 Messages ONLINE 56 Messages TONER LOW 39 Messages WAIT TIMEOUT 98 Metric US Bond paper Duplexing 72 Paper Exit 72 Paper Feed 72 Paper Weight 72 Misalignment when printing color 95 Monitor Color Temperature 5000k Windows 2000 237 Windows Me 98 95 326 Windows NT 423 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index 758 Windows XP 142 6500k Windows 2000 237 246 Windows Me 98 95 326 335 Windows NT 423 432 Windows XP 142 151 9300k Windows 2000 237 246 Windows Me
402. tus Print from your application Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 80 7 Repeat the above steps until you get the desired magenta color intensity NOTE To adjust these settings for the Cyan Yellow or Black color intensity substitute the appropriate color name in the steps above Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 81 Printer Settings Menu Settings Printing a list of the Current Settings MenuMap Ready Menu Item Value Select Attention z Online Cancel Print the menu to see the current settings for the printer 1 Make sure paper is in the paper tray Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU displays Press SELECT PRINT MENU MAP displays Press SELECT The Menu MenuMap prints O AON Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 82 Printer Settings Menu Settings Changing the Printer Settings Menu _ Item Value _ Select Ready m O O Attention JAJ Cancel Press MENU until the required menu displays Press SELECT Press ITEM either or until the required item displays Press VALUE either or until the required value displays Press SELECT An asterisk appears next to the selected value 6 When you are finished press ONLINE ONLINE displays Oc c0 Nx Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 83 Printer Settings Menu Settings Reset to
403. ty 653 Examples of Account ID Scenarios To Permit Only Some Clients to Print In this case you need not necessarily assign an Account ID to each and every client You assign one only to those clients who are permitted to print All other clients will be recognized as Unregistered ID 0 and all you have to do is to inhibit printing by Unregistered ID clients To Permit Only Some Clients to Print in Color You can prevent any Unregistered ID clients from printing in color in the same way as above To Set the Print Limits and Collect Print Logs by Department In this case you need not necessarily assign an Account ID to each and every client All you have to do is to assign an Account ID to each department and specify the Group Name in place of User Name To Set Print Limits and Collect Print Logs for Each Client Here you need to assign an Account ID to each individual client Be sure that you do not to assign the same Account ID to more than one client NOTE All Account IDs must be set in the Server computer for each of the Client computers that will be allowed to print to a specific printer Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 654 Server Software Starting the Server Software Click Start Programs Okidata Print Job Accounting Print Job Accounting Important The first time you open the Server software the following window appears Make a note of the S
404. type of document you are printing most common RGB see page 329 professional desktop publishing and graphics CMYK see page 329 photographic images see page 330 specific colors i e a company logo see page 331 printing vivid colors see page 332 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 328 Color Matching Choosing a Method RGB or CMYK The guidelines for choosing a color matching method make distinctions between Red Green Blue RGB and Cyan Magenta Yellow Black CMYK Generally most documents you print are in RGB format This is the most common and if you do not know your document s color mode assume that it is RGB Typically CMYK documents are only supported in professional Desktop Publishing and Graphics applications Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows Me 98 95 Operation 329 Color Matching Choosing a Method Matching Photographs RGB only Oki Color Matching see page 339 is a generally a good choice Select a matching method appropriate to your monitor RGB or CMYK If you are printing photographic images from a graphics application such as Adobe Photoshop you may be able to use Soft Proofing to simulate the printed image on your monitor To do this you can use the ICC profiles provided see Windows ICM Color Matching on page 346 Print using the ICC profiles as the Print Space or Output space Ex
405. uments eene 287 PCE or PostScript irte eee SR GRECE 287 Hard Disk Drive eet tm terres 292 PCI or POSISCEDLU ea eet detenti tete E Ms 292 Overlays cs ses eed rete ode Medal hut doen tede pent 296 Whatare Overlays 5 iue eo ettet e ne ded 296 Example of Using Overlays eesseseeeeeeeee 296 Creating Overlays iaei ebat tuu etta 297 Creating documents to use as overlays see 298 Downloading the print file to use as an overlay 300 Defining Overlays 15 eth tetto Pee i ORE 302 Prnting Postets x see eda e dn tieng 309 PCI On Wide ned nth ed ied tts 309 Windows Me 98 95 ccsssssssstssssssessssesssseseseeseseeseaesseaesseausseaesseaesseaess 311 Printer Drivers ii eet i tede cae e dta o Revd a i ia edades 311 Which Printer Driver to Use wo eee ee eeeesesseeeetseeesecseeseeeaeenseeatenes 311 Memory Enabling onte eter rtr Rare d 312 PostScript Only tti eie ei dee 312 Hard Disk Drive Enabling eene 314 PostScript or POL isss iseer saaa aate pen itte 314 Paper Trays Enabling eee tte Ee tain 315 PostScript or PCI sete eere 315 Duplex Unit Enabling eese 316 PostScript or PCH e ette egre pert 316 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 8 Papet Feed Size and Medi a os 220 2 s tette toti 317 Changing Defaults 2 eee eee e 317 P stSenpt or POL
406. unt Detail Detailed information of each job for every Account ID including Account ID Job ID Date Document Name Paper Size Media Type Total Sheets Color Pages Mono Pages Total Costs Note To limit the columns displayed click Fields To limit the rows displayed either limit the date range or click Accounts Account Usage A chart of the data in the Account Summary worksheet Account Summary Summary of information for each account Printer Detail Detailed information for each job sent to each printer including Printer Name Job ID Date Account ID User ID Duplex Pages Total Sheets Color Pages Mono Pages Total Costs Note To limit the columns displayed click Fields To limit the rows displayed either limit the date range or click Accounts Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 710 Available Excel Macros Macro What is Included Printer Usage A chart of data in the Printer Summary worksheet Printer Summary The following information for each printer for which data is available Printer Name Total Jobs Total Sheets Number of Color Pages Printed Number of Duplex Pages Printed appears only when optional duplex unit is installed Total Costs Incurred as calculated by the Print Job Accounting software User Detail Detailed information for each job sent to the pri
407. ust enter the printer driver s and enable the options You only need to do this once 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Highlight the printer name Click File Click Properties 3 Click the Device Option tab Click Duplex Option Unit 4 Click OK Close the Printers dialog box General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Device Option Available Options Available Tray 1 Iv Duplex Option Unit Printer Hard Disk Cancel Apply Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 222 Paper Feed Size and Media Changing Defaults PostScript The normal default for these items is automatic detection NOTE If the settings in the printer differ from those selected on your computer the printer does not print An error message displays The following printer driver instructions are given as a guide only Some software applications require the paper feed size and media settings to be selected from within the software under Page Setup 1 Click Start gt Settings Printers 2 Right click the printer name Click Printing Preferences Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Printer Drivers 223 Important If you are using heavy media transparencies envelopes or labels use the face up straight through paper feed path For face up printing straight through path make sure the rear exit
408. ut Remedy Place the printer on a stable level surface Check the inside of the printer and remove any such objects Press the left and right sides of the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 551 Printer takes a long time to start printing Possible cause The printer has to warm up returning from power save mode The printer is cleaning the image drum This helps ensure good print quality The cleaning process takes time The printer is adjusting the temperature of the fuser This takes time The printer is processing data from another interface Remedy In the printer menu settings set power save to a higher value to increase the length of time before entering power save mode See POWER SAVE Mode on page 57 Wait until this process has been completed Wait until this process has been completed Wait until this data is processed Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 552 Printing is slow Possible cause Remedy Print processing is Use a computer with a faster processor carried out by the computer Print resolution is set Set lower print resolution in the printer driver high Data is too complex Simplify data Printing does not start Possible cause Remedy Printer error Check the control panel If an error message is displayed correct the problem Printing cancels Possible cause Remedy The printer
409. ut ep cR CREER PR 143 Color Matching i e ree ree reden 144 Choosing Methodist eee eee tete 144 RGB or CMYK eiie edet ar e rt eal 145 Matching Photographs eese 146 Matching Specific Colors eseseeeeeeeeeenen n 147 Example Company logo eene 147 Printing Vivid Colors e ER E ete e HR HERR 148 PEL DrV6r iei eg e GEO e de 149 Print Color Swatch Utility eere 152 PostScript Driver icc eee rette 153 OKI Color Matching et ttt ertet tette pated ceased 155 PostScript wes aee aO ee Ree teg 155 PostScript Color Matching eese 157 Using ICC Profiles eine eerte re 159 PostScript Only iste repete eb EE 159 Windows ICM Color Matching eere 162 PCL of PostScript cea e tiere iba 162 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet sess 163 N Up Printing ete re t a tnr e Er Re edu 163 PostSetipt enti Dar au e aee e Oe 163 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Contents 5 Gustom Page SIZess tenete oet dite i ttr roe desg 166 POStSCEIpt ret e eee etm e e rt EIER 166 jue ER 170 Print Resolution 2 e et ed te rete 174 PCL of POSUSCHDLU eg nee eei e rete E 174 Duplex Printing te m pte dte 175 Printing on Both Sides of the Paper sese 175 PoSstSerpt i een tere eerie e eg etie 175 POI cusan E 177 Pintng Booklets 4i ueterem eth
410. uto 802 2 802 3 Ether Il Snap Enable Disable Enable Disable XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX ON OFF ON OFF Description Enable Selects TCP IP protocol Enable Selects Netware protocol Enable Selects EtherTalk protocol Enable Selects NetBEUI protocol Enable Selects the Ethernet frame type Enable DHCP BOOTP is selected automatically Enable RARP is selected automatically Configures IP address Uses 12 alphanumeric characters Configures subnet mask Uses 12 alphanumeric characters Configures gateway address Uses 12 alphanumeric characters ON When the printer exits Menu Mode the Network MenuMap prints The Network MenuMap shows the results of self diagnosis tests and the current network printer settings ON When the printer exits Menu Mode the network initializes Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Setting Up 111 RECEIVE BUFF SIZE RESOURCE SAVE FLASH INITIALIZE PS FLASH RESIZE Memory Menu The default settings are bold Auto OFF 0 5 MB 1 MB 2 MB 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB AUTO Off 0 5 MB 1 MB 2 MB 4 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB Execute 0 n n MB TO 90 n n MB in 10 increments Description Sets the size of the receive buffer Depends on the amount of memory installed in the printer Set the size of the font cache area Depends on the amount of memory installed in the printer Ordinarily you shou
411. ve Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 616 Forms PCL Step 3 Convert the Files to Binary bin Format 1 Click Projects Filter Macro File The Filter Printer Patterns dialog box appears Page and Job Control Commands F Fomleed F Paper Trey F Reset TV Skip Perforation F Paper Size F Orientation F Vertical Motion Index F Simplex Duplex Line Spacing Job Separation TV Top Margin Tv Left Offset Registration IV Test Length IV Number of Copies Output Bin F Top Offset Registration Duplex Page Side Page Length Colour Commands F Configure Image Data I Render Algorithm I Set Viewing lluninant T Palette Control ID T Driver Configuration I Palette Control TV Monochrome Print Mode Special Options I Add Push Pop Cursor Commands I Separate Compound Macros into individual ies we ox om 2 Make any adjustments in the settings Example If you create a black oval in MS Paint and leave all the color command filters checked the black oval prints as a black rectangle when the overlay is used To maintain the oval shape turn off deselect the Configure Image Data Palette ID and Palette Control filters 3 Click OK The Open dialog box appears 4 Make sure Print spool files prn is selected in the File of type drop down list Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Storage Device Manager for Windows 617 Forms PCL
412. vices use very different technologies to represent color A monitor uses Red Green and Blue RGB phosphors or LCDs a printer uses Cyan Yellow Magenta and Black CMYK toner or ink A monitor can display very vivid colors such as intense reds and blues These cannot be easily produced on any printer using toner or ink Similarly there are certain colors some yellows for example that can be printed but cannot be displayed accurately on a monitor This disparity between monitors and printers is often the main reason that printed colors do not match the colors displayed on screen Viewing Conditions A document can look very different under various lighting conditions For example the colors may look different when viewed standing next to a sunlit window compared to how they look under standard office fluorescent lighting Printer Driver Color Settings The driver settings for Manual color can change the appearance of a document There are several options available to help match the printed colors with those displayed on screen These options are explained in subsequent sections of this User Manual Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 422 Factors that Affect Color Printing Monitor Settings The brightness and contrast controls on your monitor can change how your document looks on screen Additionally your monitor color temperature influences how warm or cool the colors look NO
413. without a hard disk drive installed A printers with a hard disk drive performs better Important If your software application has a collate option use it instead of the collate option in the printer driver To use the printer driver to select collating 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box on the General tab click the appropriate driver Click the Job Options tab 3 Under Job Type enter the number of copies required Only if the application has no collate option select Collate 4 Click Print PostScript Driver PCL Driver zix zizi General Layout Paper Quality Job Options Color Overlay General Setup Job Options Color Store to HDD Copes fi0 G Fine C Normal C Fast Toner Saving Quality C Normal C Fast I Toner saving Scale r Orientation Portrait r 180 A C Landscape 180 Watermark Overlay Font Advanced Default Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows 2000 Operation 282 Proof and Print PCL or PostScript Using Proof and print allows printing of a single copy of a document for checking before printing multiple copies of the same document NOTES The internal hard disk must be installed in the printer and enabled to allow for spooling of the print job before final printing If the hard disk memory is insufficient for the spooled data
414. wrinkled paper from the feed tray Adjust tray or manual feed guides Correct paper feed selection in the printer driver Troubleshooting 538 Paper Jams Printer does not print after jam is cleared Possible cause Remedy The top cover was Removing a paper jam is not enough closed before all paper The top cover cannot be closed until all of the paper jams were cleared jams are cleared Gently open and close the top cover Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Troubleshooting 539 Print Quality Problems Stripes White The stripes appear in the same direction as the paper was printed moved through the printer Possible cause Remedy LED head is dirty Clean LED head with lens cleaner or soft tissue See Cleaning the LED heads on page 517 Toner is low Change toner cartridge See Changing the Toner Cartridge on page 498 Image drum Change image drum damaged See Changing the Image Drum on page 505 Stripes Black The stripes appear in the same direction as the paper was printed moved through the printer Possible cause Remedy Image drum is Replace image drum damaged Changing the Image Drum on page 505 Toner is low Change toner cartridge See Changing the Toner Cartridge on page 498 Periodic black lateral Ifthe lines or spots occur at intervals of approximately lines or spots 44 94 mm the image drum green tube is damaged or dirty If damage
415. ws NT 411 418 444 450 Windows XP 129 137 167 171 Multi purpose MP tray 92 Paper Exit 73 Paper Feed 73 Paper Weight 73 Photocopier 76 Recommendations 76 website 76 Temperature requirements for printing 76 Thickness 73 Labels for identifying paper trays media size 570 Landscape Envelopes 48 Letterhead 47 Language on control front panel display 66 list of available languages 98 Language print languages 572 LCD Liquid Crystal Display Panel 63 See Messages LCD Liquid Crystal Display Panel diagram 63 LED head cleaning 504 505 517 540 541 542 precautions 504 Head restraint 30 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 754 Legal Tray number 114 Legal 13 paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Legal 14 paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Letter fit to letter FX emulation 107 PPR emulation 105 printing on A4 101 Letter paper size Duplexing 69 Paper exit 69 Paper Feed 69 Letterhead 91 Hard disk drive Windows 2000 292 Windows Me 98 95 381 Windows NT 473 Windows XP 195 How to load 42 47 diagram 55 Loading 42 47 Manual paper feed 55 Overlays Windows 2000 296 297 298 299 Windows Me 98 95 386 387 388 389 Windows NT 478 479 482 483 628 629 Windows XP 199 200 201 202 Paper Media Type 91 92 LF function FX emulation 107 PCL emulation 101 PPR emulation 105 Life expectancy of printer 574 Light Paper Weight 72 73 91 Ligh
416. xadecimal dump 115 information about print jobs 651 List of current printer settings 82 list of files in printers memory HDD 623 Network Administrator 651 Resolution Print Changing Windows 2000 270 Windows Me 98 95 360 Windows NT 454 Windows XP 174 Print Menu setting 90 Resource save Font cache size 112 Restore Menu 116 RGB numbers for software applications 595 RGB only matching photographs Windows 2000 241 Windows Me 98 95 330 Windows NT 427 Windows XP 146 RGB only matching specific colors Windows 2000 242 Windows Me 98 95 331 Windows NT 428 Windows XP 147 RGB only matching vivid colors Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 RGB or CMYK Windows 2000 240 Windows Me 98 95 329 Windows NT 426 Windows XP 145 RGB or CMYK matching photographs Windows 2000 241 Windows Me 98 95 330 Windows XP 146 RGB or CMYK matching specific colors Windows 2000 242 Windows Me 98 95 331 Windows NT 428 Windows XP 147 RGB or CMYK matching vivid colors Windows 2000 243 Windows Me 98 95 332 Windows NT 429 Windows XP 148 RGB vs CMYK Windows 2000 236 Windows Me 98 95 324 Windows NT 422 Windows XP 141 RGB setting your own color values Windows 2000 247 Windows Me 98 95 336 Windows NT 433 Windows XP 152 Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Index e 776 RGB Using ICC Profiles PS Windows 2000 254 Windows Me 98 95 344 Windows XP 159 RGB Windows ICM Color Matchin
417. y 674 Fees Define Fees window Drum use amount Tab Drum use amount Select to set a standard fee per page for color and for mono printing Automatic calculation Use this to set up automatic calculation of fees for drum use and save it under the name you enter Once the settings are saved they can be used for other printers as well by selecting the saved settings name in the Fees drop down box in either the Add a printer for which logs will be acquired window Printer gt Add a Printer click a printer Next or the Option tab of the Properties of printer from which logs are acquired window click a printer in the Printer Tree Printer Properties Option Printer Use Time Size Tray MediaType Belt fuser use amount Finisher Pages Toner use amount Drum use amount v Drum use amount Color Fee 0 dollar s pages Mono Fee 0 dollar s pages printer used for fee automatic calculation Color Price 0 dollar s Mono Price 0 dollar s Automatic calculation Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 675 Fees Define Fees window Printer Use Time Tab Printer Use Time Select to set a fee for each minute of print time used Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Print Job Accounting Utility 676 Fees Define Fees window Size Tab Size Select to set a fee per sheet printed which varies depending on
418. y User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 460 4 Click the Options button Set the Signature 2pages Right to Left and Bind Margin as required See the online Help for information Click OK 5 Click OK Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 461 Printing Watermarks PCL Only 1 Open the file in your application Select File Print 2 In the Print dialog box click the appropriate PCL driver Click Properties or Setup or your application s equivalent 3 On the Job Options tab click Watermark 4 Select a name from the Watermark list Watermark CONFIDENTIAL COPY Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 462 NOTE To create a new watermark or edit an existing watermark Click the New or Edit button Watermark Ok oi m nm ee m Font Cem Enter the text for the watermark Select the attributes font size angle to be used Click OK The new watermark appears in the Watermark list 5 f you wish to print the watermark only on the first page of the document select First Page only 6 Click OK twice 7T Print the document Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Windows NT 4 0 Operation 463 Collating PCL or PostScript Collating can be carried out with or without a hard disk drive installed A printer with a hard disk drive performs better Important If your software a
419. z 64 bit ES2426n ES2426dn 128 Mb standard ES2426e 256 Mb standard Up to 1 Gb max with optional memory modules PostScript3 PCL5c PostScript 3 PCL5c fonts First print time 8 sec mono 9 sec color IEEE Std 1284 1994 parallel Connection 36 pin receptacle Cable IEEE Std 1284 1994 compatible cable of up to 1 8 meters Transmission Mode Compatible Nibble mode ECP Interface Level e Low 0 0 0 8V e High 2 4 5 0V USB specification Version 1 1 Connection USB Type B Cable USB specification Version 1 1 cable shielded Transmission Mode Full speed 12 Mbps 0 25 maximum Executive Series 2426 Printer Family User s Guide Specifications 572 Power control Network Print speed in pages per minute ppm Print speed varies with paper size media weight and paper feed Media size Trays 1 2 3 Media size MP tray Media weight Paper capacity depending on paper weight Exit capacity depending on paper weight Print margin Print accuracy Startup time Self powered device 100BASE TX 10BASE T option Color 24 ppm Mono 26 ppm Duplex color 13 ppm Letter Legal 14 Legal 13 5 Legal 13 Executive A4 A5 B5 A6 Tray 1 only Letter Legal 14 Legal 13 5 Legal 13 Executive A4 A5 A6 B5 Envelopes C5 DL Com 9 Com 10 Monarch Custom up to 1200 mm length Trays 1 to 5 20 to 47 Ib US Bond 75 to 177 g m Multi purpose tray 17 to 54 Ib US Bond up to 113

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Aquatic 6030CSL-AW Instructions / Assembly  Untitled - Sony Europe  fonctionnement de Géoclip  PTOS 6.0 User Guide  TRUMAN - Groupe President Electronics  9015 - Candide  Frere Bruno Rennes 2007  Télécharger le rapport d`activité 2012 de Nautilia  Aprueban Circular referida a constancia de depósitos u  EN User manual for: Equimag2 Control unit Pro blanket Basic  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file